VH-VMV Poh PDF

Vulcanair
PN 68C
Victor
Australian GO\Wnment
Clvll Avlntlon Safely Authority
Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM)

' CASA Approval Page
••
.Aircraft .l'lfan11facturer or Make: jVULCAN AIR
:========================~
J
.-Jircraft Type (as in Australian Register) : j._P_._6_
8 _ _ _ _ __ _ __ _ _ _ __ _ _
=1
Aircraft Model (as In TCDS): jP.68C _ _J
~------------------·
J i.,,
Rdeilant NAA (National A irworthiness
JENAC Italy
Authority) for the AFM Doc11ment :
A FM D~cument Identifier : JNOR10.707-1B

I
Ser f.ii Number Appllcabilll)I Referenc'e*: 'Title/Intro TCDS
I
or Applicabil/JY to aircraft as identified
by .specl/Jc Serial Number and/or
··.·
· confignratlon :
• .;'i_; ..,; Numbr':...d.Ppli<·abilirv Rrfeunce Ctxlr.<

!.£ !'
7("ps
• Cu;unt l.og (lf.<tJ of E.'ff~rt/1•e Pag • .• for the ,1FM n11rttment.
. Cturrnt 'f'1pe C1"tlfirate Data .<hut ls.nm/ by tlte Relt:vant NAA.
J
Tltldlntro - CutTent Tltle.Pat:e or JnuoductJon Page(>) ofthe AFM Documrnt.
TC Holder • Data from the current ltald.:r oft/1.: Type Cl!rt/jlcate 1Jis11ed by tlu! uleWJnt fV, fA.
r;;., A in:raft Flight Manual (.~FM) document as Identified above is rite approved AFM for tlte
a_irrmfi tuwhich't/11 document is applicable (as speclfl~tl above).
; ,,,.. ,..,, ,, of tht:s AF11f document tltat l.v ""' uppro1·etl by the Reltl'anl /\'AA for an aircraj~ to
"'"·' It tlu. ducunumt iT ap11ficabli! (as specified obo1•e) is also 1wt appr ·CASA.
,., 'Ar
10
~·ig~1atory for t/le CM/ Aviation Safe~r .·1111/tority ': ........
Pri11ted .Vame ofabu••e Signutory:
l:jfectiw Dute bf'(/ii.• CASA Approl'nl Pui:r: ~- P2004__ _ ____]

P68C
FLIGHT MANUAL
NORI0.707-18
(Applicable from SIN 412 inclusive onwards)
4 1h ISSUE
(MAY 7, 2002)
SERIAL NUMBER ... 4..3.S.~ ........ .

REGISTRATION MARKS .. vft. -. .Vi"f.t/
CONFIGURATION:
- STD. RANGE .. . .. ...... ....... .. D
- LONG RANGE ....... . ... . ... ....~
FOR U.S. REGISTERED AIRCRAFT TH IS MANUAL IS F.A.A.

APPRO VED IN ACCOR.DANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS OF 14 CFR
·sECT!0N 2 1.29 AND IS REQUIRED BY F.A.A. TYPE CERTIFICATE
DA TA SHEET NO. A31EU.
THIS MODEL IS INCLUDED IN THE F.A.A. TYPE CERTIFICATE
DATA SHEET NO. A31EU.
THE A.F.M. IS ENAC APPROVED WITH LETTER NO. 02/171 243/SPA

DATED MAY 7, 2002.
THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE CA R~IED IN THE AIRCRAFT AT ALL

T IMES.
.
vucana1r •
Published by
Vulcanair S.p.A.
!.
~~ Australian Gm-cmment
~ Civil Aviation SarttyAutbority
Ame11dme11t Record Slieet

Aircraft Regi.•tration : VH - ' ' \'\\; Aircraft S!!rial Numbttr : - _ _4-
__,_'...;:
"::;,
"''-')'---
Incorporation De.•cription ofAmendment Incorporated
Date By
Issue of CASA Approval Page & Amendment Record Sheet fort

ENAC Italy Approvc..-d Flight Manual NORl0.707- l B Issue 4 nt
Revision 10 dated 15Jul2004 for the Vulc;in Air P.68C atrcrafl.
A.F ./11. l'/1~ N ON Iii. 707-1 B
~·{(.:~~ ---·------------------------
APPLICABILITY
Appiication of this Manual is limited to the specific Vulcanair P68C

:;10dd aircraft designated by serial number and registration on the face of
the till~ page.
This handbook cannot be used for operational purposes unless kept in

a current status.
REVISIONS
The information contained in the Flight Manual will be kept current by

revisions distributed to the airplane owners.
Revision material will consist of information necessary to update the

text of the present Manual and/or add information to cover added airplane
equipment.
Whenever necessary, revisions will be distributed as complete page

replacements or additions, and shall be inserted into the handbook in
accordance with the instructions given below.
(c) Revised pages will replace only pages with the same page number.
(f) Insert all additional pages in proper numerical order within each
section.
(g) Page number followed by a small letter shall be inserted in direct

sequence with the same common numbered page.
Revised text and illustrations shall be indicated by a black vertical line

along the outer margin of the page, opposite revised, added or deleted
material. Revised or added pages will only be identified by the revision
number at the bottom of the page.
Black lines will indicate only current revisions with changes and
additions to or deletions of existing text and illustrations.
Changes in capitalisation, spelling, punctuation or the physical location

of material on a page wi ll not be identified.
:JATE: MAY 7, 2002

,u·:M /'IN NORI0.707- 18
f6UC
LOG OF REVISIONS
REY. REF. J\PPROYJ\ L

REVISED PAGES DATED
NO. No. Dated
iii; 4-7; 4-8; 6-4 1;

6-42; 8-i; 8-ii;
Suppl. S:
ENAC No.
Pages I; 2; 9; 12;
Dec. 16, 03/ 171 I 03/SPA Mar. I I, 2003
I 13;
2002
Added Suppl.:
Sil ; R/1;
Added pages:
6-43; 7-1 7a
6-42; 8-ii; ENAC No.

2 Apr. I I, 03/ 171191/SPA May 7, 2003
Suppl. R:
2003
Pages I; 4; 5.
Cover Page; Sep. 11 ENACNo.

3 Sep. 18, 2003
2-1 ; 3-1 ;4- I 2003 03/ 171389/SPA
8-i; 8-ii; sci~ .

25
4 EASJ\ No. 087 Oct. 10, 2003
Added Suppl. L/2 2003
6-25; 8-ii; Oct. 02,

5 EASA No. 088 Oct. 10, 2003
Added Suppl. Y/ I 2003
iii; 6- 12;
Suppl. B: Page 5;
~
Suppl. D/ I: Page 3 1;
Suppl. E/2: Page 4 ; Under Authority of
Suppl. F: Page 9; DOA No.
Mar. 23,
6 Suppl. G/ I : Page 5; EASJ\.2 IJ.009 Mar. 25, 2004
2004
Suppl. Q: Page 7; with No.
Suppl. R: Page 5; AS-AFM/ 04/007
Suppl. R/I : Page 3;
Suppl. S: Page 13;
Suppl. SI I: Page 14;
This manual incorporates ENAC P.A. No. 98- 111 dated I Apr. 98,
and FAA AD 98-04-20 Arndt. 39-1 0332.
Rev. 6
ii DATE: MARCH 23, 2004
A.F.M. l'IN NOR I0.707-/H
LOG OF REVISIONS (Cont.)

I REF. APPROVAL
REV.
REVISED PAGES DATED
NO. No. Dated
Suppl. U: Page 14;

Suppl. V: Page 14
Suppl. V/I : Page 6; Under Authority of
DOA No.
6 Deleted pages: Mar. 23,
EASA.211.009 Mar. 25, 2004
Cont. 6-1 3 through 6-43; 2004
with No.
AS-AFM/04/007
Added pages:
iia; 7-17b
u nder Authority of
iii; 8-ii; DOA No.
Apr. 26,
i Added page 8-iia; EASA.211.009 May 2 1, 2004
2004
I Added Suppl. U/ I with No.

AS-AFM/04/008
Under Authority of
DOA No.
8-i i; 8-iia; May 04,
8 EASA.211.009 May 28, 2004
Added Suppl. R/2 2004
with No.
AS-AFM/04/009
iii; 3-ii;
June 09, EASA
9 Added pages: June 23, 2004
2004 No. 2004-6740.
2-15a; 3-1 1
~-· ·
Under Authority of
iii; 7-9; DOA No.
July 05,
10 Added pages: EASA.211.009 July 15, 2004
2004
7- ll a; 7- llb with No.
AS-AFM/04/0 16
Under Authority of
iii; 7-2 1; DOA No.
1; Sep 16,
' I Added pages: EASA.2 11.009 xxxxxxxxx
2004
I
i
7-1 7e; 7- 18a with No.
AS-AFM/04/018
Rev. i !
DA1'\t:: SEPTEMBER 16, 2004 iia
A.F.M. PIN NOR/O. 707-IB
vulcanair':I
P68C
LOG OF REVISIONS (Cont.)
REV. REF. APPROVAL

REVISED PAGES DATED
NO. No. Dated
Under Authority
4-6; 4- 1 I ; 4-12; of DOA No.
Aug. 3 1,
12 EASA.2 IJ.009 Aug. 31, 2004
2004
Added page iib with No.
AS-AFM/04/015
Oct. II, EASA

13 3- 11 Dcc.07,2004
2004 No. 2004-1 1863
Rev. 13
iib DATE: OCTOBER 11, 2004
, U-'./11. PIN NORI0. 707-IB
vulcanairS:
P68C
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title List of effective pages
GENERAL 1-i and

1-1Through1-13
2 OPERATING LIMITA TIO NS 2-i, 2-ii and

ENAC/EASA approved pages: 2-1 Through 2-18
2-i, 2ii and 2- 1 through 2-18 Plus 2-15a
3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 3-i, 3-ii and

ENAC/EASA approved pages: 3-1 Through 3-11
3-i, 3-ii and 3-1 through 3-11
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES 4-i, 4-ii and

ENAC approved pages: 4-1 Through 4-21
4-i, 4-ii and 4-1 through 4-21
5 PERFORMANCE 5-i, 5-ii, 5-iii and

ENAC approved pages: 5-1 Through 5-47
5-8; 5-9; 5-12; 5- 13;5- 18; 5-19;
5-20; 5-21 ; 5-24; 5-25
6 EQUIPMENT LIST 6-i and

WEIGHT AND BALANCE 6-1 Through 6- 12
ENAC approved pages:
6-i and 6-1 through 6-11
7 SYST EMS DESCRIPTION 7-i, 7-ii and

7- 1 Through 7-24
Plus 7-1 la, 7-1 lb, 7-17a, 7-17b, 7- 17c, 7-1 8a, 7-1 8b I
8 SUPPL EMENTS 8-i, 8-ii, 8-iia; 8-iii, 8-iv
and installed Equipment
Supplements
Rev. 11
DATE: AUGUST 31 , 2004 iii
This page intentionally left blank
(
VulcanAir S.p.A.
Via G. Pascall. 7
P68 SERIES
80026 Casoria (NA) - Italy
Tel.: +39-081·5918111
Fax: +39-081·5918172
www. v11k:1na1r.t.~>1n
vulcanair'=I
ENAC approval of Service Bulletins is limited to technical content. Mandatory inspections, modifications and/or other
technical directives and their relative lime limits arc laid down in lite pertinent Airworthiness Directives.
SERVICE BULLETIN
No. 113
ENAC Approval No. 2002-4 194/SVNA dated 25/07/02
111is document is lite Enl!lish tmns lation of the ENAC aooroved Italian oril!inal.
MANDATORY
SUBJECT: FUEL SYSTEM
I.GENERAL
I. I AIRCRAFT AFFECTED
All P68 Series aircraft.
1.2 PURPOSE
To supply more detailed instructions for the operational check of the fuel selector control
system, scheduled for every 100 flight hours as per the ENAC Approved current
Maintenance programme.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
This Service Bulletin has been prepared to address specific reports of malfunction or
improper fuel selector valve control system rigging.
This bulletin has been issued to update the maintenance procedures of. the fuel selector
control system, to ensure its correct operation.
First Issue dated 24/06/02 Page 1 of9

Vulcanalr spa Service Bulletin N° 113
1. GENERAL (Cont.)
1.4 COMPLIANCE
Perfonn an initial inspection within the next 50 hours scheduled inspection and however
not more than 3 months since receiving this bulletin. Than as required by the nonna l
inspection programme, check the fuel selector valve control system for correct operation at
I 00 hour intervals and any time one or more of the following conditions become evident:
MMCabin fuel selector knob is stiff and difficult to operate
.6.V.Thc dctcnt indicating the correct valve positions is no longer perceptible;
.16.es' Anomalous fuel level readings between tanks that cannot be attributed to different
engine fuel consumption as indicated by the fuel now gauge, or to evident fue l
leakage;
M.16 Uncommandcd fuel transfer between tanks in cases where the aircraft has been parked
on an unlevel surface. This condition may be noted by an evident imbalance of the
aircraft (one wing low).
1.5 TIME REQUIRED

Approximately 5 hours arc required for compliance with this Service Bulletin.
1.6 SPECIAL TOOLS

No special tools are required.
1. 7 VARIATION IN WEIGHT & BALANCE

Not Applicable
1.8 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LOAD

Not Applicable
1.9 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

Maintenance Manual
I.JO PUBLICATIONS AFFECTED

Maintenance Manual
I.I I APPLICATION TO BE CARRIED OUT BY

Certified Maintenance Facility.
First Issue dated 24/06/02 Page 2 of 9

Vulcanair s pa Service Bulletin N" 113
2. WORK PROCEDURE
2. 1. Rotate the cockpit fuel selector to all positions, checking for freedom of movement, and
check that the detent is perceptible when the knob is placed in each position.
WARNING ~
Any uncerta inty regarding positive detcnt sensibility may lea d to
involunta r erroneous ositionin of the fuel selector valve.
2.2. If the detenl is clearly perceptible, pe rform an operational check as per paragraph 2.4.
2.3. In case ofan un-pcrccptible dctcnt, pcrfonn trouble shooting as follows:
2.3.1 Position the cockpit Fuel Control Knob to the normally open position (Figure 1 refers).
2.3.2 With reference to lhc Maintenance Manual, remove the wing leading edge inspection
panel lo gain access to th<:: Fuel Seleclor Control Valve.
2.3.3 Remove the screws securing the Fuel Control Receiver to its bracket and carefully
move the receiver downwards until it disengages. Recover the key.
2.3.4 Insert a 3 mm diameter pin in the hole of the fuel selector control valve shaft. Using the
pin as a lever, manually rotate the valve shaft checking for freedom of rotation. In each
positio n the detcnt sig nalling valve positioning must be clearly perceptible. Replace the
selector valve if too hard to rotate, or if the detent signalling valve positioning is no
longer perceptible. (Refer to the applicable procedure iri the Maintenance M a nual)
2.3.5 With the receiver disconnected move the cockpit Control Knob and check for freedom
of movement.
2.3.6 If the co ntrol knob operates freely (Figures I and 2 refer).

a. Position the transmitter selector knob and the selector valve to nonnally open, by
o bserving the markings on the head of the selector valve shaft.
b. Reinstall the receiver, positioning the key as per figure 2.
c. C lose the wing inspection panel.
d. Perform an operational check as per paragraph 2.4.
2.3.7 If the control knob is hard to operate (Figures 2, 3 and 4 refer)

a. Gain access to the Fuel Control Transmitter removing the cockpit overhead panel.
b. Remove the stop tubes from the transmitter and the receiver.
c. Slowly rotate the transmitter shaft to extract the cable through the transmitter, and
when the cable disengages from the receiver, mark with a reference line the position
of the transmitter internal wheel with respect to the body.
d. Pull out the cable through the transmitter.
e. Disconnect the cable tube from the transmitter and the receiver.
f. Place a suitable sized container unde r the receiver end of the tube to collect solvent
and grease which will flow out from the tube during the next step of the procedure.
g. Spray methyl-ethyl-ketone solvent in the tube until all the old grease is removed. If
necessary, a fter spraying the solvent, the control cable may be used as a brush taking
c are not to damage it. Remove the cable and repeat solvent spraying, air dry the tube.

Vulcanair spa Service Bulletin N° 113
2. WORK PROCEDURE (cont.)
h. Degrease the cable using methyl-ethyl-ketone solvent and inspect it for condit ion and
wear. Replace if damaged or worn.
i. Manually grease the cable lightly with graphitic grease.
j. Connect the transmitter and the receiver to the tube.
k. Install the cable pushing it into the transmitter. Tum the transmitter shaft to help the
cable enter the tube checking for freedom of sliding. When the cable impacts the
internal wheel of the receiver, position the wheel according to the reference line as
indicated in step "c". Continue pushing the cable to engage the receiver. When
pushed the cable may be rotated counter-clockwise to facilitate engagement of the
receiver.
NOTE: In case of stiffness check the cable tube for deformation or dents.
A damaged tube that obstructs the cable from sliding freely must be
replaced or repaired. If necessar y, contact Vulc:mAir- for further
instructions.
I. Position the selector valve to normally open, by observing the markings on the head
o f the valve shaft. Refer to Figure I .
m. Tum the transmitter shaft until 2.06 ± 1/8 inches of the cable protrudes from the
transmitter.
n. Jnstall the receiver by aligning the two key slots on the receiver and the valve shaft
respectively. Check that the protrusion of the cable is in accordance with the values
indicated in step "m". If necessary, pull back the cable to disengage the receiver and
repeat step "k" adjusting the receiver internal wheel position to obtain correct
rigging.
o. Install the receiver, positioning the key as indicated in Figure 2.
p. For aircraft up to SIN 122, install the receiver and transmitter stop tubes. Rotate the
cockpit fuel selector control knob in all its positions and check that the markings on
the head of the valve shaft are in accordance with Figure 1.
q. For aircraft from SIN 123 onwards, rotate the cockpit fue l selector control knob to
the ENG SHUT OFF position. Install the receiver stop tube as indicated in Figure 4
and before tightening the cable stop screw, check that the marking on the head of the
valve shaft is set as indicated in Figure 1 (ENG. SHUT OFF). Tighten the stop screw
a t 2 mm from the extremity of the slot in the stop tube as indicated in detail A of
Figure 4. Rotate tbe cockpit fuel selector control knob in all its positions and check
that the markings on the head of the valve shaft are in accordance with Figure 1.
Install transmitter stop tube.
r. Install the overhead panel and all previously removed items.
s. Position the cockpit fuel selector control knob to normally open.
t. Install the fuel transmitter control knob with it's pointer centered on the normally
open position.
u. Close wing inspection panel.
v. Perform an operational check as per paragraph 2.4.

2. WORK PROCEDURE (cont.)
2.4 FUEL SYSTEM OPERATIONAL CHECK
2.4.1 Tow the aircraft to a suitable engine test area.
2.4.2 Ensure that the quantity of fuel in the tanks is enough to guarantee at least thirty
minutes of continuous engine operation.
2.4.3 Position the aircraft upwind, and place chocks under the main landing gear wheels.
2.4.4 Sta11 both engines according to the procedure in the relative Flight Manual.
2.4.5 Run both engines at 1,500 RPM.
2.4.6 Place the ldl engine fuel selector control knob in the ENG SHUT Off position and
verify that the LI-I engine shuL~ down. If engine docs not shut down, replace the fuel
selector control valve.
2.4.7 Place the left engine fuel selector control in the LI-I TANK position.
2.4.8 Restart the LH engine and run at 1,500 RPM.
2.4.9 For Aircraft from Serial Number 123 onwards: Place the left engine fuel selector
control knob in the ENG SHUT OFF position, and when it begins to shut down, place
the selector control knob in the RIGHT TANK position and verify that the engine runs
normally. If necessary tum on the electrical FUEL PUMP relative to the tank in use.
Allow engine to run in this regime for at least 2 minutes.
2.4.10 For Aircraft up to Serial Number 122: Place the left engine fuel selector control
knob in the ENG SHUT OFF position and when it begins to shut down, place the left
selector control knob in the TANK OFF position and the right selector control knob in
the CROSS FEED position. Verify that the engine runs normally. If necessary turn on
the e lectrical FUEL PUMP relative to the tank in use. Allow engine to run in this
regime for al least 2 minutes.
2.4.11 Repeat the applicable procedure above for the RH engine, inverting the selections as
required.
2.4.12 Insert this Service Bulletin in the applicable Section of the Maintenance Manual until
a new revision is issued.
2.4.13 Record compliance with this Service Bulletin in the aircraft Log-Book.
2.4.14 To ensure crewmcmbers arc aware of the contents of the present Bulletin, insert
a copy of this Bulletin in the Aircraft Flight Manual applicable section.

Vulcanair s pa Service Bulletin N° 113
( i1c1tr FUCL CONTROL LINC J
(r i--~~L:E:~::OR
I
.- -
FUEL CONTROL
-
LUBRICATION
FITTING...._
~ GUIOETUB~E
11 LUBRICATION
FITTING
I Lil'.~ J ~,
FUEL CONTROL
FLEXIBLE CABLE FUEL SELECTOR FLEXIBLE CABLE
FUEL SELECTOR
VALVE
NORMAL ON 6)
VALVE
ca NORMAL ON
C ROSSFl:EO ca ' · OPCN LINES FUEL CONTROL HANDLE

OPEN LINES · ! 6) CROSSFEEO
EN G. SH UT OFF C9 J I I ~ ENG. SHUT OFF
1 ~~
FUEL CONTROL TRANSMITTER -'
STOP TUBE
> r
,:~: =-©i
·-===-;
--·---
FUEL SELECTOR
PLACARD
FUEL CONTROL TRANSMITTER
STOP TUBE
For P68 Series A ircrafi from Serial N umber 123 onwards
I LCFT FUCL CONTROl UNE I I RJGHT FUCL COHTROl UHE I

FUEL CONTROL RECEN'Eft FUEL CONTROL RECErYER
LUBRICATION
FITTING
FUEL SEUCJORVA!.\I~ ' y '
llOntML 0 11
RHTAHKTO U I ENGINE
CB I
6 l OPENUNES
r El)
6
CB
llORMAL 0 11
l.H TAHK l0 RH ENG,IN€
l@:~.::O:AHO~ENGINES
OPCNUNCS • '
El)
f
ENO. SHUT Off
LHTAHKTOLHANDRHENCdHES @
FUEL COHTROt. TRANSMITT~
STOP TUOE STOPTUOE
For P68 Series Aircraft up to Serial Number 122
Figure 1 - Fuel Control System Scheme

Vulcanair spa Service Bulletin N " 113
;: u·~
- •. I: !
Figure 2 - Fuel Selector Valve and Receiver Installation

Vulcanair spa Service Bulletin N" 113
_ 2 0& '11/e:_
. CO NTROL r."ALl
•UE L CONTROL
THANSMITTER sror ruHt-
OVU4HEAO
- UOLl
.: : -"'-.,,,...__
~· ....
FU~L S LLLCTOR
PlACAHO
· HANDLE
·· WAStt ER
- - LOCK WASULR
llOLT
Figure 3 - Cockpit Fuel Selector Control Installation

DETAIL "A"
CABLE STOP SCREW·-F·· TJ
! r __ :.(
i- 1 ~-:- ,.. ., ..,
I [1: .: '··-···
· :...j ~2mm r:-:,J
, t ..
' r t;':!..;
:··•:.:. _. ':' ':"·''··:.•, ~~: ~.' .. :~:. :'~:".\.]
90mm
Figure 4 - Fuel Selector Control Receiver for P68 aircraft from Serial Number 123 onwards
i-1rst Issue dated 24/06/02 Page 9 of9

Scctlon 1
GENERAL
SECTION 1
GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Page
I.I INTRODUCTION ............. .. . .................. 1-1
i.2 ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS ... .. ............... . . 1-1
1.3 ENGINES ...................... . ................. 1-1
1.4 PROPELLERS .... ... ..... ......................... 1-2
1.5 FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.6 OIL .. ............. .... ....... .... ............. .. 1-3
1.7 WEIGHTS .... .. ................... . ... ........... 1-4
1.8 SPECIFIC LOADINGS ...... -. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.9 SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMINOLOGY ... 1-5
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 1- i

.,
Vu •c~-~a·
~ ·l;';. ·~ , -
1·r_i;t:,,.
d:: Section I
P68C GENERAL
SECTION 1
GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
Section 1 of this handbook presents basic aircraft data and general

irtformation which will be of value to the user.
1.2 ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS

Useful publications relating to equipment are listed below for the
convenience of the user:
(a) P68C Ma intenance Manual (ENAC Approved).
(b) TEXTRON LYCOMlNG 10-360-A I 86 Engine Operator's Manual

(FAA Approved Manual P/N 60297-1 2).
(c) HARTZELL Propeller Owner's Manual (FAA approved Manual

I ! SN).
(d) Operating Instructions for Navigation and Communication

installations, as published by the relevant equipment
manufacturers.
1.3 ENGINES
(a) Number of Engines 2
(b) Engine Manufacturer Textron- Lycoming
(c) Engine Model Number 10-360-A I 86
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 1-1

!•:..JE ... . I
(d) Rated Horsepower (BHP)
(e) Propeller Speed (RPM) 2700
(f) Dry Weight (lbs/kg) 332/ 151
(,3) Engine Type Four cylinder, direct drive

horizontally opposed, air
cooled, fuel-injected,
361 cubic-inch displacement
1.4 PROPELLERS
(a) Number of Propellers 2
(b) Propeller. Manufacturer Hartzell Propeller Inc.
(c) Blade Model FC 7666A-4

I
(d) ! fombcr of Blades 2
(e) Hub Model HC-C2YK-2C( )F
(t) Propeller Diameter (in.Im) 72/1.829
(g) Propeller Type Constant speed, fully

feathering, non-reversible,
hydraulically operated
1-2 DATE: MAY 7, 2'.>:lt: ·

vulcanair~ Section 1
P68C GENERAL
1.5 FUEL
(a) Total and usab le fuel
FUEL TABLE
I SYSTEM
TOTAL FUEL CAPACITY
U.S. Gals Lt.
USABLE FUEL
U.S. Gals Lt.
STD. RANGE
142 538 137 520
CONFIGURATION
LONG RANGE
184 696 177 670
CONFIGURATION
(b) Fuel Grade Aviation Grade 100/ 130. Isopropyl ·

alcohol may be added to the fuel
supply in quantities not to exceed I%
of the total. Refer fo the latest
edition of Lycoming S.I. No. I 070.
1.6 OIL
(a) Oil Sump Capacity (each engine)
(U.S. gal/It) 2/7.5
(b) Usable Oil (each engine)

(U.S. gal/ It) 1.5/5.7
(c) Oil Specification Refer to latest FAA Approved

revision of Lycoming Spec. No. 301
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 1-3

I . ~
.._;; r· - . VUMC?.na.1~ <£.:0!
G"'.. , "'fi , ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

P6<lC
1.7 'NEIGHTS
lb kg
(a) Maximum Ramp Weight 4630 2100
(b) Maximum Takeoff Weight 4594 2084
(c) Maximum Landing Weight 4365 1980
(d) Maximum Zero. Fuel Weight 4167 1890
(e) Maximuin ·w eight i11. Baggage

Compartment at 1.542 m aft
of datum 400 180
(f) Standard Empty Weight(*) 3040 1380
(*) These values are approximate and vary from one aircraft to
another. Refer to Figure 6-3 for the Basic Empty Weight value and
the Useful Load Value to be used for the specified aircraft.
(g) Max imum Useful Load

(Standard aircraft
including ramp fuel) 1590 720
1.8 SPECIFIC LOADINGS
(a) Wing Loading

(lb per sq. ft/kg per sq.mt) 22.95/ 11 2.04
(b) Power Loading

(lb per HP/kg per HP) 11.48/5.2 1
i-4 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

\.'\.~!canair di Section 1
P68C GENERAL
1.9 SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND

TERMINOLOGY
The following definitions are ofsymbols, abbreviations and terminology
used throughout the handbook and those which may be ofadded operational
significance to the pilot.
(a) General Airspeed Terminology and Symbols

' I ' I '
CAS Calibrated Airspeed means the indicated

speed of an aircraft, corre<;:ted for position
and instrument error. Ca)ibrated airspeed is
equal to true airspeed in standard
atmosphere at sea level.
KCAS Calibrated Airspeed expressed in "Knots".
IAS Indicated Airspeed is the speed ofan aircraft

as shown by the airspeed indicator when
corrected for instrument error. IAS values
published in this manual assume zero
instrument error.
KIAS Indicated Airspeed expressed in "Knots"
TAS True Airspeed is the airspeed of an airplane

relative to undisturbed air which is the CAS
corrected for altitude, temperature and
compressibility .
KTAS True Airspeed expressed in "Knots"
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 1-5

.
vuIcanri ir ,. ,
~
GEN~RAL P6~C
VA Manoeuvring Speed is the maximum speed

at which application of full available
aerodynamic control will not overstress the
airplane.
VFE Maximum Flap Extended Speed is the

higP.est speed pennissible with wing flaps in
a prescribed extended position.
VMCA .Air Minimum Control Speed is the

minimum flight speed at which the aircraft is
directionally controllable as determined in
accordance with Certification Regulations.
• Aircraft certification conditions include:
one engine becoming inoperative and
windmilling; not more than a 5' bank
towards the operative engine; takeoff power
on operative engine; flaps in takeoff position
and most rearward C.G.
VNO Maximum Structural Cruising Speed is the

speed that should not be exceeded except in
calm air and then only w ith caution.
VNE Never Exceed Speed is the speed limit that

may not be exceeded at any time.
vs Stalling Speed or the minimum steady flight

speed at which the aircraft is controllable.
VS I Stalling speed or the minimum steady flight

speed obtained in a specific configuration.
1-6 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

vulcanair~ Section I
P68C GENERAL
vso Stalling Speed or the minimum steady flight

speed at which the aircraft is controllable in
the landing configuration.
vx Best Angle-of-Climb Speed is the airspeed

which delivc·rs the greatest gain of altitude
in the shortest possible horizontal distance.
VY Best Rate-of-Climb Speed is the airspeed

which-delivers the greatest gain in altitude in
the shortest possible time.
SCREEN The speed which must be obtained at, or

SPEED before, the screen height of 50 feet is
reached.
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 1-7

vu!canri ir~
P6SC
-. - - - .. - ··- - - - - - - -- -- - - - - - - - --
1.83
.._=2.40~J
3.90
DIMENSIONS IN METRES
12.00
Figure 1-1
THREE VIEW
1-8 OATE: MAY 7, 2002

vuicanair~ Section)
P68C GENERAL°
DIMENSIONS IN METRES
Figure 1-2
CABIN , BAGGAGE COM PARTMENT AND
ENTRY DIM ENS IONS
DATE: MAY7,2002 1-9

(b) i'lteteorological Terminology
ISA International Standard Atmosphere in which

the air is a dry perfect gas. The temperature
at sea level is 15° Celsius (59° Fahrenheit).
The pressure at sea level is 29.92 inches Hg
(1013.32 mB). The temperature gradient
from sea ,.level to the altitude at which
temperature is -56.5 °C (-69.7° F) is -
0.00198° C (-0.003566° F) per foot and zero
above that altitude.
· OAT Outside Air Temperature is the free air static

temperature obtained either from in-flight
temperature indications or ground
me teorological sources, corrected for
instrument error and density e ffects.
. ·, PRESSURE · Altitude measured from standard sea-level

ALTITUDE . pressure (29.92" Hg) by a pressure or baro-
metric altimeter. It is the indicated pressure
altitude corrected for position and
instrument error. In this handbook, altimeter
instrument errors are assumed to be zero.
WIND The wind velocities recorded as variables on

the charts of this handbook arc to be under-
'_,' I ..-. ·• stood as the headwind or tailwind compo-
nents of the reported winds.
(c) Power Tenninology
BHP Brake Horsepower means the power

delivered at the propeller shaft.
l-10 OATE: MAY 7, Z002

vulcanair .. Section 1
P68C GENERAL
MAXIMUM Maximum power permissible for

CONTINUOUS unrestricted periods of use.
POWER
RPM Rotational speed of the propeller shaft

measured in Revolutions Per Minute.
(d) Aircraft Performance and Flight Planning Terminology.
DEMONSTRATED The demonstrated crosswind velocity is the

CROSS-WIND velocity of the crosswind component for
which adequate control ofthe aircraft during
takeoff and landing was actually demonstra-
ted during certification tests, but is not
considered a limitation.
ACCELERATE- The di stance required to accelerate an

STOP DISTANCE aircraft to a specified speed and, assuming
failure of an engine at the instant that speed
is attained, to bring the ai rcraft to a complete
stop.
(c) Weight and Balance Terminology
REFERENCE An imaginary vertical plane from which all

DATUM horizontal distances are measured for
balance purposes.
ARM The horizontal distance from the reference

datum to the centre of gravity (C.G.) of an
item.
MOMENT The product of the weight of an item

multiplied by its arm.(Moment divided by a
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 1-11

'tulcari:i1r~
...
t'"" • l'- .. T(T\ [, •
,, ' .\ , . ., P68C
constant is used to simplify balance

calcul~tions by reducing the number of
digits)
CENTRE OF The point at which an aircraft wou ld balance

GRAVITY if suspended. Its distance from the reference
(C.G.) datum is found by dividing the total moment
by the· total weight of the aircraft.
C.G. ARM The a rm obtained by adding the individual

component moments and dividing the sum
by the total weight.
C.G. LIMITS The extreme centre of gravity locations

within whic h the aircraft must be operated at
a given weight.
USABLE Fuel available for flight planning.

FUEL
UNUSABLE Fuel remaining after a runout test has been

FUEL completed in accordance with certification
regulations.
STANDARD Weight of a standard aircraft including

EMPTY unusable fuel, full system fluids and full oil.
WEIGHT
BASIC Standard empty weight plus optional

EMPTY equipment actually installed.
WEIGHT
1-'2 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

vulcanair CE! Section I
P68C GENERAL
PAYLOAD Weight of occupants, cargo and baggage.
USEFUL LOAD Difference between takeoff weight, or ramp

weight if applicable, and basic empty
weight. It includes payload and usable fuel.
MAXIMUM Maximum weight approved for ground

RAMP manouevre. (It includes weight of start, taxi
WEIGHT and run up fuel).
MAXIMUM Maximum weight approved for the start of

TAKEOFF the takeoff run.
WEIGHT
MAXIMUM Maximum weight approved for the landing

LANDING touchdown.
WEIGHT
MAXIMUM Maximum we ight with no usable fuel.

ZERO FUEL
WEIGHT
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 1-13

This page intentionally lcfl blank
- vulcanair
P68C
Section 2
LIMITATIONS
.....
'
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph ~age
2.i GENERAL . ... .... . . ............................. : 2-1
2.2 AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS .................. ..... ...; 2-2
2.3 AIRSP EED IN DICATOR MAR.KlNGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4 POWERPLANT LlMITATIONS ...................... 2-3
2.5 POWERPLANT INSTRUMENT MAR.KlNGS . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.6 SYSTEM INSTRUMENT MARKINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2. 7 WEIGHT LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.8 CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 2-6
2.9 MANOEUVRE LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.10 FLIGHT MANOEUVRE LOAD FACTOR LIMITS ....... 2-9
2. 11 CREW LIMITS ...... .............. .... .... ~. . . . . . . 2-9
2. 12 TYPE OF OPERATION LIMITS ...................... 2-9
2. 13 FUEL LIMITATIONS 2-10
ENAC Approval No.: 02/171243/SPA

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 2-i
I · Fil
S;;cf . ., ~ vu.cana1r rs..1
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
...
Paragraph Page
.. 2.14 'FLAP LIMITS . " . .... : ..................... 2-1 1
2.15 :SEATING LIMITA TIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 11
2.16 LOADING LIMITS .... .. .. ........ .. . . .. ..... 2-12
2. 17 PLACARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
2.18 KINDS OF OPERATIONS EQUIPMENT LIST . ... 2- 16
ENAC Appro~al No.: 02/ 171243/SPA

2-ii DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanair cs Section 2
P68C LIMITATIONS
SECTION 2
LIMITA TIO NS
2.1 GENERAL
J '.
Section 2 of this Manual presents the aircraft operating limitations, the
significance of these limitations, instrument markings, colour coding and the
basic placards necessary for safe operation of the aircraft, its powerplant,
standard systems, and standard equipment.
NOTES
Refer to Section 8 of this Flight Manual for
amended operating limitations, operating
procedures, performance data and other
necessary information for aircraft equipped
with specific options.
For U.S. registered airplanes, the limitations

included in this Section and Section 8 have
been approved by the Federal Aviation
Administration. Obse rvance of these
operating limitations is required by Federal
Aviation Regulations.
Rev.3
ENAC Approval No.: 03/ 171389/SPA
DATE: SEPTEMBER 18, 2003 2-1
:! ·.ctir.71 2 vu; cana.1r. iJ1"il
'<-'!
LIM" . ATIONS P6~lf.
2.2 AfRSPEED LIMITATIONS
SPEED KCAS KIAS
Design Manoe uvring Speed (VA) -

Do not make full or a brupt control
movements above this speed. ,
1500 Kg (3307 lb) 112 116
2084 Kg (4594 lb) 132 137
NOTE
Linear interpolation may be used for intermediate
gross weights.
Max imum Flaps Extended Sp eed

(VFE) - Do not exceed this speed at
the given flap setting.
15° flap 152 16 1
35° flap 103 111
Air Minimum Control Speed (VMCA)

" Lo wes t Airspeed a t w hich the
aircraft is controllable with one engine
operating. 58 62
Never Exceed Speed (VNE) - Do not

exceed this speed under any 194 201
c'i'rcumstances.
Maximum Structural C ruising Speed

(VNO) - Do not exceed th is speed
except in calm ai r a nd t he n w ith 154 160
caution.
ENAC Approval No. : 02/ 171243/SPA

2-2 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanair': Section 2
P68C LIMITATIONS
2.3 AIRSPEED INOICATOR MARKINGS

MARKINGS KlAS
White Arc (Flaps Extended 35°) 62 to 111
Lower Red Radial Linc (Air Minimum Control Speed) 62
Blue Radial Linc (Best Rate of

Climb Speed - Single Engine) 92
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 69 to 160
Yellow Arc (Caution Range) 160 to 201
Upper Red Radial Line (Maximum.Speed for all operations) 201
2.4 POW ERP LANT LIMITATIONS

(a) Number of engines 2
(b) Engine Manufacturer Textron Lycoming
(c) Engine Model Number J0,360-AlB6
(d) Engine Operating Limits
( I) Maximum Continuous Power 200 HP @ 2,700 RPM

(2) Maximum Cylinder Head Temperature 475° F
(3) Maximum Oil Temperature 245° F
(4) Oil pressure
- Minumum fo r idle 25 PSI
- Maximum 90 PSI
(5) Maximum Fuel pressure 35 PSI

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 2-3
Sceion 2 vu!canair~
L!MITAT:ONS P68C
(e) Fuel Specifications
100/J 30 Aviation Grade Fuel is the minimum grade approved for

this engine.
lsopropyl alcohol is approved as an anti-ice additive in a
concentration of no more than I% by volume of the total fuel
quantity.
(f) Oil
(I) Specifications
Lubricating Oil should conform to Lycoming Spec. No.
301-F or subsequent FAA approved revisions.
(2) Oil Sump Capacity (each engine) 7.5 It
Usable Oil (each engine) 5.7 lt
(g) Propellers
(I) Number of Propellers 2

(2) Propeller Manufacturer Hartzell Propeller Inc.
(3) Propeller Hub Model HC-C2YK-2CUF
(4) Propeller Blade Model FC 7666A-4
(5) Propeller Diameter 72"; 1.829 mt.
(No reduction permitted)
(6) Propeller Blade Angle Range (at 30" sta.)
- Low pitc h 14.2° +/- 0.2°
- Feather 81.2° +/- 0.3 •
(7) Propeller RPM limit 2700
2.5 POWERPLANT INSTRUMENT MARKINGS

(a) Cylinde~ Head Temperature
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 200 - 439° F
Yellow Arc (Caution Range) 440 - 475° F
Red Line (Maximum) 475° F
(b) Fuel Pressure

Red Arc (Minimum) 14 PS I
Yellow Arc (Caution Range) 15 PS I
ENAC Approval No. : 02/ 171243/S PA

2-4 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanaii-~ Section 2
P68C LIMITATIONS
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 16-30PSI

Yellow Arc (Caution Range) 31 - 35 PSI
Red Arc (Maximum) 36 PSI
c) Tachometer
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 550 - 2700 RPM
Red Radial (Maximum) 2700 RPM
(d) Oil Pressure

Red Radial (Minimum) 25 PSI
Yellow Arc (Minimum Caution Range) 26 - 59 PSI
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 60 - 86 PSI
Yellow Arc (Caution Range) 87 - 90 PSI
Red Radial (Maximum) 90 PSI
(e) Oil Temperature

Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 75" - 224° F
Yellow Arc (Caution Range) 225 - 245° F
Red Radial (Maximum) 245" F
(t) Exhaust Gas Temperature

Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 11 80 - 1380° F
(g) Manifold Pressure

Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 10 -32 In/Hg
Yellow Arc Not used
Red Arc Not used
(h) Fuel Flow

Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 0-22 GPH
Yellow Arc Not used
Red Arc Not used
2.6 SYSTEM INSTRUMENT MARKINGS

(a) Pneumatic Suction Gauge
Normal Operating Range 4.5 to 5.2" Hg

DATE: MAY7,2002 2-5
Section 2 vulcanair~
LIMITATIONS P68C
2.7 WEIGHT LIMITS

It is the responsibility of the aircraft owner and/or pilot to ensure that
the aircraft is properly loaded. Maximum allowable weights arc listed
below. Refer to Section 6 "Weight and Balance" for loading instructions.
Kg Lb
(a) Maximum Ramp Weight 2100 4630
(b) Maximum Takeoff Weigh': 2084 4594
(c) Maximum Landing Weight 1980 4365
(d) Maximum Zero Fuel Weight 1890 4167
(e) Maximum Weight in Baggage

Compartment 180 400
2.8 CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS

(Refer to Figure 2-1)
(a) Rearward Limits:
- 0.481 m ( 18.92 inches) aft of datum at all weights.
(b) Forward Limits:
- 0.325 m(l2.80 inches)aft of datum at Ramp Weight of2 100 Kg

(4630 pounds).
- 0.320 m ( 12.60 inches) aft of datum at Maximum Takeoff

weight of2084 Kg (4594 pounds).
- 0.230 m (9.06 inches) aft of datum at 1680 Kg (3704 pounds) or

less.

2-6 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
..
•
vulcanair5: Section 2
P68C LIMITATIONS
NOTES
Straight line variation between points indicated. The
datum line is located at wing leading edge.
2.9 MANOEUVRE LIMITS

This is a normal category aircraft.
Aerobatic manoeuvres, including spins, are prohibited.
At speeds in excess of the . manoeuvring speed (see para. 2.2), the

controls must not be full y or abruptly deflected.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 2-7
Sectif\n 1 vulcanair~
LIMITATIONS P68C
";
c
0
-
x
0
~
zz
•6
zo
•o 18
J~ 16
H
JO
"'
~
\l o r•o• n ft d1tu"T'
10 12 l .C 16 18 20
C. 0 POS•TIQ' . nchn t1tl datum
Figure 2- 1
Am.CRAFT WEIGHTS VS. CENTRE OF GRAVITY
ENAC Approval No. : 02/171243/SPA

2-8 DATE: MAY7,2002
vulcanair": Section 2
P68C LIMITATIONS
2.10 FLIGHT MANOEUVRING LOAD FACTOR

LIMITS
(a) Positive Load Factor (Flaps Up) 3.74 g ' s
(b) Negative Load Factor (Flaps Up) -1.50 g's
(c) Positive Load Factor (Flaps Down) 2.00 g's
NOTE
No inverted manoeuvres approved.
2.11 CREW LIMITS

The minimum crew is one pilot who must occupy the left hand seat.
2.12 TYPE OF OPERATION LIMITS

The standard aircraft is approved for day operations under VFR Visual
Operations. With the proper optional equipment installed and operational,
the aircraft is approved for night VFR Visual Operations and for day and
night IFR Operations. The aircraft has not been approved for flight in
known icing conditions.
WARNING
Severe icing may result from environmental conditions outside of those

for which the aircraft is certificated. Flight in freezing rain, freezing drizzle,
or mixed icing conditions (supercooled liquid water and ice crystals) may
result in ice build-up on protected surfaces exceeding the capability of the
ice protection system, or may result in ice forming aft of the protected
surfaces.
This ice may not be shed by the ice protection systems, and may
seriously degrade the performance and controllability of the aircraft.
During flight, severe icing conditions that exceed those for which the

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 2-9
LIMITATIONS P68C
aircraft is certificated shall be determined by the following visual cues. If

one or more of these v is ual cues exists, immediately request priority
handling from Air Traffic Control to facilitate a route or an altitude change
to exit the icing conditions.
Unusually extensive ice accumulation on the airframe and

windshield in areas not normally observed to collect ice.
Accumulation of ice on the lower surface of the wing aft of the

protected area.
Accumulation of ice on the engine nacelles and propeller spinners

further aft than normally observed.
Since the autopilot, when installed and operating, may mask tactile cues
that indicate adverse changes in handling characteristics, use of the autopilot
is prohibited when any of the visual cues specified above exist, or when
unusual lateral trim requirements or autopilot trim warnings arc encountered
while the airplane is in icing conditions.
All wing icing inspection lights must be operative prior to flight into
known or forecast icing conditions at night.
NOTE
This supersedes any relief provided by
the Minimum Equipment List (MEL).
2.13 FUEL LIMITATIONS

(a) Fuel Quantity
See figure 2-2
NOTE
To obtain maximum fuel capacity fill one tank,
then the other tank, and then return to first tank
and top up to compensate for the unbalance.

2-10 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanair c Section 2
P68C LIMITATIONS
FUEL TABLE
TOTAL FUEL USABLE FUEL

SYSTEM
U.S. Lt. U.S. Lt.
STD. RANGE
142 538 137 520
CONFIGURATION
LONG RANGE
184 696 177 670
CONFIGURATION
Figµre 2-2 ,. ., .
2.14 FLAP LIMITS . '· 1
Do not lower flaps w ith cargo door open.
2.15 SEATING LIMITATIONS
No. FROM DATUM

SEATS Metres Inches
CREW 2 -0.950 -37.40
PASSENGERS 2 -0.146 -5.75

STD
CONFIGURATION 2 +0.867 +34.13
PASSENGERS 2 -0.186 -7.33

CLUB SEATING
CONFIGURATION 2 +0.867 +34.13
The number of passengers carried in the aircraft must not exceed 6 (six).
ENAC Approval No. : 02/171243/S PA

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 2-11
LIMITATIONS P68C
2.16 LOADING LIMITS

(a) Maximum Baggage Load 180 Kg (400 lb)
(b) Maximum Distributed Floor Loading 200 lb/sq.fl

975 Kg/sq.mt
2.17 PLACARDS
In Full View Of Pilot:
a) 0 0
OPERATIONAL LIMITS
- T his a ircraft mus t be operate d as a norma l cat e gory
aircraft In compliance w ith the o pe rating limit ations
st at ed In t he f orm of pl<:c ilrds, m a rkings a nd m a nua ls .
- No aerobatic m an oeuvres, including s pins , ilpproved .
- Mini mum s ingle e n g ine control s p eed : 62 KIAS.
- Max imum fla p ext ended speed 15° flap: 16 1 KIAS.
- Maximum fla p ext ended s p eed 35° flap : 111 K IAS.
- Maxim um m a n oeu v ring speed : 137 KIAS.
- T h e a irc raft is appr o v ed for d~-night VFR cond itio n s.
II i s a p proved for day -night IF condi tio n s If p roper
eq uipme nt Is inst alled and operationa l.
0 0
b)
WARNING
·When flying in high humidity environment at any
air temperalure, open the engine alternate air doors.
• To avoid opllcal illusion and severe vertigo, turn

antlcolllslon llght off upon entering clouds, fog or haze.
• Do not lower flaps with cargo door open.
• Expect large trim change with flaps down.
· Stall warning Inoperative with battery and ahernator

switches off.
c) CABIN FORCED HOT AIR

· O PERATIONA L LIMITS -
- OFF for TIO and lan d ing
- OFF if sing le eng ine
a lternator fa ilure occurs

2-12 DATE: MAY7,2002
vulcanaire;; Section 2
P68C LIMITATIONS
d)
FLYING IN KNOWN ICING
CONDITION PROHIBITED
Near Magnetic Compass
(e) RADIO ...

For N 30 6 0 E 120 150
Steer
For s 210 240 w 300 330
Steor
DATE AIRPATH
(f) Magnetic Compass may deviate

1
by more than 10~ when Fan
I Heater System is operative
On Fuel Selector Valve Control
v.ulcanai1':::
......
ENG, EHG.
OHUT
"'' OfF
TAKE OFF ANO LANO. WITH

AUXILIARY FUEL PUMPS ON
STD. RANG E CONFIGURATION
vulcanair':i:
'"°'
SHUT
••O.
•HUT
orr orr
TAKE Of f AHO LANO. wrTH

AUXILIARY FUEL PUMPS ON
LONG RANG E CO NFIGU RATION

DATE: MAY7, 2002 2-13
UMITATIONS P68C
Near Parking Brake Control
(h)
On Electrical Panel;
(i)
When starting on external power select
OFF both alternators and battery
On Emergency Exit Window:
(1)
EMERGENCY EXIT
1) PULL LOWER HANDLE.
2) SLIDE UPPER LEVER RIGHT
3) PUSH WINDOW OUT
On A ft Cabin Wall:
(m)
MAXIMUM BAGGAGE CAPACITY: 400 LBS (181 KG)
(n) Maximum dis tributed load on cabin

O and cargo floor: 2001b/sq.rt.(977Kg/s q .mt) O

2- 14 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
P68C LIMITATIONS
Near Each Fuel Tank Filler Cap:
Fuel tank capacity: 71 U.S.G. (269 Its)

1001130 Minimum Grade Aviation Gasoline
STD. RANGE CONFIGURATlON
Fuel tank capacity: 92 U.S.G. (348 Its)

1001130 Minimum Grade Aviation Gasoline
LONG RANGE CONFIGURATION
Near Each Oil Tank Filler Cap:
(p)
OIL
8 Qts. (7.5 Its.) Capacity
Inside the forward right-side door (CREW DOOR)
(q)
( EMERGENCY EXIT )
Near crew door Emergency Unlock push-button
(r)
EMERGENCY EVACUATION ONLY:
PUSH TO UNLOCK THE DOOR

ONLY AFTCR PROP STOP
In full view of Pilot:
(s)
WARNING
All Scat Back Rests Quick
Release Pins mus t be inserted
and locked during ail flight
phases

DATE: MAY7,2002 2-15
A. F.M. PIN NOR/0.707-111
Section 2 vulcanair ~
LIMITATIONS P68C
On Quick Release Pin of the Pilot, Copilot, Third and Fourth Scat Backs:
(t)
Approved by EASA
Rev.9
2-ISa DATE: JUN E 09, 2004
This page intentionally Jell blank
LIMITATIONS P68C
2.18 KINDS OF OPERATIONS EQUIPMENT LIST

(For U.S. registered aircrafts)
This airc1·aft may be operated in day or night VFR, and lFR when the
appropriate equipment is installed and operating.
The following equipment list identifies the systems and equipment upon
which type certification for each kind of operation was predicated. The
listed systems and items of equipment relative to the specified kind of
operation must be installed and operating unless:
1. The aircraft is approved for operations in accordance with a current

Minimum Equipment List (MEL} issued by the FAA.
or,
2. An alternate procedure is provided in the FAA Approved Aircraft

Flight Manual for the inoperative state of listed equipment, and all
relative limitations are complied with.
NOTE
The following systems and equipment list does not
include a ll equipm e nt req uired by Operating
Requirements. It also does not include components
obviously required for the aircraft to be airworthy
such as wings, empennage, e ngine, etc.

2- 16 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanair e11 Section 2
P68C LIMITATIONS
V FR DAY
VFR NI GHT
SYSTEM AND/OR COMPONENT
IFR DA Y
I FR NIGHT
ELEC fRIC AL POWER

I. VOLTAMMETER I I I I
2. LOW VOLTAGE - WARNING LIGHT I I I I
3. ALTERNATOR OFF - WARN ING LIGHT I I I I
LIGHT ,,
I. COCKPIT AND INSTRUMENT LIGHTS 0 10 0 10
2. CABIN LIGHTS 0 3 0 3
3. STROBE LIGHT 0 I 0 I
4. LANDING LIGHT 0 I 0 I
5. T AXI LIGHT .. 0 I 0 I
6. POSITION LIGHTS 0 I 0 I
7. ICE INSPECTION LIGHT 0 I 0 I
NA VI G A Tl ON I NSTRUMENT S
I. AIRSPEED INDICATOR I I I I
2. SENSITI VE A LTl METER I I I I
3. TURN AND BANK INDICATOR 0 I I I
4. VERTICAL SPEED INDICAT OR '. 0 ·O I I
5. MAGNETIC COM PASS I · ·1 I I
6. ATITl"UDE INDICATOR I I I I
7. TRANSPONDER 0 0 I I
8. DIRECTIONAL GYRO INDICAT OR 0 0 I I
9. WEATHER RADAR 0 0 0 0
10. MARKER BEACON RECEIVER 0 I I I
I I. DME 0 0 0 0
12. ADF 0 0 I I
13. RM I 0 0 0 0
14. RADAR A LTIMETER 0 0 0 0
15. ENCODING ALTIMETER 0 0 I I
16. VOR 0 I 2 2
17. LOC RECEIVER 0 I 2 2
18. GS RECEIVER 0 I I I

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 2-1 7
Sectioo 2 vulcanair'a
LIMITATIONS P68C
VFRDAY
VFRN I GHT
SYSTEM AND/OR COMPONENT
IFR DAY
I FRN IG HT
ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION

I. PITOTH EAT 0 0 I I
2. SURFACE DE-ICE SYSTEM 0 0 0 0
3. PROPELLER DE-ICE SYSTEM 0 0 0 0
4. STALL WARNING HEAT 0 0 0 0
VACUUM SYSTEM
I. VACUUM PUMP I 2 2 2
ENGI NE I NDICATIONS
I. EGT INDICATOR 0 0 0 0
FLIGHT CONTROLS
I. TRIM TAB POSITION INDICATOR 0 0 0 0
(RUDDER, STABILATOR)
2. ELECTRIC PITCH TRIM 0 0 0 0
3. STALL WARNING TONE I I I I
RADIO COMMUNICATION
I. :\UDIO CONTROL PANEL 0 0 I I
2. CABIN SPEAKER OR I I I I
SPEAKER AMPLIFIER
3. PHONE AMPLIFIER 0 0 I I
4. M ICROPHONE I I I I
5. VHF I I 2 2
I NDI CATOR AND RECORDER SYSTEMS

I. CLOCK OR DIGITAL INDICATOR 0 0 I I
2. CHRONOMETER 0 0 I I
3. HOURMETER 0 0 0 0
EMERGENCY EQUI PMENT

I. EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSM l"ITER I I I I

2-18 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
11.F./ll. PIN NOR 10. 707-1B
vulcana1r'a Se-::tion 3
P68C EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Page
3.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 AIRSPEED FOR SAFE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 ENGINE FAILURE BEFORE ROTATION SPEED .. ...... 3-2
3.4 ENG INE FAILURE AFTER ROTATION SPEED ... ..... . 3-2
3.5 ENGINE FAILURE DURING FLIGHT ....... . ...... . .. 3-3
3.6 INFLIGHT ENGINE SECURING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.7 ENGfNE AIRSTART ...... . .. .. .......... . ......... 3-4
3.8 SINGLE ENGINE APPROACH AND LANDfNG . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.9 SINGLE ENGINE GO-AROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.1 0 ENGINE FIRE DURING GROUND OPERATION .... . ... 3-6
3.11 INFLIGHT ENG INE FIRE ... . ....................... 3-7
3.12 ELECTRIC OR CABIN FIRE DURING

GROUND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3. 13 INFLIGHT ELECTRIC OR CABIN FIRE ...... .. ....... 3-7

DATE: MAY7, 2002 3-i
A.l'~M.
vulcanair~
l'IN NORI0.707-lll
Section 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES P68C
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Par~graph Page
3.14 SINGLE ALTERNATOR FAILURE ................... 3-8
3.15 DUAL ALTERNATOR FAILURE ..................... 3-8
3 ..16 COMPLETE ELECTRICAL FAILURE ................. 3-8
3.17 CROSSFEED PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.18 FLAPLESS APPROACH AND LANDI NG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.19 STATIC SOURCE MALFUNCTION .................. 3-10
3.20 SPINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 10
I 3.2 1 EMERGENCY EX ITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1
Approved by EASA
Rev. 9
3-ii DATE: JUNE 09, 2004
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURE
3.1 GENERAL
The recommended procedures for various types of emergencies and 1

critical situations are provided in this section. All the required emcrgeric'y
procedures and those necessary for operation of the aircraft as determined
by its operating and design features arc presented.
This section consists of an abbreviated emergency check list which

supplies critical situation action sequences. Pilots should familiarise
themselves with the procedures given in the section in order to be prepared
to take appropriate action when an emergency situation arises.
NOTE
amended operating limitations, o perating
procedures, performa nc e data a nd other
Rev. 3
DATE: SEPTEMBER 18, 2003 3-1
Section J vulcanair'a
3.2 AIRSPEED FOR SAFE OPERATION
(a) Minimum Control Speed 62 KIAS
(b) One Engine Inoperative Best Angle-of-Climb

Speed 80 KIAS
(c) One Engine Inoperative Best Rate-o f-Climb

Speed 92 KIAS
(d) For Training, Minimum Recommended One

Engine Inoperative Speed 80 KIAS
(e) Take-off rotation speed at M.T.O.W.

(For lower weights refer to pag 5. 14) 71 KIAS
(t) S ingle engine Approach Speed 92 KIAS
3.3 ENGINE FAILURE BEFORE ROTATION SPEED

(71 KIAS at M.T.0.W.; for lower weights refer to
paragraph 5- 10)
(a) Throttles CLOSE IMMEDIATELY
(b) BraKes AS REQUIRED
Stop straight ahead
If insufficient runway remains for a safe stop:
(c) Fuel Selector Valves ENG. SHUT-OFF
(d) Gang Bar OFF
Manoeuvre to avoid obstacles.
3.4 ENGINE FAILURE AFTER ROTATION SPEED

(a) Airspeed CHECK 71 KIAS min.
at max take-off weight;
for lower weight ref. para. 5. 10
ENAC Approval No.: 02/ 171 243/SPA

3-2 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
(b) Directional Control MAINTAIN

(5 deg. bank toward operative
engine, rudder as required
for heading control).
(c) Mixtures FULL RlCH
(d) Propellers FULL FORWARD
(e) Throttles FULLY OPEN
(t) Airspeed ESTABLISH 80 KlAS
When clear of obstacles
(g) Inoperative Engine

- Throttle CLOSE
- Propeller FEATHER
- Mixture IDLE CUT-OFF
(h) Climb STRAIGHT AHEAD
(i) Flaps UP
at a safe height
(j) Trims AS REQULRED
(k) Inoperative Engine SECURE
(I) As soon as possible LAND
3.5 ENGINE FAl LURE DURING FLIGHT

(a) Directional Control MAINTAIN
(Retard operative engine throttle
if necessary to ma intain control)
(b) Airspeed ATTAIN 92 KlAS min
(c) Trims ADJUST.

DATE: MAY7,2002 3-3
Inoperati ve Engi ne IDENTIFY and VERIFY
(d) Engine Air Start ATTEM PT
If ai r start is unsuccessful:
(e) Engine Securing Procedure COMPLETE
( t) As soon as possible LAND
3.6 INFLIGHT ENGINE SECURING PROCEDURE

(a) Throttle CLOSE
(b) Propeller FEATHER
(c) Mixture lDLE CUT-OFF
(d) Fuel Selector Valve ENG. SHUT-OFF
(e) Alternator Switch OFF
(t) Auxil iary Fuel Pump OFF
(g) Magneto Switch OFF
(h) Electrical Load REDUCE
(i) Cross feed AS REQUIRED
3.7 ENGINE AIRSTART

(a) Fuel Selector ON
(b) Magneto Switches ON
(c) Auxiliary Fuel Pump ON
(d) Throttle FORWARD

approximately 1/2 inch

3-4 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanair ~ Section 3
(e) Propeller FULL FORWARD
(f) Mixture RICH

until a fuel flow is indicated,
then IDLE CUT-OFF
(g) Starter PRESS

when engine fires, RELEASE
starter and MOVE Mixture
toward FULL RICH
(h) Auxiliary Fuel Pum~ . OFF
(i) Alternator ON
NOTE
If start is unsuccesful, turn inoperative engine
magneto switches OFF, retard mixture to IDLE
CUT-OFF, open throttle fully, and engage starter for
severa l revolutions. Then repeat airstart procedure.
3.8 SINGLE ENGINE APPROACH AND LANDING

(a) Inoperative Engine SECURE
(b) Operative Engine

- Fuel Selector ON
- Mixture FULL RICH
- Propeller FORWARD
- Auxiliary Fuel Pump ON
(c) Flaps APPROACH ( 15°)
(d) Ai rspeed 92 KIAS min
(e) Flaps (when landing assured) FULL DOWN

DATE: MAY7,2002 3-5
Section 3 vulcanair .-
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES P6sc
(t) Airspeed 78 KIAS MIN
(At max landing weight.
For lower weight refer
to para. 5.25)
(g) Brakes AS REQUIRED

after nose wheel touchdown
3.9 SINGLE ENGINE GO-AROUND
(a) Power 2700 RPM - FULL THROTTLE
(b) Flaps 15 deg
(c) Airspeed 80 KIAS

until clear of obstacles
THEN 92 KIAS
(d) Flaps UP at a safe height
(e) Trims ADJUST

for climb with 5° bank
toward operative engine
3.10 ENGINE FIRE DURING GROUND OPERATION

(a) Fuel Selectors ENG. SHUT-OFF
(b) Mixtures IDLE CUT-OFF
(c) Throttles CLOSE
(d) Brakes AS REQU IRED
(e) Radio CALL FOR ASSISTANCE
(f) Gang Bar PUSH for OFF
(g) As soon as possible EVACUATE AIRCRAFT

3-6 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
3.11 INFLIGHT ENGINE FIRE

(a) Affected Engine IDENTIFY
and SECURE
(b) Cabin Hot Air OFF
(c) As soon as practically possible LAND
WARNING
If fire goes out, do not attempt to restart engine.
3.12 ELECTRIC OR CABIN FIRE DURING GROUND

OPERATION
(a) Throttles CLOSE
(b) Mixtures IDLE CUT-OFF
(c) Gang Bar PUSH for OFF
(d) Brakes AS REQUIRED
(e) As soon as possible EVACUATE AIRCRAFT

If possible, attempt to deal with fire using fire extinguisher located
between pilot and copilot scat.
3.13 IN-FLIGHT ELECTRIC OR CABIN FIRE

(a) Fire Source ATTEMPT TO ISOLATE
Use fire extinguisher located
between pilot and copilot seat
(b) Electrical Load REDUC E to minimum
{c) Cabin Ventilating Outlets OPEN
(d) As soon as practically possible LAND

DATE: MAY7,2002 3-7
Section 3 vulcanair8:;
3.14 SINGLE ALTERNATOR FAILURE

(ALT. OFF Warning light illuminated)
(a) Affected Alternator CHECK OUTPUT
If output is nonnal, disregard light and have the system checked

after landing.
If output is zero, insufficient or fluctuating, switch the Alternator
OFF and PULL the relative breaker.
3.15 DUAL ALTERNATOR FAILURE

(Both ALT. OFF Warning lights illuminated)
(a) Electrical Load REDUCE

to essential load
Proceed as for single alternator failure to use at least one alternator. If

both alternators have been switched OFF, the battery wil l maintain the
essential load for approximately 55 minutes.
VHF transmission should be restricted to a maximum of 6 minutes
during total flight.
3.16 COMPLETE ELECTRICAL FAILURE

Operating flight instruments:
(a) Airspeed Indicator
(b) Altimeter
(c) Horizon
(d) Rate of Climb Indicator
(e) Directional Gyro (Vacuum)
(t) Magnetic Compass

3-8 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
NOTE
(Bus OFF and Battery Operative)
VHF! System can be powered directly from battery

by switching "COM I/NAV I" Emergency power
ON. Loudspeaker is inoperative - Hcadsct(s) must
be worn.
WARNING
Flaps cannot be lowered in case of complete
electrical failure.
Stall warnin'g becomes inoperative.
3.17 CROSSFEED PROCEDURE

(a) Right Tank to Left Engine (Right Engine Shut-Off)
- LH Fuel Selector RIGHT TANK
- RH Fuel Selector ENG . SHUT-OFF
(b) Left Tank to Right Engine (Left Engine Shut-Off)

- RH Fuel Selector LEFT TANK
- LH Fuel Selector ENG. SHUT-OFF
(c) Right Tank to both Engines

- RH Fuel Selector RIGHT TANK
- LH Fuel Selector RIGHT TANK
(d) Left Tank to both Engines

- RH Fuel Selector LEFT TANK
- LH Fuel Selector LEFT TANK
3.18 FLAPLESS APPROACH AND LANDING

Perform a normal approach:
(a) Airspeed 90 KIAS
(b) Brakes AS REQUIRED

after nose wheel touch-down

DATE: MAY7, 2002 3-9
3.19 STATIC SOURCE MALFUNCTION

(a) Alternate Source Valve OPEN
NOTE
The press-and-tum type alternate source valve is
located on the left side of the control ped estal. The
corrections to be applied to altitude and airspeed
indications do not exceed -30 ft and -4 Kt s
respectively.
3.20 SPINS
All spins are prohibited. In the event an unintentional spin is initiated,
recovery can be accomplished by immediately using the following
procedure.
(a) Retard both throttles to the idle position.
(b) Apply full rudder in the opposite direction to the spin.
(c) Push control wheel full y forward.
(d) Maintain controls in this position until the spin stops, then centre
the rudder.
(e) Recover from dive by smoothly pulling the control wheel back. No
abrupt control movement should be used during recovery from the
dive, as the manoeuvring speed and positive manoeuvre load factor
limit may be exceeded.
NOTE
The aircraft has not been spin tested in flight. The
above recommended procedure is based entirely
upon theoretical studies.

3-10 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
A .F. /11. r 11\ 1'0/0HJO. 707-18
vuicanair": Section 3
3.21 EMERGENCY EX ITS
Use of the cabin door and emergency exits for emergency ground egress
is illustrated in the figure 3.2 1-1 below.
CABIN DOOR
PILOT, COPILOT, TH•PO ANO FOURTlt SEAT BACK S
Rl
MUST BE RECLINED FvHW~RO TO GAIN ACCESS TO TliE
EMERGENCY At~D C.ABtU DOOR EXITS AS NECESSARY
..
•
I
1 PULL OUT SCAT BACK I

QUICK AElEA!;E PIN TO 2 RECLINE =
~==~-
UNLOCK SEAT s;..cK SEAT BACK F'A'D
!!3
=
==olll
+,;
2 Pull 0000 HA.IDLE
TO OPEN ANO
EVACU.;TE ;.1 PO~Af"-
2 SLI DE EMERGENCY EXIT

'/,1NOOWUPP(R LEVER RIGHT
3
•Q
=
'1
= IC!
PULL DOOR t-'l.t-61JI. F

TOOPE.NANC
EVAcu;,rE AIRCR~T
3 PUSH V.lNDOW OUT AND

EVACUATE AIRCRAFT
1 PUSH TO UtllOCK TtlE 000? 2 U1'.l0CI'{ DOOR HANDLE

ONLY .lF TER PROPELLEP !iTOP
Figure 3.2 1- 1
Approved by EASA
Rev. 13
DAT E: October 11, 2004 3-11
This page intentionally lefl blank
vuicanair":; Section 4
P68C NORMAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Page
4. 1 GENERAL ...................................... 4-1
4.2 AIRSPEED FOR SAFE OPERATlONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.4 PRE-FLIGHT CHECK LIST ........................ 4-5
4.5 BEFORE STARTING ENGINES ..... . .............. 4-9
4.6 ENG INE START ................................ 4-10
4.6.1 ENG INESTARTINGW ITH NCBATTERY ......... 4-11
4.6.2 ENG INE STARTING WITH EXTERNAL POWER .... 4-12
4.7 BEFORE TAXI ............................ . ... . 4-13
4.8 TAXlfNG ...................................... 4-13
4.9 BEFORE TAKE-OFF (Runup) ................ . .... 4-14
4.10 BEFORE TAKE-OFF (Final Items) .................. 4-15
4.1 1 TAKE-OFF AND CLIMB ......................... 4-16

DATE: MAY7,2002 4-i
Section 4 vulcanair":;
NORMAL PROCEDURES P68C
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Paragraph Page
4.12 CRUISE ................. ...... ...... ...... .... 4-16
4. 13 FLIGHT IN ( INADVERTENTLY
ENCOUNTERED) ICING CONDITIONS ............ 4-17
4.14 DESCENT ................ ...... ...... ..... .... 4-18
4.15 BEFORE LANDING ... ......... ... .............. 4-18
4.16 BALKED LANDING .... ........ ... ....... ...... 4-19
4.17 AFTER LANDING .............................. 4-19
4.18 SECURING AIRCRAFT .. . . ............ . .. .... ... 4-20
4.19 NO ISE ABATEMENT ........................... 4-21

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4.1 GENERAL
This section describes recommended procedures for conducting normal
operations in the P68C aircraft. All the necessary operational procedures,
as determined by the aircraft operating and design features, are presented.
This section consists of an abbreviated check list which supplies an

action sequence for normal procedures.
Pilots should familiarise themselves with the procedures given in this

section, in order to become proficient in the normal operations of the
aircraft.
NOTE
amended operati ng li mitations, operating
procedures, pe rformance data and othe r
Rev. 3
DATE: SEPTEMBER 18, 2003 4- 1
Section 4 vulcanair':;
4.2 AIRSPEED FOR SAFE OPERATIONS

The following airspeeds are those which are significant for safe
operation of the aircraft. The figures are for standard aircraft flown at
maximum gross weight under nom1al conditions at sea level. For additional
airspeed information see Section 2.
(a) Maximum Structural

Cruising Speed 160 KIAS
(b) Design Manoeuvring Speed

1500 Kg (3307 lb) 116 KIAS
2084 Kg (4594 lb) 137 KIAS
(c) Maximum Flap Extended Speed

15° flaps (Approach) 161 KJAS
35° flaps 111 KIAS
(d) Best Rate of Climb Speed 92 KIAS
(c) Best Angle of Climb Speed 80 KJAS
( f) Final Approach Speed 78 KIAS
(g) For training, One Engine Inoperati ve Speed 80 KIAS
(h) Maximum Demonstrated Crosswind Velocity 25 KTS

4-2 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanair':; Section 4
4.3 SAFETY TIPS

The aircraft should be given a thorough internal and external pre-flight
check. The pre-flight should include determination of aircraft operational
status, a check that necessary papers and documents are on board and in
order, and a calculation of weight and C.G. limits, takeoff distance and in-
flight performance.
Baggage should be weighed, stowed, and secured. A weather briefing

for the intended flight path should be obtained, and other factors relating to
a safe flight should be checked before takeoff.
Before flying, a pilot should complete a personal check list that includes
the following items:
(a) A current proper licence
(b) Sufficient recovery time from debilitating drugs or medication
(c) No alcohol in the past eight hours
(d) Physical condition (no colds, etc.)
(e) Emotional condition (ability to devote full concentration to flight).
(f) Sufficient rest for fatigue recovery
(g) No debilitating temporary physical injuries and/or disabilities.
(h) Head-Sets c heck for presence and operational.
(i) Spare pair of glasses if required.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 4-3
Section 4 vulcanair"d;
Figure 4-1
WALK AROUND
ENAC Approval No.: 021171243/SPA

4-4 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
4.4 PRE-FLIGHT CHECK LIST

Remove external control surface locks if inserted.
NOTE
Before using external power unit, select battery switch OFF.
COCKPIT
(a) Parking Brake SET
(b) Aircraft Documents CHECK
(c) Head-Sets CHECK
(d) Flight Controls FREE and CORRECT MOVEMENT
(e) Trim Controls NEUTRAL
(t) Static Source NORMAL
(g) Electrical Switches OFF
(h) Avionics OFF
(i) Circuit Brea kers IN
(j) VHF! P.S. Switch CHECK THAT VHF! SYSTEM

IS POWERED WHEN THE
COM l-NAVI EMERGENCY
POWER SUPPLY SWITCH IS
SELECTED TO "EMERG. SUPPLY"
(k) Head-Sets C HECK for OPERATION AL
(I) Battery Switch ON
(m) Map Light Switch Internal Lamp C HECK ON
(n) Map Light C HECK FOR OPERATION

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 4-5
(o) Annunciator TEST
(p) Fuel Quantity Gauge CHECK READINGS
(q) Flaps CHECK UP
(r) NAV Lights ON
(s) Anti-coll is ion Lights ON
(t) Alternate Static Source PRESS TO DRAIN,

then RELEASE
(u) Magneto Switches CHECKOFF
(v) Throttles CHECK IDLE
(w) Propellers CHECK FORWARD
(x) Mixtures CHECK IDLE CUT-OFF
(y) ELT Remote Switch CHECK CONNECTIONS ARE

SECURE AND THAT REMOTE
SWITCH IS SET TO ARM.
Should an operational check for the ELT be desired, carry out the
" FUNCTIONAL TESTING procedure laid down in the latest revision
of the NARCO Avionics ELT 910 Owner's Manual & Pilots Guide,
PIN 03754-0621.
LEFT W ING
(a) Surface Condition CHECK
(b) Inboard Leading Edge Condition CHECK
(c) Oil Cooler CLEAR
(d) Nacelle Locking Screws C HECK and SECURE
(c) Propeller and Spinner C HECK
ENAC Approval No. : 021171243/SPA

4-6 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcan..=Ur~ Sectio n 4
(t) Exhaust Pipes CHECK
(g) Fuel Tank Drain(s) DRA IN
(h) Fuel Filter Drain DRAIN
(i) De-ice Boot ( if installed) CH ECK
(j) Taxi/ Landing Lights CHECK
(k) Tic Down Rope (if installed) UNTIE
(1) Wing Tip CHECK
(m) Navigation Light CHECK
(n) Anti-collision Light C HECK
(o) Static Wicks C HECK
(p) Fuel Tank Cap CHECK SECURE
(q) Ai leron CHECK
(r) Fuel Tank Vent(s) CLEAR
(s) Flap CHECK
(t) Contro l Lock (if installed) REMOVE
(u) HF Antenna ( if installed) CHECK SECURE and INTEGRITY
FUSELAGE (LEFT S IDE)
(a) General Condition CHECK
(b) Entrance Door CH EC K
(c) Windows CHEC K
(d) VHF/ ADF Antenna C HEC K
(e) Landing Gear C HEC K
Rev. I
DATE: MARCH 11, 2003 4-7
Section 4 vulcan...:Ur
(t) Static Port CLEJ\R
(g) Brdkcs Lines Condition . C HECK
(h) Chock REMOVE
(i) Tie Down Rope (if insta lled) UNTIE
U) HF J\ntcnna (if installed) C HEC K SECURE and INTEG RITY I
EM PENNJ\GE
(a) Surface Condition C HEC K
(b) Empennage De-ice Boots ( if installed) CHECK
(e) Rudder CHEC K
(d) Rudder Trim Tab CHEC K
(e) Stabilator Trim Tab CHECK
(t) Anti-collision Lig ht C HECK
(g) VOR J\ntenna CHEC K
(h) Control Locks (if installed) REMOVE
(i) HF Antenna (if ins talled) C HEC K SECU RE and INTEGRITY I
FUSELAGE (RIGHT S IDE)
(a) General Condition CH ECK
(b) Windows CHEC K
(e) Landing Gear CH ECK
(d) Static Port C LEJ\R
(e) Brake Lines Condition C HECK
(f) Chock REMOV E
Rev. I
4-8 DATE: MARCH 11 , 2003
(g) Rear Door CHECK
(h) ELT Unit, ELT Antenna REMOVE UPPER SECTIO N OF

BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
BULKHEAD, AND CHECK ELT
ANTENNA AND CONNECTOR
FOR SECURITY. REPLACE
BULKHEAD SECTIO N. CHECK
ELT UN IT INSTALLATION FOR
GENERAL CONDITION AND
SECUR IT Y. ENSURE ELT
HEADER SWITCH IS SET TO
ARM
(i) Crew Door CHECK
(j) Antennas C HECK
RIGHT WING
Same as Left Wing Check in reverse order (Add Checks for stall
warn ing detector)
NOSE SECTION
(a) General Condition CHECK
(b) Windshield and Windows CHECK
(c) Pitot Tube(s) CHECK
(d) Nose Gear CHECK
(e) Nose Cone SECURE
(t) Chock REMOVE
4.5 BEFORE STARTING ENGINES

(a) Entrance Door and Crew Door SECURE

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 4-9
(b) Passenger Briefing COMPLETE
(e) Seats ADJUST
(d) All Seat Back Rests Quick Re lease Pins SECURE
(e) Belts and Harnesses SECURE
(t) Parking Brake TEST and SET
(g) Auxiliary Fuel Pumps OFF
(h) Altimeter and Clock SET

1
(i) Throttles OPEN /2 INCH
U) Prope llers FULL FORWARD
(k) Mixtures IDLE CUT-OFF
(I) Fuel Selector RH ENG.-RH TANK

LH ENG.-LH TANK
(m) Circuit Breakers IN
(n) Vo ltmeter CHECK
(o) Strobe Light ON
(p) Cockpit Lights AS REQU IRED
(q) Avionics OFF
(r) Trim Tabs C HECK AND SET FOR TIO
(s) Alternate Air Controls OFF
4.6 ENGINE START (Left engine first)
First engine start may be made using e ither the a ircraft battery or an
external power unit. When starting on the external power unit, the battery
and both alternators must be switched OFF.

4-IO DATE: MAY 7, 2002
4.6.1 ENGINE STARTING WITH A/C BATTERY
(a) Battery and Alternators ON
(b) Left Magneto Switch ON
(c) Auxiliary Fuel Pump ON
(d) Mixture Control RICH

until a stabilized fuel flow is
indicated, then IDLE CUT-OFF
(e) Propeller CLEAR
(f) Starter ENGAGE
(g) Mixture Control ADVANCE

as engine starts
(h) Magneto Switches ON
(i) Oil Pressure CHECK RJSIN G
WARNING
Oil pressure should rise within 30 seconds, except in
very cold weather when it may ta ke somewha t
longer.
If the oil pressure gauge does not show any
indication, shut down the engine and investigate.
(j) Starter Light CHECKOFF
(k) Auxiliary Fuel Pump OFF
(I) Throttle 1000 RPM
(m) Right Engine REPEAT

as for first engine

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 4- 11
Section 4 vulcanair";;
(n) Alternators CHECK
(o) One VHF COMM ON and SET
4.6.2 ENGINE STARTING WITH EXTERNAL

POWER
(a) Battery and Alternators OFF
(b) External Power Source CONNECT
(c) Left Magneto Switch ON
(d) Auxiliary Fuel Pump ON
(e) Mixture Control RICH

until a stabi lized fuel flow is
indicated, then IDLE CUT OFF
(f) Propeller CLEAR
(g) Starter ENGAGE
(h) Mixture Control ADVANCE

as engine starts
(i) Magneto Switches ON
U) Oil Pressure CHECK RIS ING
WARNING
Oil pressure should rise within 30 seconds, except in
ver y cold weather when it may take somewhat
longer.
If the oil pressure gauge docs not show any
indication, shut down the engine and investigate.
(k) Starter Light CHECK OFF

4-12 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
(I) Auxiliary Fuel Pump OFF
(m) Throttle 1000 RPM
(n) Right Engine REPEAT

as for first engine
(o) External Power Source REMOVE
(p) Battery ON
(q) Alternators ON and CHECK
(r) One VHF COMM ON and SET
4.7 BEFORE TAXI
(a) Battery and Alternator Switches C HECK ON
(b) Navigation Lights AS REQUIRED
(c) Taxi/ Landing Lights AS REQUIRED
(d) Gyro Instruments SET
(e) Altimeter SET
(f) Radios ON, SET & CHECK
(g) Flaps CHECK full range,

then UP
(h) Brakes RELEASE
4.8 TAXIING
(a) Brakes CHECK
(b) Throttle AS REQU IRED
(c) Flight Instruments C HECK

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 4-13
Section 4 vulcanair'di
f':;')RMAL PROCEDURES P68C
4.9 BEFORE TAKE-OFF (Runup)

(b) Fuel Selectors RH ENG.-RH TANK

LH ENG.-LH TANK
(c) Auxi liary Fuel Pumps OFF
(d) Mixture Control FULL RICH
(e) Propellers FULL FORWARD
(f) Alternate Air OFF
(g) Throttles 1200 RPM
(h) Left Engine:
(I) Throttle ADVANCE to 1500 RPM

(2) Alternator Output CHECK
(3) Vacuum Gauge (4.5 to 5.2"Hg) VERIFY
(4) Propelier C HECK feathering at
1000 RPM; return to 1500 RPM
NOTE
- Check oil pressure decreases and manifold pressure
inc:eases during deceleration to 1000 RPM.
- Check o il pressure increases and manifold pressure
decreases during acceleration to 1500 RPM.
(5) Mixture C HECK

(6) Alternate Air ON, then OFF again
(7) Throttle ADVANCE to reach 2100 RPM
(8) Magnetos CHECK 175 RPM max drop
50 RPM max differential
(Normal Drop 100 RPM)
(9) Throttle 1200 RPM
(i) Right Engine REPEAT as for left engine

4-14 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanaira:!I Section 4
4.10 BEFORE TAKE-OFF (Final Items)

(a) A uxiliary Fuel pumps ON
(b) Ice Protection (if installed) AS REQU IRED
NOTE
Flight in known icing conditions is prohibited.
(c) Flight Instruments SET and CHECK
(d) Engine Instruments CHECK green ARC
(e) Alternate Ai r OFF
WARNING
When flying in a high humidity environment at any
air temperature, open the engine a lternate air doors.
(f) Annunciator CLEAR
(g) Rudder Trim SET
(h) Longitudinal Trim SET for TAKE-OFF

(White Arc)
(i) Flaps 15°
(j) Doors Locked, Seat Belts Fastened CHECK
(k) Quadrant Friction ADJUST
( 1) Flight Controls CHECK for free and

full TRAVEL

DATE: MAY7,2002 4-15
Section 4 vu1cana1rdi
NOr.~AL PROCED UR ES P68C
4.11 TAKE-OFF AND CLIMB
(a) Directiona l Gyro SET
(b) Brakes A PPLY
(c) T hrottles FULLY OPEN

to maintain 2700 RPM
before brake release
(d) Rotation 71 K IAS min.

(at M.T.O.W.; for lower
weight ref. to para. 5. 10)
(e) Airspeed accelerate to 79 K.l AS

until above 50 ft.
( f) Flaps UP, at safe altitude
(g) A uxiliary Fuel Pumps OFF, at safe altitude
(h) Climb Power SET
(i) Mixtures SET
U) Best Rate of Climb Speed 92 KI AS
4.12 CRUISE
(a) Cruise Power SET
(b) Mixtures LEAN for smooth operations.

(Do not exceed C HT 435° F)
(c) Engine Instruments C HECK
(d) Cabin Air Controls AS REQU IRED
ENAC Approva l No.: 02/ 171243/SPA

4-16 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcana1r-:= Section 4
4.13 FLIGHT IN (INADVERTENTLY

ENCOUNTERED) ICING CONDITIONS
T HE FOLLOWING WEATHER CONDITIONS MAY BE
CONDUCIVE TO SEVERE IN-FLIGHT ICING:
Visible rain at temperature below 0 degrees Celsius ambient air

temperature.
Droplets that splash or splatter on impact at temperatures below 0

degrees Celsius ambient air temperature.
PROC E D U R ES FOR EX ITI N G THE SEVERE ICI NG

ENVIRONMENT:
These procedures are applicable to all flight phases from takeoff to

landing. Monitor the ambient air temperature. While severe icing may fonn
at temperatures as cold as - 18 degrees Celsius, increased vigi lance is
warranted at temperatures around freezing w ith visible moisture present. If
the v isua l cues specified in the Limitations Section of the AFM for
identifying severe ic ing conditions are observed, accomplish the following:
immediately request priority handling from Air Traffic Control to

faci litate a route or an altitude change to exit the severe icing conditions in
order to avoid extended exposure to flight conditions more severe than those
for which the aircraft has been certificated.
A void abrupt and excessive manoeuvring that may exacerbate control

difficulties.
Do not engage the autopilot.
If the autopilot is engaged, hold the control wheel finnly and disengage
the autopilot.
If an unusual roll response or uncommanded roll control movement is

observed, reduce the angle-of-attack.
Do not extend flaps when holding in icing conditions. Operation with

flaps extended can result in a reduced wing angle-of-attack, with the
possibility of ice forming on the upper surface further a ft on the wing than
normal, possibly aft of the protected area.
ENAC Approval No.: 02/ 171243/S PA

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 4- 17
Section 4 vulcanair 'di
If the flaps arc extended, do not retract them until the airframe is clear
of ice.
Report these weather conditions to Air Traffic Control.
NOTE
When fly ing in a high humidity environment at any

air temperature, open the engine alternate air doors.
{In visible moisture and at temperatures below + 5°C)
(a) Pitot Heat ON
(b) Stall Deter.tor Heat ON
(c) Surface De-icing (if installed) AS REQU IRED
( d) Propeller lee Protection Switch ON
NOTE
Do not operate pneumatic surface deicers more than

once per minute.
4.14 DESCENT
(a) Alt;metcr SET
(b) Power AS REQUIRED
4.15 BEFORE LANDING
(a) Fuel Selector RH ENG.-RH TANK

LI-I ENG.-LH TANK
(b) Auxiliary Fuel Pumps ON

4- 18 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
(c) Mixtures FULL RlCH
(d) Propellers FULL FORWARD
(e) Flaps (below 161 KIAS) DOWN15°
(t) Flaps (below 111 KIAS) DOWN 35°
(g) Landing Lights AS REQUIRED
(h) Autopilot (if installed) OFF
(i) Approach Speed (Full Flaps) 78 KIAS min.

(at max Landing weight For lower
weights refer to paragraph 5.25).
4.16 BALKED LANDING

(a) Power 2700 RPM , FULL THROTTLE
(b) Balked Landing Transition Speed 78 KI AS
(e) Flaps REDUCE to 15"
(d) Trim ADJUST for c lime
(e) Flaps RETRACT

when all obs tacles arc cleared
and safe altitude and airspeed achieved.
4.17 AFTER LANDING

(a) Brakes AS NECESSARY
a fter nose wheel touch down
After clearing runway:
(b) Flaps UP
(c) Auxiliary Fuel Pumps OFF

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 4-19
Section 4 vulcanair";;
(d) Pitot Heat OFF
(c) Prope'.lcr De-icing (If installed) OFF
(t) Radio and NAV Aids AS REQU IRED
(g) Heating and Ventilation AS REQUIRED
(h) Taxi/ Landing Lights AS REQUIRED
4.18 SECURING AIRCRAFT
(b) SetCOMI to 121.5MHz LISTEN FOR ELT SWEEP TONE
If tone is heard, follow Inadvertent ELT Activation procedure in the " POST-
FLIGHT" paragraph cf the latest edition ofNARCO ELT 910 Owner's
Manual and Pilot's G uide, P1N 03794-0621
(c) Radio and NA V Aids OFF
(d) All Switches, except Battery,

Alternator and Magneto Switches OFF
(c) Thro~tlcs IDLE
( t) Propellers FORWARD
(g) Mixtures IDLE CUT-OFF

when there is a decided
drop in CHT
(h) Magneto Switches OFF
(i) Battery and Alternators OFF
U) Fuel Selector OFF
(k) Control Locks (if required) INSTALL
(I) Tic Down Ropes (if required) TIE

4-20 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
4.19 NOISE ABATEMENT
Increased emphasis on improving the quality cf our environment

requires effort on the part of pilots to minimise the effect of aircraft noise
on the public.
The noise level, determined FAR36 (ICAO Annex 16) regulations for
the P68C at maximum continuous power and at Maximum Take-off Weight,
is 77.7 dB (A).
In conformity with the above regulations, the maximum noise permitted

level for the P68C at the highest power setting and at Maximum Take-off
We ig ht in the normal operating range, is 80 dB {A).
NOTE
The Federal Aviation Administration has made no

d e t ermination as to whether the noise leve ls
attributable to thi s a irplane arc, or s hould be
acceptable, or are unacceptable for operations at,
into, or out of any airport.
The C. of A. of P68C SIN ............................. has been issued w ith a

noise certification statement accord ing to the above regulations.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 4-21
P68C PERFORMANCE
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Page
5. 1 GENERAL ........................................ 5- 1
5.2 INTRODUCTION - PERFORMANCE CHARTS . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.3 FLIGHT PLANNING EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.4 AIRSPEED CALIBRATION STD. STATIC SOURCE . . . . . 5-8
5.5 ALTIMETER CALIBRATION ........................ 5-9
5.6 ALTERNATE STA TIC SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.7 TEMPERATURE CORRECTION CHART .......... . ... 5-9
5.8 WI ND COMPONENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.9 STALL S PEED ................................... 5-12

5.10 TAKE-OFF DISTANCE TO CLEAR 50 FT OBSTACLE .. 5-14
5.11 ACCELERATE - STOP DISTANCE .................. 5-16
5.12 TWI N ENG INE CLIMB - MAXIMUM C LIMB .. ........ 5-1 8
5.13 ONE ENG INE INOPERATIVE CLIMB ................ 5-20
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-i

PERFORMANC E P68C
SECTIONS
PERFORMANCE
Paragraph Page
5.14 TWIN ENGINE CLIMB - CRUISE CLIMB ......... .. .. 5-22
5. !5 BALKED LANDING CLIMB .................... . ... 5-24
5.16 TIME AND FUEL TO CLIMB - MAX. CLIMB . . .. ..... 5-26
5.17 DISTANCE TO CLIMB - MAXIMUM CLIMB .......... 5-28
5. 18 TIME AN D FUEL TO CLIMB - CRUISE CLIMB ........ 5-30
5. : 9 DISTANCE TO CLIMB - CRUISE CLIMB ............. 5-32
5.20 CRUISE PERFORMANCE-BEST ECONOMY

MIXTURE:
- SEA LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
- 2000 FEET ........... ... .............. . , . . . . . . . . 5-35
- 4000 FEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
- 6000 FEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
- 8000 FEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

vulcanairS: Section 5
P68C PERFORMANCE
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
- 10000 FEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
- 12000 FEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.2 1 CRUISE SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.22 RANGE PROFILE - STD. RANGE

CONFIGURAT ION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.23 RANGE PROFILE - LONG RANGE

CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.24 T IME, FUEL AND DISTANCE TO DESCENT . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5.25 LANDING DISTANCE TO CLEAR 50 FT OBSTACLE . . . 5-46
DATE: MAY7,2002 5-iii

This page inte ntionally lefl blank
vulcanair':: Section 5
P68C PERFORMANCE
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
5.1 GENERAL
This section provides perfonnance infonnation applicable to the P68 C,
which is required by certification regulations and useful for flight planning.
Perfonnance infonnation associated with those optional systems and

equipment which required flight manual supplements is provided by Section
8 (Supplements).
5.2 INTRODUCTION - PERFORMANCE CHARTS

The performance infonnation, provided in the Perfonnance Charts in
this section, is based on measured Flight Test Data corrected to I.C.A.0.
standard day conditions and analytically expanded for various weight,
altitude, and temperature parameters etc .
The perfonnance charts are unfactored and do not make any allowance
for varying degrees of pilot proficiency or airframe material or mechanical
deterioration.
Paragraph 5.3 (Flight Planning Example) provides infonnation to

faci litate flight planning by using the performance charts in this section.
Each chart includes an example of how it is used.
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-1

Section 5 vulcanairr:
PERFORMANCE P68C
5.3 FLIGHT PLANNING EXAMPLE

The following example illustrates the correct use of pertinent data
presented in this section.
(a) Associated Conditions
AIRCRAFT
Basic Weight (Assumed) 1460 Kg
Occupants 3 at 80 Kg each
Baggage 30 Kg
Fuel 400lt.
TAKE-OFF AIRPORT
Outside Air Temperature 23 ' C (ISA + I O' C)
Pressure Altitude 1000 ft
Wind Direction and Speed 360' at I 0 Kts
Runway Direction 330'
CRUISE
Outside Air Temperature I 9' C (ISA +20' )
En-Route Distance 1200 Km
5-2 DATE: MAY7,2002

P68C PERFORMANCE
ARRIVAL AIRPORT
Outside Air Temperature 23 'C (ISA + 10')
Wind Direction and Speed 330' at I 0 Kts
Runway Direction 300'
(b) Ai rc raft Loading
The aircraft weight and centre of gravity may be determined by

utilising the information given in Section 6 (Weight and Balance)
of this handbook.
The Basic Empty Weight for the aircraft as delivered from the
factory has been entered into Figure 6-3.
In the event that modifications affecting weight and balance have

bee n made to the aircraft, refer to the a ircraft logbook and to
Figure 6-4 (Weight and Balance Record) to determine the current
Basic Empty Weight of the airplane.
Use the applicable Work Sheet (Figure 6-7) and the Weight and
Moment Envelope (Figure 6-5) to determine aircraft total weight
and the centre of gravity position and ensure that the approved
limits are not exceeded.
After correct utilisation of the information provided, assume that

the following weights have been determined:
(I) Basic Weight 1460 Kg

(2) Occupants 240 Kg
(3) Baggage 30 Kg
(4) Fuel (400 It at 0. 72 Kg/ It) 290 Kg
(5) Ramp Weight (total of above) 2020 Kg
(6) Landing Weight (ramp weight minus
item (h), Total Fuel Required) 1808 Kg
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-3

PERFORMANCE P68C
The Landing Weight cannot be determined until the weight of the

fue l to be used has been established.
(c) Take-off Distance
Conditions:
(I) Wind I 0 Kts at 360'

(2) Angle between Wind Direction
and Runway 360' -330' =30'
(3) Wind Component parallel to
Runway (From figure 5-3) 8' Kts-Headwind
(4) Outside Air Temperature 23 ' C
(5) Pressure Altitude I 000 ft
From Figure 5-5 the total take-off Distance is 355 mt.
(d) Climb
Entering the example conditions of the take-off a irport and the

crui se altitude into the Time, Fuel and Distance to Climb graph
(Figures 5-12, 5-13, and 5- 14 respectively) y ie lds the following:
(I) Time to Climb I 1.5- 1.0= I0.5 min.

(2) Fuel to Climb I 0.6-1.0=9.6 Kg
(3) Distance to C limb 33.5-2.5=3 l .O Km
(e) Descent
Entering the Cruise data and Arrival Airport conditions into the
Time, Fuel and Dis tance to Descent graphs (Fig ure 5-19) at the
selected R/ D (I 000 FPM) yields the following:
(I) Time to Descent 8.0- 1.0=7 min.

(2) Fuel to Descent I. 8-0 .4= I.4 Kg
(3) Distance to Descent 40.0-5=35.0 Km
5-4 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

vulcanair 4i!I Section 5
P68C PERFORMANCE
(t) Cmise
Subtracting the previously calculated distance to climb and

distance to descent figures from the total en-route distance yields
the total cruise distance. For example:
Cruise Distance
= En-route Distance - Climb Distance - Descent Distance
= 1200 - 31.0 - 35.0
= 1134 Km (6 12 nautical miles)
The cruise power setting should be determined on the basis of the

required and available fuel load. From the Cruise Performance
Table (figure 5-15), at a cruise altitude of 8000 ft (ISA + 20°C)
and a Power Rating of 60.8% (2350 RPM and 21" Hg), the cruise
a irspeed is 155 KTAS at the maximum T.O. Weight. For an
average Cruise Weight of 1920 Kg, the Cruise Airspeed is 156
KTAS.
From the same table, Fuel Flow is I 04.6 lbs/hr (total).
Cruise time and fuel may be calculated by the following formula:
Cruise time
= Cruise Distance (inn. miles)/Cruise Speed

= 612/ 156
= 3.92 hours or 235.5 minutes
Cruise Fuel
= Fuel Flow x Cruise Time

= 104.6 x 3.92
= 410 lbs. ( 186 Kg)
(g) Total Flight Time
The total flight time is determined by adding the time to climb,

cruise time, and time to descend.
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-5

Section 5 vulcanair ..a
PERFORMANCE P68C
The following flight time is required for this Flight Plan:
Example:
Total Flight Time

=Time to Climb + Cruise Time + Time to Descent
= 10.5 + 235.5 + 7
= 253 minutes
(h) Total Fuel Required
Detennine the total fuel required by adding fuel for taxi and take-
off, fuel to climb, cruise fuel, and fuel to descend. Total fuel in
kilograms may then be detenni11ed, and dividing this value by 0.72
will give the total fuel in litres needed for the flight. Total fuel
calculations for the Flight Planning Example are shown below:
Total Fuel Required
= Fuel for Taxi and Take-Off + Fuel to Climb +

Cruise Fuel + Fuel to Descent
= 15+9.6+ 186+ 1.4
= 212 Kg (294 litres)
(i) Reserve fuel
= Usable Fuel Load-Total Required-Fuel Load

= 400 - 294
= 106 litres
Reserve fuel must exceed 85 litres to allow the minimum 45

minutes of flight time at 45% Power (2200 RPM)
U) Landing Distance
Subtracting the total fuel required from the aircraft Ramp Weight
gives the Landing Weight:
Landing Weight
= Ramp Weight - Total Fuel Required

= 2020-212
= 1808 kg
5-6 DATE: MAY7,2002

P68C PERFORMANCE
Arrival airport conditions applied to the Wind Component graph

(Figure 5-4) gives the following head wind component for the
Flight Planning Example:
The angle between the flight path and wind is 330° - 300° or
30°.
The Head Wind Component in this instance is 8 Kts.
Given the Arri val Airport conditions, the total required landing
distance for this Flight Planning Example is 510 mt as calculated
from the Landing Distance graph (Figure 5-20).
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-7

Section 5 vulcanair'::
PERFORMANCE P68C
5.4 AIRSPEED CALIBRATION STD. STATIC

SOURCE
a. A.S.I. SYSTEM l':IW.OI~ Vs. I.A.S.
~c;.i.._--+-+--
c
"'-«---+~,;.c..._--i-£....!--..._~
a; C.A.S. =I . A. S. - E
~7.&---l...6---l--~-~I ~~--'-- --i--1--_._-+--1--~
ffi 1+-_.__-4-~
60 80 100 120 140 1 0

l.A.S . Knots
h. A.S.I. SVSTE!\·1 ElrnOR Vs. C.A.S.
I c..--
6
_ol~\.P.. s _....... ~ ~ -
"'c
o::; L\>s· L---::~ v
~..../I/ v 1.-'
"' 4 ~
~ .__ - -- ,___
v .~
~
v
~ /
~
~3 -
1/ /
v 1.A .S .:C . A .S.+E
~2 -~ I-
a; ' I/ '
,___
~ 1 17
I
I - '- - - i
I
60 80 100 0
1, 1· 0 1 )0 1BO
C.A .S . Knots
Figure 5- 1
AIRSPEED CALIBRATION

5-8 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
P68C PERFORMANCE
5.5 ALTIMETER CALIBRATION

The maximum static error correction to be applied to the altimeter
reading docs not exceed 30 feet.
5.6 ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE

The alternate source valve is located on the left side of the control
pedestal. No static error correction must be applied to the altitude and
airspeed indicator readings when static air is supplied by the alternate static
source.
5.7 TEMPERATURE CORRECTION CHART

See Figure 5-2.
5.8 WIND COMPONENT

Maximum demonstrated crosswind velocity for take-off and landing is
25 Knots.
See Figure 5-3.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-9
PERFORMANCE P68C
-...,
... 32
120
. lOC
..
-0
c
~ 28
0
f-
80
24~-~~
~~ 't11 ·..,
J:tt±tt:~t1.~ ~'-a
0
0 Cl
0 Cl
20 ',_, Cl
..............,......... 0 0
............................ 0 Cl
Cl 40
16
20
- 20
-40
- 40 -20 0 20 40
THJPERA nJRE oc
Figure 5-2
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION
5-10 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

P68C PERFORMANCE
1-
0wzz
0.
~
£I!l~~~~~-~~~~~~~Ii~~~g·fi'ifif~EE!~~
- 11-1-.1-+-.1'-+-11<++¥":!,t.
lu
1• +-+-+-H~..++44--6-+-t
0 0
(J
0 IJ'.
~o.
-1.:. a
0 10 20 30 40
WIND COMPONENT PER~ENDICULAR TO RUNWAY - Knots
Figure 5-3
W IN D COM PONENT
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-11

Section 5 vulcanair'=
PERFORMANCE P68C
5.9 STALL SPEED

(Figure 5-4)
(a) Associated Conditions :
( 1) Throttles IDLE
(2) Centre of Gravity Most Forward
NOTE
Maximwn altitude loss in a conventional stall is 400
feet.
Maximum altitude loss in a one engine inoperative
stall is 150 feet.
Maximum pitch angle experienced during one
engine inoi:erative stall is 30'.

5-12 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
P68C PERFORMANCE
WEIGHT ANGLE OF BANK

Kg FLAP oo 20° 40° 60°
( Pounds) I I I
KIAS KCAS K IAS KCAS KIAS KCAS KIAS KCAS I
oo I
2084
15°
69
65
I 68
61
71
68 I 70
63
80
75 I
78
70
9':>
92
96
86
(4594) ;
35° 62 57 64 59 71 65 88 81
oo 68 67 70 I 69 78 76 97 94
2000
15° 64 I 60 67 62 73 68 91 85
(4409)
35°
oo
61
66
I
I 56
65
63
68
II 58
67
70
76
64
74
85
94
79
92
1900
(4189)
15° 62 I 58 64 60 72 67 88 82
35°
oo
59
I
54 61 I 56 68
I
62 83 77
64 63 66 65 74 72 91 89
1800
15° 61 57 62 58 70 65 86 80
(3969)
35°
oo
58 53 60 I 55 67 I 61 81 75
1700
15°
62
59
I 61
55
64
61
63
57
72
68
70
63
89
84
87
78
(3748)
35°
oo
56 I 51 58 53 65 59 79 73
1600
61 60 62 I 61 69 68 86 84
15° 57 53 59 55 66 ' 61 82 76
(3527)
35° 55 I 50 57 I 52 63 i 57 77 I 71
Figure 5-4 ·
STALL SPEED

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-13
Section 5 vulcanair':
PERFORMANCE P68C
5.10 TAKE-OFF DISTANCE TO CLEAR SO FT

OBSTACLE
(Figure 5-5)
(I) Power 2700 RPM, Full throttle,

before brake release
(2) Flaps 15 degrees
(3) Level, Hard Surface,
Dry Runway
( 4) Take-off Speeds IAS as tabu lated
(Assumes zero instrument error)
TAKE-OFF SPEEDS
WEIGHT
{KlAS)
(Kg)
LIFT-OFF SCREEN
2084 71 79
1900 68 76
1800 65 73
. 1700 64 71
1600 64 71
(b) Example
( I) Pressure Altitude 1000 ft

(2) Outside Air Temperature 23'C
(3) Aircraft Weight 18 10 Kg
(4) Wind 8 Kts-headwind
(5) Total Distance (to clear 50 ft obstacle) 277 mt
NOTE
- T he Ground Run is approx. 60% of T.O.
Distance.
- Increase Ground Run by 25% when operating
from a grass surface.
ENAC Approval No.: 02117 1243/SPA

5- 14 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
P68C PERFORMANCE
TM£-0Ff OIS IA ',C~ 100 Vctr es
:J I :: o ;1 ..
........ ..._ ..._.
--
:_; t:: M :-j
.. ··-...._......,.. •.. :.l&-!.~.. . .. - rhou s3n ds o ! f oo t
.. I
0
"'
·-c
0
<
:!!
2 g
--~
--
o."- q r
~'\-'q, :;
~ - +1+1-~~
........
...
_,__ -,
rl
·~REFERENCE LINE
..
- :~
x.
0
-- ..;..; ~
~ 2
. ~- . 0 ~
....
'---r
i - ... ~
.... :i:.
"'. "
.. "
.... 0
"'
F-:±J REFERENCE LINE iH • fl .. ;. q .. -~
- --
-·- ......... .... ., .. ·- OU
. ..,... ....
0
·-re--• ~::: .n
1- ~
,_..............
'1 - " - -· "'
r--- - ....... - ·---....;- · -·
Figure 5-5
TAKE-OFF DISTANCE TO CLEAR 50 FT OBSTACLE

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-15
PERFORMANCE P68C
5.11 ACCELERATE-STOP DISTANCE

(Figure 5-6)
(a) Assoc iated Conditions
(1) Power 2700 RPM, Full Throttle

Before Brake Relcasl·
(2) Flaps 15°
(3) Level, hard Surface Dry Runway
(4) Engi ne failure at Engine Failure Speed
(5) Braking Maximum
(b) Example
(I) Pressure Altitude 1000 ft

(2) Outside Temperature 23°C
(3) Aircraft Weight 2020 Kg
(4) Wind· 8 Kts (headwind)
(5) Accelerate -Step Dist'lr..ce 560 mt
NOTE
Distances shown in figure 5-6 include a fai lure
recognition time of three seconds.
5-16 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

P68C PERFORMANCE
ACCELERATE-STOP OI STANCE 100 t.IO tr GI

;::
..,. '-
N
ni ..... - 0 ~
Thausonds al Foot N c
"'
:: REFERENCE LINE
.0
..,. 0
a:J 0
Cena>,....
C\,I -
0
0
-
0
0
-
0
0
ID
-
.
N
0
N
E§_REFERENCE LINE
0
"' k'
.
0
"'
,_..., i-+--
·· -- . . ~.. - <_
=-~::
-'-· en
. ·- --- :-=::r::..q:: ~=
.. __ ..._ • .__ _ . • ·-- - r- -t"1"-""-·
::::+ ==~ --= 0
l--'·-- - -
1-- - - - - - - --
Figure 5-6
ACCELERATE STOP DISTANCE
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-17

PERFORMANCE P68C
5.12 TWIN ENGINE CLIMB - MAXIMUM CLIMB

(Figure 5-7)
(1) Power 2700 RPM; Full Throttle

(2) Mixture FULL RICH up to 5000 ft; at
higher altitude LEAN for smooth
operations. Do not exceed 435°F (224°C)
(3) Flaps UP
(4) Best Rate-of-Climb Speed 92 KIAS
(b) Example
( 1) Pressure Altitude 1000 ft

(2) Outside Air Temperature 23· cc1sA + lo·q
(4) Rate of Climb 1200 fpm

5-18 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanair': Section S
P68C PERFORMANC E
,...._
.==~
::::::~---
... ':..
• - • • •__ _L_
:i:: ::
____ ·-
.
t= ;2! ::~: ~: 10°C

1.s.A. • 20°c
1.S.A. J0°C
10 .....
·=
_.... ;:-.. ::..::: ...
............
i - - - t - -·
< 5 :.:::!·. ::i=:=:: ......::.: ·----- -
-- ---- "-- -~--::~l _ :-: --

__ ...
~1. • • _..4 _ ..::.:..:_.__ ___..,.
RATE Of CllVB
Figure 5-7
TWIN ENG INE CLIMB - MAXIMUM CLI MB

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5- 19
Section 5 vulcanairC:
PERFORMANCE P68C
5.13 ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE CLIMB

(Figure 5-8)
(I) Power 2700 RPM; Full Throttle

(2) Mixture FULL RICH
(3) Flaps UP
(b) Example

(2) Outside Air Temperature 23'C (ISA + IO' C)
(4) Rate of Climb 180 tpm

5-20 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanairC: Section 5
P68C PERFORMANCE
·-·-··-· ·-
.
~
0 7
.,
v
c
i 6
l. S.A.
0
1.S. A. • io c
• 1.S. A. zo~ c ,__ _
1.S. A. • 30 C
....
0
.~
: f:=:'==-:.£
:.=::: . ·-
--~ ----~
- ·-
··-
RUERWCE . :UE
·--::-..:.. .
.·----.,_...___..::.
- C-
·--
16
L..36 .... ..
1==i:::..:.:.!_;·._
.......
· 100 0
RA iE OF C!.. IUB rPll
Figure 5-8
ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE CLIMB

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-21
Section 5 vulcanairc:=
PERFORMANCE P68C
5.14 TWIN ENGINE CLIMB- CRUISE CLIMB

(Figure 5-9)
(a) Assoc iated Condition
(I) Power 2450 RPM; 25"Hg up to 4000 ft

2450 RPM; Full Throttle above 4000 ft
(2)Mixture LEAN for smooth operations.
Do not exceed 435°F (224°C)
(3) Flaps UP
(4) Best Rate-of-Climb Speed 92 KJAS
(b) Example

(2) Outside Air Temperature 23°C (ISA+ IQ°C)
(3) A ircraft Weight 2020 Kg
5-22 DATE: MAY7,2002

vulcanair':I Section 5
P68C PERFORMANCE
··- ··
.
~
- +·- -+-•. _
0 14 ::±::~·: . ·::t_ :-::1.--....
. j -
·-: ::..::. --- ·z::::~---
.... :-:....;: =~- -:--..,
10 • ;\,,.._;.._ ""---·- ---- -

--
::~~: • 10°c
1.s.A. • zo 0c
...c: l. S. A. • J0°C
----
.. ----
- ...
!-·-
-· - ~=;;
---=- : :;: : :-;:.:_: : :

...;... : +-:-.:c:::.-
---+-::::::t=:=.
.1 : :.'-..f-..:--=-t:--=
.. --£
. ··· '•···· · :t:;·:
. .. ....... .
--- ~ -
<00 60 0 soc : 1c:

AJ T! OF CL ua FP U
Figure 5-9
TWIN ENGIN E CLIMB - CRUIS E CLIMB
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-23

PERFORMANCE P68C
5.15 BALKED LANDING CLIMB

(Figure 5-10)
( I) Power 2700 RPM; Full Throttle

operations. Do not exceed
435°F (224°C)
(3) Flaps 35 •
(b) Example

(2) Outside Air TemperC'.rure 23°C (ISA + l0°C)

5-24 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
P68C PE RFORMANCE
.....
.
_ _ 1 ____ -•
.... , . - - ""-=4- - l1' _ _..____ _ __ _ · · -

--
::~:~ • io•c
1.s.A. • zo•c
1.s.A. 3o•c
--- . '-
-'--·
~ -- .• -----.c::-5---- -
-- ___. -· .
·"""--
·"""
-~· - c~ ~.:.::::~~=:~
400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100

R~ n: OF CL' IJB FPl.I
Figure 5- 10
BALKED LANDING CLIMB

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-25
PERFORMANCE P68C
5.16 TIME AND FUEL TO CLIMB-MAX. CLIMB

(Figure 5- 11)
(I) Power 2700 RPM ; Full Throttle

435 ' F (224' C)
(3) Flaps UP
(e) Example

(2) Outside Air Temperature I 9' C (ISA + 20' C)
(4) Time to Climb to 8000 ft 8.8 minutes
(5) Fuel consumption to Climb to 8000 ft 10.8 Kg
5-26 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

P68C PERFORMANCE
- ·------
·-··· ·· -·- -- ···-·.
. · --=~
_. ... . ·---~ -"=""' ~
10
0
2
"< 5
..
----·-·- . ·- ·-
10 12 1• 16 ia 20 22 2• 26
Tiii ( TO CLI MB
Figure 5-1 1
T IME AND FUEL TO CLIMB - MAX IMUM CLIMB
DATE: MAY7, 2002 5-27

Section 5 - vulcanair'48
PERFORMANCE P68C
5.17 DISTANCE TO CLIMB - MAX. CLIMB

(Figure 5- 12)
(I) Power 2700 RPM; Full Throttle

higher altitudes LEAN for smooth
435°F (224°C)
(3) Flaps UP
(b) Example

(2) Outside Air Temperature 19°C (ISA+20°C)
(4) Distance to C limb to 8000 ft 33.5 Km
5-28 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

P68C PERFORMANCE
.
0 H
.
0
c
:> ' -· .-
1---
;. 12
10
·- '"-·
.
•
- ... .
• !.- ..•. .
-····
e --- --
·-:::.:. ,:::::7 ~- -- ~- - -=-· __:r.-- .:: : :
t-- - - · -;:::-:- .-::
_: ~~ ~_;~ = ··~= --=~ :::: ~:;~ t~ ~~:

1:~;~~~ ~~ - -~ ::- : ~~~---- -- -~~ ~~~ ~ ~~ ~:
~
<
. ·--:- i::: :~~ :.::g -==~~~ -~: :~i~~::
~:Y~.: ; ==~:-::: ,_ i::--=-~: ::~i~::;;~~~;;~~ ~ ~ ~: ~ ~
- -~ ·- ~~~ ~:-:r~r::i:::---'. ::= ==--j~= =~~=~ ~~: : ::::~
:~ r.:~:~ ! : :.::=-:· · 1:i~~ ~::r-:~ !i :i~ ~ ~~~y: :
=p~ ~f~~=1~ :;~-!r=-= :::· ~. =~~; ~1'::~-~~~f:: : ~ : :~; !~~~~i =~ ~~
..
x :: 2 06.f. h J l t.111 . T 0.
I
Weia~ !j ~ qc: r E.PU. :t . :•,[
10 20 50 70 80
Figure 5-12
DISTANCE TO CLIMB - MAXIMUM CLIMB
DATE: MAY7,2002 5-29

Section 5 vulcanairi::i
PERFORMANCE P68C
5.18 TIME AND FUEL TO CLIMB - CRUISE CLIMB

(Figure 5-13)
(e) Associated Conditions
(1) Power 2450 RPM; 25" Hg up to 4000 ft

(2) Mixture LEAN for smooth operations.
(3) Flaps UP
(4) Best Rate-of-Climb Speed 92 KlAS
(b) Example

(2) Outside Air Temperature 19·c (ISA + 2o·c)
(3) Aircraft Weight 20201bs
(4) Time to Climb to 8000 ft 1 1.5 minutes
(5) Fuel consumption to Climb to 8000 ft 10.6 Kg
5-30 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

vulcanair': Section S
P68C PERFORMANCE
:;-; _---=t:-.
....... ··- - _i:::-:-; -~ :: ~=-,,;
. -.
· :x::: :~jl ::~~= ::: · =-::.:-=~-=t:::.::·
- - -... • ...... • • ·-- t-- - •••. . ••.
:-:: ~
• .. •.
I0°C ~ -
20°c
~--- ..:::::.: ::--~ .. ::~:- 2:-
--
30°C ~ ,...-~--
=~ =-= :·~~ -~~~ ::-:-:= ~::: ~~~
.;.~ ff~ ::: :-:- =:- ~--::: ~~
-·
8 ..:::- i-- .. · ~ -
~
-·- -·
· :::-..:~-=-- ..
: :.::::t::=
- ·---· -·· : ~ :::--;:
.- ; : :t::::- i::-_ _._::.:-::
-······ - ···---
·-----
r=-: ~-1::.::: :.":::-:t=::r:::t::l - ·- .
-,...------+--• -- ... .--
--- :-:-:: ~~ :~F;:

-~
. ..-. .. .. .
~
1-::.::::..:..::: : ::_:: :: :
.........
12 16 20 ?8 32
F'l:t l l:l Ct.l lJ 3 '8
8 10 :2 I< 16 18 20 lZ 2< 26 23 JO
Tl U ( TO CL :u a
Figure 5-13
TIME AND FUEL TO CLIMB - CRUISE CLIMB
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 S-31

PERFORMANCE P68C
5.19 DISTANCE TO CLIMB-CRUISE CLIMB
(Figure 5-14)
( 1) Power 2450 RPM; 25" Hg up to 4000 rt

(2) Mixture LEAN for smooth operations.
(3) Flaps UP
(b) Example

(2) Outside Air Temperature 19°C (ISA+20'C)
(3) Airplane Weight 2020lbs
(4) Distance to climb to 8000 ft 26 Km
5-32 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

vulcanair • Section 5
P68C PERFORMANCE
v
= -~= ·-- '--
c
1. S• .A.
•, S, A, t0°C "'- .. • . . . . .... :or" ~ _.-r•• ·~ · ••
1.S. A
. S. A.
~g~g 1 ~ - : f.l"",Y~~---:===
• ;..r:--~ ·-.-= ..-· -··
'
·1
~~=- ::::.
:=::i~=:: : ::r.:::.:
:o
.. ~- =-= :~ =-~EE~~~--,.:=:~
-~ :: : .. :~ :::: ~:::-i::::::t=_:i:_~~
-- .... : Ii! : I 11 t ;;i; ~: ~;~ ~:~~ =-=:~~Id~~~~
c
2
. ..,. ·-
tit
: !I : • ; I
:i tr'":~. : 1 i~ ~ili ==~:~§~ ;~~: ~~~~iff:=~~~: : ~·~
~ I
1, : n:1: !i l1.t: ~m~ ~~L ~ ~ ~±:~ :~;~ :.::-,-:.: ~~=-~~::
:r tL:.:.r.: ::;:::; =·· -r~~;:;~-::z-::=-±::== E::
~
- 0
zoa" "• l "iil l A. t.O. N• • J l't ! I
!8 .ao
, ,._. ~:t It: - ..
I
I ~ I S i.l'.C t ro c:. MU <m
I
Figure 5-14
DISTANCE TO C LIMB - CRUIS E CLIMB
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-33

PERFORMANCE P68C
5.20 CRUISE PERFORMANCE - BEST ECONOMY

MIXTURE - SEA LEVEL.
NOTE
1. Increase speed by I KT AS for each 200 Kg below
2084 Kg.
ALTTnJDE POWER SETllNG TOT. 1.sA-2o· c I.SA I.SA +20"C
H RPM I "Hg
FUELFlOW
USG.al/hr I I I
%BHP KTAS KCAS %BHP KTAS KCAS %BHP KTAS KCAS I I
SEJI. LEVEL 2450
2450
I 2625 21 .64
20.64
81.9 j
77.5
157 1162
154 159
79.0 158
74.8 155
158
155
76.4
72.3
159 1154
156 151
2450 24 19.71 73.6 151 156 71 .0 152 152 68.7 153 148
2450 23 18.87 6!l.5 147 153 67.0 1 148 148 64.8 149 144
2450 22 17.88 65.3 144 149 63.0 1 145 145 60.9 146 141
2450 21 17.04 61.2 140 145 59.0 141 141 57.1 142 137
2450 20 16.18 57.0 136 141 55.0 ' 137 137 53.2 137 133
2450 19 15.31 52.9 132 137 51.0 1 132 132 49.3 133 128
2350 24 18 .54 69.5 147 153 67.0 148 1 148 64.8 149 144
2350 23 17 .64 65.8 144 149 63.5 145 145 61.4 146 , 141
2350 22 16 .88 61.9 141 146 59.8 142 142 57.8 142 137
2350 21 16.04 58.1 137 142 56.0 138 138 54.2 138 134
2350 20 15.21 53.9 133 138 52.0 133 133 50.3 134 129
2350 19 14.55 50.3 129 134 48.5 129 129 46.9 130 125
2200 I 22 15.48 57.0 136 141 55.0 136 136 532 137 132
2200 21 14.65 53.4 132 137 51.5 133 133 49.8 133 128
2200 20 13.98 49.5 128 132 47.8 128 128 46.2 128 124
2200 I 19 13.22 46.1 124 128 44.5 124 124 43.0 124 , 120
I
Figure 5- 15
Sheet 1 of7
5-34 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

P68C PERFORMANCE

MIXTURE - 2000 ft.
NOTE
I. Increase speed by I KT AS for each 200 Kg below

2084 Kg.
ALTITUDE POWER SETTING TOT. l.SA-20•c I.SA I.SA +20•c
It RPM I "HQ
FUELR.OW
us GaVllr 'f.BHP I I IKCAS
KTAS KCAS 'f.BHP KTAS I IKCAS
'U HP KTAS
2000 2450 I 26 22.14 84.3 161 I 162 81.3 I 162 I
158 78.5 164. 153
2450
2450
I 2524 21.1'\
20.21
79.6
76.0
158 1 159
155 156
76.8 I
73.3
159 154 74.2 1 160
156 152 70.8 157
150
147
2450 23 19.31 71.8 1 152 153 69.3 153 1 148 66.9 154 144
2450 22 18.41 67.7 148 149 65.3 149 145 63.1 150 141
2450 21 17.41 I
63.3 144 145 61 .0 145 j 141 59.0 146 137
2450 20 16.58 59.1 1 140 141 57.0 141 1 137 55.1 142 133
2450 19 15.81 55.0 136 137 53.0 137 133 51 .2 137 129
I I
2350 24 19.14 71.8 , 151 1 153 69.3 , 153 1148 66.9 1 154 144
2350 I 23 17.98 67.9 1 148 149 65.5 149 145 63.3 150 141
i
2350
2350
I 22
21
17.21
16.48
I
63.8 145 146
59.9 1 141 142
61.5
57.8
145 . 141 59.4 146 1 137
I
142 I 138 55.8 142 133
2350 I 20 15.64 55.7 , 137 138 53.8 \ 137 I 133 52.0 , 138 129
I
2350
2200 I
19
22
14.91
15.81
52.1 I 133 134
58.9 1 140 141

"''II "' j '"
56.8 140
48.6 133 125
136 54.9 1 141 132

2200 I 21 15.05 55.0 I 136 I 137 53.0 1 136 132 51.2 j 136 128
2200 I 20 14.31 51.3 132 , 133 49.5 132 128 47.8 132 124
2200 19 13.55 47.7 1 128 128 46.0 l 128 124 I
44.5 127 120
I I ' I I
Figure 5-1 5
Sheet 2 of7
DATE: MAY7, 2002 5-35

PERFORMANCE P68C

MIXTURE - 4000 ft.
NOTE

2084 Kg.
All rTUOE POWER SElllNG TOT. 1.s.1<.-2o· c l.S.A. 1.S.A. +20·c
tt RPM I "HQ
FUELFlOW
US Gal/hr ieHP j KTAS I KCAS ieHP j j KCAS
KTAS ieHP j KTAS j KCAS
4000 2450 I 26 22.80 86.6 I 166 1 162 83.5 I 167 157 80.7 168 I 153
2450 25 21.70 82.5 163 159 79.5 1 164 155 76.8 165 j 150
2450 24 20.80 78.1 159 156 75.3 161 151 72.7 162 147
2450 23 19.81 73.9 156 1 153 71.3 157 148 68.8 158 144
2450 22 18.81 69.8 153 149 67.3 154 145 65.0 154 141
2450 21 17.88 65.4 149 1 145 63.0 150 1 141 60.9 150 137
2450 20 17.04 I
61 .2 145 142 59.0 146 137 57.0 146 133
2450 19 16.18 57.1 1 141 \ 137 55.0 141 133 I 53.1 142 129
I
2350 24 19.47 73.9 , 156 , 152 71 .3 , 157 1 148 68.8 158 1 144
2350 23 18.54 70.0 153 149 67.5 154 145 65.2 154 141
2350 22 17.64 65.9 1 149 146 63.5 , 150 1 141 61 .3 150 137
2350 I 21 16.74 61.7 145 142 59.5 146 137 57.5 146 133
2350 I 20 15.98 57.9 1 141 138 55.8 , 142 1 134 53.9 142 129
2350 19 15.21 54.0 137 134 52.0 138 130 50.2 138 125
2200 I 22 16.14 60.7 , 144 141 58.5 144 1 136 56.5 1 145 1 132
2200 I 21 15.38 56.8 1 140 I 137 54.8 1 140 1 132 52.9 1 141 1 128
2200 20 14.58 53.2 135 I 133 51.3 136 128 49.5 136 124
2200 19 13.81 49.3 1 131 128 47.5 131 124 45.9 , 131 I 119
Figure 5-1 5
Sheet 3 of7
5-36 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

P68C PERFORMANCE

MIXTURE- 6000 ft.
NOTE
I. Increase speed by I KTAS for each 200 Kg below

2084 Kg.
ALTITUDE POWER SETTING TOT. l.S.A.-20"C I.SA I.SA +20°C

ft RPM I "Hg
FUELR.OW
USGal/hr !.BHP I KTAS I KCAS I IKCAS
!.BHP KTAS '!IBHP IKTAS I KCAS
6000 2450 24 21.30 79.9 164 1 155 77.0 165 151 74.4 , 166 146
2450 23 20.20 76.1 161 152 73.3 162 148 70.7 163 144
2450 22 19.41 72.2 157 , 149 69.5 158 145 67.1 159 141
2450 21 18.31 67.5 153 145 65.0 154 141 62.8 155 137
2450 20 17.31 63.1 149 142 60.8 150 137 58.7 150 133
2450 19 16.48 58.9 145 138 56.8 145 133 54.8 146 129
2350 24 19.87 76.1 160 152

73.3 161 147 70.7 162 143
Z350
2350
I 23
22
19.14
17.98
72.2
68.0
157 149
69.5
65.5
153 1 146
158
154
144
141
67.1
63.3
159
155
140
137
2350 I 21 17.08 63.6 I 149 142
61 .3 150 137 59.1 151 133
2350 I 20 16.31 59.7 1 145 1 138 57.5 146 133 55.5 146 129
2350 19 15.54 55.5 141 134 53.5 141 129 51.7 141 125
I
2200
2200
I 2221 16.48
15.71
62.6 , 148 1 140 60.3 148 136
58.7 144 137 56.5 1 144 132
58.2
54.6
141
145
131
128
2200 I 20 550 1 140 1 133 53.0 140 128
15.05 51 .2 140 124
2200 19 14.15 50.9 135 128 49.0 1 135 124 47.3 135 119
2200 I 18 13.48 47.5 131 124 45.8 , 131 1 120 44.2 130 115
Figure 5-15
Sheet 4 of7
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-37

Section 5 vulcanairU:
PERFORM ANCE P68C
5.20 CRUIS E PERFORMANCE - BEST ECONOMY

MIXTURE - 8000 ft.
NOTE

2084 Kg.
ALTITUDE POWER SETTING TOT. 1.SA-2o·c I.SA 1.sA +2o· c

ft RPM •ttg
FUEL A.OW
I I
USGaVhr 'J,DHP KTAS ~AS 'J,BHP I I
KTAS KCAS %BHP I I KTAS KCAS
8000 2450 22 19.71 74.o I 162 1 149 71 .3 163 I 144 68.8 163 I 140
2450 21 18.81 69.3 158 145 66.8 158 140 64.4 159 136
2450 20 17.64 64.9 , 153 141 62.5 154 137 60.3 155 132
2450 19 16.88 60.8 149 , 137 58.5 150 133 56.5 1 150 I 128
2450 18 16.04 56.6 1 145 133 54.5 145 129 52.6 145 124
2450 17 15.21 51.9 139 128 50.0 139 123 48.3 , 139 1 119
2350 22 18.41 69.9 158 145 67.3 159 141 64.9 159 136
2350 21 17.41 65.4 154 I 142 63.0 1 154 137 60.8 155 132
2350 20 16.64 61 .3 i 149 138 59.0 150 I 133 56.9 , 150 1 129
2350 19 15.88 57.1 145 1 134 55.0 145 129 53.1 145 124
2350 18 15.05 53.2 141 130 51.3 141 125 49.5 141 120
2350 17 14.31 49.3 136 125 47.5 136 120 45.8 135 116
2350 16 13.65 45.2 130 120 43.5 129 1 115 42.0 128 110
I
2200 22 16.88 64.2 , 152 140 61 .8 152 135 59.6 153 131
2200 21 16.04 60.3 148 136 58.0 148 132 56.0 148 127
2200 I 20 15.31 56.6 144 I 133 54.5 144 128 52.6 1 144 1 123
2200 19 14.48 52.5 139 128 50.5 I 139 123 48.7 139 119
2200 18 13.75 49.1 135 124 47.3 135 119 45.6 134 115
2200 17 13.15 45.7 130 120 44.0 130 115 42.5 129 110
Figure 5- 15
Sheet 5 of7
5-38 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

vulcanairr: Section 5
P68C PERFORMANCE

MIXTURE - 10000 ft.
NOTE
I. lncrease speed by 2 KT AS for each 200 Kg below

2084 Kg.
ALTITIJDE POWER SETilNG TOT. l.SA -20"C I.SA I.SA +20"C

FUELFlDW
tt RPM ! "Hg US GaVhr ...BHP I KTAS I KCAS ...BHP I KTAS IKCAS ...BHP I KTAS KCAS
10000 2450 20 18.14 66.8 ' 158 141 64.3 159 136 62.0 159 132
2450 19 17.14 62.6 154 137 60.3 154 132 58.1 154 128
2450 18 16.31 58.5 149 133 56.3 150 128 54.3 149 124
2450 I 17 15.55 53.8 144 128 51.8 144 124 49.9 144 119
2450 16 14.55 49.4 138 123 47.5 I 138 118 45.8 137 114
2350 20 16.98 62.9 154 137 60.5 154 132 58.4 154 128
2350 19 16.21 58.7 I 149 133 56.5 150 129 54.5 150 124
2350 18 15.41 54.8 145 129 52.8 145 124 50.9 145 120
2350 I 17 14.65 50.9 140 125 49.0 ' 140 120 47.3 139 115
2350 I 16 13.88 46.8 134 120 45.0
I
I
133 115 43.4 132 I 110
I
2200 I 20 15.64 58.2 I 148 132 56.0 I 148 127 54.0 148 123
2200 I 19 14.81 54.1 143 128 52.0 143 123 50.2 143 118
2200
2200
i 18
17
14.08
13.41
50.7 139
47.3 134
124
120
48.8
45.5
139
134
139
134
47.0 138
43.9 1 133
114
110
2200 16 12.65 43.4 128 115 41 .8 127 127 40.3 125 104
I ! I I I I
Figure 5-1 5
Sheet 6 of7
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-39

PERFORMANC E P68C

MIXTURE - 12000 ft.
NOTE
I. Increase speed by 2 KT AS for each 200 Kg below

2084 Kg.
ALTTIUDE POWER SETTING TOT. l.SA-20"C l.S.A. I.SA +20"C
" RPM I "Hg

FUEL FLOW
US GaVhr 'tiBHP I I
KTAS KCAS 'tiBHP I I
KTAS KCAS 'tiBHP I I KTAS KCAS
12000 2450 I 19 15.58 64.0 1 158 I 136 61.5 J 158 1 132 59.3 158 127
2450 18 16.71 59.8 153 133 57.5 153 128 554 153 123
2450 17 15.88 55.4 148 128 53.3 148 : 123 51.3 148 118
2450 16 14.98 51.0 142 123 49.0 142 1 118 47.2 141 113
2350 19 16.58 60.3 153 133 58.0 154 128 55.9 154 123
2350 18 15.64 56.2 149 129 54.0 149 124 52.1 148 119
2350 17 14.98 52.5 144 125 50.5 144 120 48.7 143 115
2350 16 14.05 48.1 138 119 46.3 137 114 44.6 136 109
I I
2200 ! 19 15.15 55.6 147 127 53.5 147 i 123 516 1 147 118
2200 I 18 14.41 52.0 143 124 50.0 142 119 48.2 142 114
2200 17 13.65 48.4 138 119 46.5 137 11 4 44.8 I 136 109
2200 16 12.88 44.7 132 114 43.0 131 109 415 J 129 103
I
I I
I
I
I I I
Figure 5-1 5
Sheet 7 of 7
5-40 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

P68C PERFORMANCE
5.21 CRUISE SPEED
(Figure 5-16)
(I) Aircraft Weight 2084 Kg

(2) Outside Air Temperature LS.A.
(3) Flaps UP
l
....
16
. . .. ~··
14 !·
i·
'
467. RTD 55~ Rlll FULL nmomE
12 2200 RPM 2 360 RPM 2700 RPM
1
l !
10
:I 65 X RTD
2350 RPM
I
I
r
I
8
r
--
...
0
7U Rlll
N50 RPM
F? 6
~
""
~
I I
?
!
J i
J I
u r
if[!j If ~ ! .
110 120 130 HO 150 160 170 180
IBUE ~IRSPEEO l<nott
Figure 5-16
CRUISE SPEED Vs. ALTITUDE
DATE: MAY7,2002 5-41

PERFORMANCE P68C
5.22 RANGE PROFILE - STD. RANGE

CONFIGURATION
(Figure 5-17)
(I) Aircraft Weight 2084 Kg, before engine start

(2) Initial Fuel Loading 520 It (375 Kg/137 US Gal)
(See Note)
(3) Mixture Best Economy
(4) Ambient Conditions LS.A., no wind
NOTE
Range includes start, taxi, climb, descent at

I 000 fpm and 45 minutes reserve fuel al 45%
power.
Figure 5-17
RANGE PROFILE-STD. RANGE CONFIGURATION
5-42 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

P68C PERFORMANCE
5.23 RANGE PROFILE - LONG RANGE

CONFIGURATION
(Figure 5-18)
(I) Aircraft Weight 2084 Kg, before engine start

(2) Initial Fuel Loading 670 It (480 Kg/177 US Gal)
(See Note)
(4) Ambient Conditions LS.A., no wind .
NOTE
Range includes start, tax i, climb, descent at

I 000 fpm and 45 minutes reserve fuel al 45%
power.
- _ .. ::t.::~:: .. _u..._: -= X:..-. =
. . . ...... .
...... .-...
....... ;--·-
ZJCO 2 • 00 l ~CO 2600 2100 l ftOO l'JOO JOOO
""
Figure 5-1 8
RANGE PROFILE- LONG RANG E CONFIGURATION
DATE: MAY7,2002 5-43

PERFORMANCE P68C
5.24 TIME, FUEL AND DISTANCE TO DESCENT
(Figure 5-19)
(I) Flaps UP
(2) Power As Required
(4) Airspeed 12000 ft to S.L. 160 KIAS
above 12000 ft 140 KIAS
NOTE
Distances shown are for zero wind. This

informat io n may be used for a ll de sce nt
weights.
(b) Example
( I) Pressure Altitude 8000 ft

(2) Rate of Descent 1000 tpm
(3) Weight all
(4) Time to Descent 8 minutes
(5) Fuel to Descent 1.8 Kg (4.0 lbs)
(6) Distance to Descent 40 Km (22 n. miles)
5-44 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

P68C PERFORMANCE
. .,0
E
i.Ei
i= 0
x
zo ~
::::::
tHE ; "'E
' ...
"'::::
0
:e 0
...
0
"'
.,
0
0
0
g
' ...
0
"'
<>
:;:
....<
-... L~ .._. "'0
~ ..:....i~ ~
0 ~
"'
0
~
~;
co
.
>C
0 co
:e ~
~ ~"'E
' ... . a:~
.,
0
0
2 .,-·-
·-
..._,
....::>
, .-r ,. ,. - ...., -- ., ...
.."
c
g "
0
...
0
0
"'
3aruu w
Figure 5- 19
TIME, FU EL AND DISTANCE TO DESCENT
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 5-45

Section 5 L lt-N(Jr!.)6- '1!)7rf-NCE vulcanair5:
PERFOR P68C
5.25 Li 0 CLEAR SO FT
OJ
(1) Flaps 35 °
(2) Level, hard surface, dry runway
(3) Maximum effective braking
(4) Power FLT. IDLE at 50 ft
above ground level
(5) Screen Speed Refer to following table
! WElGHT SCREEN SPEED
(Kg) (K IAS)
1980 78
1900 76
1800 75
1700 73
1600 71
1500 69
(b) Example
(1) Pressure Altitude 2000 ft
(2) O utside Air Temperature 23·c
(4) Wind 8 Kts-headwind
(5) Total Landing Distance 510mt
NOTE
The Ground Run is approximately 40% of the total
Landing Distance.
Increase Ground Run 20% when operating from a
grass surface.
5-46 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

P68C PERFORMANCE
L ANOlt~ G O: STANCE 100 IJe tr ac

.,,
::?
"' cO :--:."',_____ ,___
·--~
"'
..;
- - - f-o..
..;
>-
-1-·
...
"'
~ .__ l:::: C! =
"'
.• ~"
t=::
tz";
--
Thou1end1
-§
"! -: l:::=t::; ~
~.!...~ "' "'~
0
~
> 't-<:i
... ~
~<...
,,.
s g
01',,,, §:
>11:,-
~REFERENCE LI NE
~~
..
"'0
2= ~ s
...
IO
..,... :::
:!l :r
~ ..,"'
~
-~
- -- ..."' !!:
-+-
0
"' 0
u
_,,
0
...
0
- ~---~~=:EE:: 0
"' -'
-·- ·- 2 <
0
. \ . ~ ->·-
..;_ _ 0
· -- u; ~
---
-.
Figure 5-20
LANDING DISTANCE
DATE: MAY7,2002 5-47

AU{!'!', l . ·, \/· Ju I P'f'Y. L !'D.
AIRCR AFT TY:>:·:. Vl,i..CAN!· ·•·'. i'h ~ 1\:Rl ·11 \ FI' R! ·:ci: 'JI 1-VMV
i\IRCR/\Fr !.OJ\!JING
AUTHORISED
11.J.GR.EAYES.'\ V58
i_
s YSTl-'M: VU!.CJ\NAh< Pu6C FL!Gli r l"'ANtJAL SECT. 6
,-iATi'
J(\l!..'.)/'.'.'Jf !
_J_____ I_ __
j [V,Tr~mxPIRY 1-· - '"""
I- 30/09/2007
_
-i-
_ _,__ _
I
-1
~ ':::7
Approved
I .J Greaves AV - 58
----
IND!::X CONFIGURATION
UNITS
6!.Q.!_2Q__ -
---
6 SEAT PASS.
-
- -- ·-
t --
DATUM: WING : .Ei\DING EOGE
ABOVE \A.'E!GHTS INCLlJDE UNUS:\1>LE FUE•. & FULi. OIL
NOTE: It is the responsibility of the Pilul in command to ensure that the aircrnn is
loaded in accordance with Fli ght Manual limitations.
vulcanairS:: Section 6
P68C WEIGHT & BALANCE
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Page
6. 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 AIRPLANE WEIGHING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.3 WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.4 WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION

FOR FLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.5 EQUIPMENT LIST ............ ... ........ .. . . ... .. 6- 12

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 6-i
This page intc.itionally left blank
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
6.1 INTRODUCTION
This section contains the necessary information and procedures for
correct aircraft loading and centre of gravity calculation. This section also
contains the procedures to establish the weight and balance for flight and
describes the arms and weights of all equipment installed on the aircraft at
the time of delivery. Weight and Balance limitations specified in Section 2
must never be exceeded and it is the responsibility of the pilot to ensure that
the aircraft is loaded within limits before any flight.
Centre of gravity is a determining factor for flight characteristics during

take-off and for static longitudinal stability. A properly loaded aircraft will
provide good performance throughout the flight envelope.
Using the basic empty weight and C.G., the pilot can easily determine
the weight and C.G. position for the loaded aircraft by computing the total
weight and moment and then determining whether they are within the
approved envelope.
A weight and balance calculation is necessary to determine how much

fuel or baggage can be boarded so as to keep the C.G. within allowable
limits. Check calculations before adding fuel to ensure against overloading.
The method for determining take-off weight and C .G ., the forms used
when weighing the aircraft and determining basic empty weight, the C.G.
position and calculating useful load, arc contained in this section.

DATE: MAY7,2002 6-1
WEIGHT & BALANCE P68C
6.2 AIRPLANE WEIGHING PROCEDURES

The a ircraft was weighed prior to delivery, and its Basic Empty Weight
and Centre of Gravity location are recorded in Figure 6-3.
Any change in equipment or aircraft modification can affect the Basic

Empty Weight and Centre of Gravity.
The fo llowing is a weighing procedure to determine the Basic Empty

Weight and Centre of Gravity location:
(a) Preparation:
(I) Remove excessive dirt, grease, moisture, etc., from the

aircraft before weighing.
(2) To prevent scale reading errors, tow the aircraft inside a
closed bui lding or into a n a re a free from any wind
disturbances. Remove leg-fuselage fillets ifit is to be
weighed on jacks.
(3) To determine the centre of gravity, place the aircraft in a
level attitude. (See (b) below).
(4) When weighirig the aircraft, all equipment included in the
certified empty weight must be installed.
(5) De fuel the aircraft and dra in the sumps. Fuel remaining
aboard after drainage is included in the empty weight.
(6) Fill to full capacity with o il.
(b) Levelling
To laterally level the aircraft, place a spirit-level across the seat

sliding rails between frames 8 and 9, and either de flate the tyre or
lower the j ack on the high side of the aircraft.
To longitudinally level the aircraft, partially withdraw the two

levelling screws located below the left centre window, and place
a spirit leve l on these screws.
Deflate or inflate the nose wheel tyre, or raise or lower the j ack(s)
as necessary in both instances to centre the bubble longitudinally.

6-2 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
WEIGHT & SALM ....:E
(c) Weighing Aircraft
( !) Properly .:aliJratc, zero ;md use scales in accordance with

the scale manufacturer's instructions.
(2) Place the scales or jacks under the aircraft wheels or
jacking points as appropriate, and record the scale
readings in the WE!GHfNG FORM (Figure 6-1 ).
(3) Note any tare when the aircraft is removed from the
scales and deduct from each reading.
(d) Centre of Gravity
(I) Complete the WEIGHING FORM to determine the

Centre of Gravity arm of the aircraft as weighed.
(e) Basic Empty Weight
(I) In order to detennine the Basic Empty Weight and the

C.G. location, complete figure 6-2 by adding items a+b
for STD Range Configuration, and items a+b+c for Long
Range Configuration,
6.3 WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA RECORD

The Basic Empty Weight, Centre of Gravity Location, and Useful Load
listed in Figure 6-3 are for the aircraft as delivered from the factory. These
figures apply only to the specific aircraft as identified by the Serial Number
and Registration Marks shown.
Figure 6-4 provides a Weight and Balance Record Form that presents
the current status of aircraft basic empty weight, and a complete history of
previous modifications. Any change to installed equipment or any
modification which affects weight or moment must be entered into the
Weight and Ralancc Record.
l( N ..\C .~~p f)roval No.: 02/ 17~24J/~P .4

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 6-J
": ::f' . .
~~t'E;CF .'
•.N'EIGH ING ON WHEELS
61 " (1.55 m)
E
::i
iii
-0
~.....- ,._;;- - - - - -,- - - - - - - - - : ; · - ilfii

.L ' ,-
\ _ -----~ -----J_ _- J :
__ ~ _______ ~-- __- - ---~~-- -.-r--_':'"m"gm~

I I
:1 • Level on
nose wheel main wheel

-N- · L & R-
I ~ 3 = I· 2 4 S• 4•3
WEIGHING
POINT SCALE TARE NET ARM MOMENT
RE1\DING
(k~)
\\'EIGHT (ml (kgm)
(kg) (kg)
N 455. 'lD .-<55. 20 - 2.783 -43(. ql

L bj1 . DO 6 31.oo 0.8 18 516. f C
R bZS . DO 625.00 0.818 5U. 2S
w C.G. M
TOTAL
{4..H~/9 0•..4.?.~.. 51X.~ ..~..l1
C.G. = M/ W
% MAC = cc.a.11.550) x c100) = Z.Ltl.%
Figure 6-1
Sheet I of2
WEIGI IJNG FORM
ENAC Apfli'Oval No.: 02/ 171243/S!'A

6-0:: DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanair"Q; Scc!fon 6
WEIGHING ON JACKS
S1"(1.55m)
E i.----=------'--
::i
r;
"C
---- --- ------ --, I
Frame no. 2 Jacking point

-N- -L& R-
-
WEIGHING
I 2 I l • 1-2 4 5 ... 4 )( 3
POINT SCAL~
TARE NET ARM MOMENT
READING (kg)
WEIGllT (m) (k g m )
(kg) (kg)
N - 2.075
L 0.570
R 0.570
T OTAL
w C.G. M
................ ................ ................
C.G. - M/ W
% MAC = (C.G./1.550) x ( 100) = ............ %
Figure 6-1
Sheet 2 of2
WEIG HiNG FORM
ENAC Approval No.: 02/17 1243/S PA

DATE: MAY 7, 1002 6-5
t ,., M O ~'r..; ""r-. :v ijiiiDiJ
s~ct:IJ ... ~ 'ii' • .•~: .•· -"·· oo h cG
WE!G}L ~ ~f,... ...,J.tv:::.-:3
- - -P63C
6.4 'WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION
FORFLlGHT
NOTE
It is the responsibility of the pilot and/or
aircraft owner to ensure that the ai rcraft is
properly loaded.
WARNING
When no passengers or baggage are loaded
behind c re w seats, fill th e fu e l ta n ks
sufficiently to meet approved C.G. limits.
(a) Use the Loading Form (Figure 6-6) and add the weight of ail items
to be loaded to the Basic Empty Weight. Observe Maximum Zero
Fuel Weight Limitation.
(b) 01'.'termine the moment of all items to be carried in the aircraft.
(c) Add the moment of all items to be loaded to the Basic Empty
Weight moment.
(d) By using the figures of item (a) and item (c) (above), locate a point
on the Centre of Gravity Moment Envelope (Figure 6-5). If the
point falls w ithin the Envelope and the aircraft zero fuel weight
limit is not exceeded, the load ing meets weight and balance
requirements.
WEIG HT x ARM
IT EM
kg m kgm
a. Weight (as weighed)
+
b. Unu sable Fuel for STD 13 0.770 IO.OIO
Range Configuration
+
c. Furtlu:r Unm:ablc Fuel for 6 0.770 4.620
Long Range Conliguration
Basic Empty Weight A4J_f), 2D

Vulcanalr SpA
POA N" VN146-CS
Figure 6-2
BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT

6-6 !JAT~: MAY 7, 2002
vulcana!r5:i= Section 6
Aircraft Serial Number .. ~ ?. !~ ... .. .

Registration Marks . .V. /1 -:-. V. H.V ... .
AIRCRAFT ACTUAL BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT

ITEM Weight x C.G. Arm = Moment
(Aft of Datum)
Basic Empty Weight* (From Figure 6-2)
Optional Equipment (If not on board
when factory weighed)
Actual Basic Empty Weight
* Aircraft Basic Empty Weight inc ludes full (7.5 litres) engine oil, full
brake fluid, 18 litres of unusable fuel for the STD Range Configuration
plus a furth e r 8 litres of unu sa ble fuel fo r the Lo ng Range
Configuration.
A IRCRAFT USEFUL LOAD

NORMAL CATEGORY OPERATION
(Max Ramp Weight) - (Actual Basic Empty Weight)= Useful load _____ _,
(4630 lbs) - ( ........................ lbs)= ............................. lbs

(2100 kg) - ( ...:l. ••·J ..•1.<,.v.... kg) = .....c
J ·2 0 'Y)
.A X'i ,/..o/ ...... 9...... kg
CJ s... <)
THIS ACTUAL BASIC EMPTY WE IG HT, C.G. AND U UL

LOAD ARE FOR TH E AIRCRAFT AS DELIVERED FROM
THE FACTORY.
REFER TO WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD (Figure 6-4) WHEN
ALTERATIONS HA VE BEEN MA DE.
Figure 6-3
WEIGHT AN D BALANCE DATA FORM

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 6-7
Section 6 vulcanair':i
0
~ 0
,....
Cll I-
< ::c: z E' ......
al0 Cl)
Ul
...l iii ::E ~
<
::i ::: 0
I->- ::E
u I-
< 0..
:::Ul ::E
Ul I- 00
z ::: ~
0
0
v;
~ E
~ Ul
z
UlCl)
< 0 ::E ~
~ z 0
z <
::c: ::E
0 u
f:: I-
~ 6iii ::E
I- ci:: g
Cll
<
6
Ul
:::
ci::
I- 00
::: ~
(-j a3i\01"13~
(--l03aav
.:.: u.
Ul
al 0 z ~
::E z 0 ·o;
::i 0 f:: ::::
z f:: u< c
...l Q..
<;:: u: Cl.
::sci:: u cs E
"'u -0
Ul
(/] 0 ·v;
Ul ~
Vl ::E
0 "' "'
-.; .:::
.&J
dj
- 2u -0
< ... V>
'ON 11113.11
Ul
I-
<
0
Figure 6-4
WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD

6-8 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
00
"'
...J
0 '"'
0
9 9
24
5.0
22
MAX RAMP WEIOHT
MAX T.O. WEIGHT
2084 Ka 2100 Ka
4.6 8. 82 10.10
20
&. 7 11 .02
MAX Z.F. WEIGHT l 810 Ka

4. 0 18
3.11 18
3.86
14
3. 0•
....
:r
ll
CJ 2. a 4.81
lit
2 4 8 8 10 ll
Kam
200 " 400 " 800 800 100 0
AIRPLANE MOMENT/100 LB•lnoh11
Figure 6-5
WEIGHT MOMENT ENVELOPE
'

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 6-9
O'I
I STANDARD CONFIGURATION ~ 00
t"'l g
0
ITEM
WEIGHT
(kg)
ARM
(m)
MOMENT
(kgm)
n g.
::c :s
-l O'I
Basic Aircraft
Ro
Revised Aircrafl =
:>
Pilot's Scat - 0.950 r~
Copilot's Scat -0.950
z
("')
~
Scat No. 3 - 0.146
~
0 C/.l 'T] Scat No. 4 -0. 146
.,..,
r- ::r -·
(') (IQ
t"'l
z """ Cl> c
'' ..... .., Scat No. 5 0.870
:> Cf.l- 0
("') ::c
tT1 0
..... ' °' Scat No. 6 0.870
:>
"C
tT1 N
-l
°'
.,
"C
0 Baggage (Max 180 Kg) 1.542
<
!. Fuel 0.770
Oz
:> 0
-l :.
t"'l 0
<
c:
.. N
s ::::: (;"
:> ::! ~
-('. N ::l
-i
~N 00
e-- TOTAL WT TOTAL MOMENT "'O CD
O'I ~
~ I~
0 "'O
s :>
0 f"l
>z
CLUB SEATING CONFIGURATION ~<
-l
~
>
(") ITEM
WEIGHT
(kg)
ARM
(m)
MOMENT
(kgm)
00
(") -s::
()
Q,)
~~ :l
> "C Basic Aircraft
OJ
~ ci
;-l ~ Revised Aircraft ,·
N
Q Z
-
Pilot's Scat - 0.950
.~
Qo
N
..
•
Q
Copilot's Scat - 0.950
--
N
-..
- .:i
N
~
~
0 (/) 'Tl
Scat No. 3
Scat No. 4
- 0. 186
-0. 186
~ .....
(.,.I :r -·
0 fJQ
en..,, 0
(/) N
c:
..,
0
Scat No. 5 0.870
> tTJ 0...., °'

::c I
Seat No. 6 0.870
m N °'
-l
Baggage (Max l 80 kg) l.542
:E
Fuel 0.770
-::::
t"'l
0 ;,..
:,,
-l ~
~
=
Ro
<
> ("/)~
r- ~ :=;,
TOTAL WT TOT AL MOMENT > ~;::;
0\ Z -·
0 "~
I
(")f"l =
0\
:e
l:o
A.f~/11. PIN NOR JO. 707-18
Section 6 vulcanaire:l
6.5 EQUIPMENT LIST

The list of equipment which must (or may, if optional) be installed
aboard the Vulcanair P68C var iant aircraft is laid out in the "P68C
Equipment List" PIN NORI0.719-1 , latest applicable revision.
Rcv.6
Approved under Authority of DOA No. EASA.2 1J.009
6-12 with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 March 2004
vulcanairU: Section 7
P68C SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF T HE

AIRCRAFT AND ITS SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Page
7. 1 T HE AIRC RAFT ................................ 7- 1
7.2 AIRFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 1
7.3 POWERPLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.4 ENGINE C ONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.5 FLIGHT CO NTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.6 LANDING G EAR .. . . ............ . ....... . ... . .. 7-6
7.7 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.8 FU EL SYST EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.9 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ......................... 7-1 4
7.1 0 EXTERNAL PO W ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7. 11 INSTRUM ENT PAN EL . . . ... . ... ... ............ 7-20
7.12 ANNUNC IATOR PANEL . . .... .... ... . ........ .. 7-21
7. 13 ST A LL WA RN ING ... ... .. ... . . . ............... 7-2 1
DATE: MAY7, 2002 7-i

SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION P68C
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE

7.14 CABIN AIR SYSTEM ........................... 7-21
7.15 BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT ....... . ............ 7-22
7.16 PITOT/STATIC SYSTEM ........................ 7-22
7.17 VACUUM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE

7.1 THE AIRCRAFT

The P68C is a twin-engine high-wing monoplane.
7.2 THE AIRFRAME

The airframe is mainly ofall-metal construction, with tail cone, fairings
and wing tips made of fibreglass.
The fuselage is a semi-monocoquc structure with rivetted skin, the fully

cantilevered wing and empcnnagc arc both of all metal, stressed-skin
construction.
Each wing carries one integral tank for STD Range Configuration,
while an additional fuel tank may be fitted for Long Range Configuration.
The tail unit is composed of a swept-back vertical stabiliser and rudder,

with an all moving tailplane. Trim tabs are on both rudder and stabilator
trailing edge.
Both ailerons and flaps are of all metal construction.
The fixed tricycle landing gear has cantilever spring steel main legs and
an oleo-pneumatic shock absorber nose gear, which is steerable through the
rudder pedals. The steering system automatically disengages when the nose
wheel clears the ground. Brakes arc hydraulically actuated through the
rudder pedal tips.
The cabin may be accessed through the door under the left wing and the
forward right-side crew door. The aft baggage compartment is accessed
through the rear door on the right side of the fuselage.
DATE: MAY7,2002 7-1

The crew door also functions as an emergency exit, and is equipped with a
solenoid operated locking plunger that prevents the door from opening while
the right-hand engine is running and the propeller is turning.
Two different seating arrangements arc available: "Club" seating with

the two middle scats facing aft, and the "Commuter" arrangement with all
seats facing forward.
Alternatively, with all but the pilot's scats removed, the resulting large
floor-space is available for the carriage of freight.
A photogrammetric hatch is available as an optional feature; it is

actuated by a hand wheel located on the floor close to the hatch.
To give the aircraft a continuous metal surface, lightning strike bonding

is fitted between fibreglass and metal components.
Static wicks arc installed on the wing and tailplane trailing edges to
clear the aircraft ofsurface st~tic electricity that could disrupt low frequency
radio reception or otherwise cause VHF interference.
7.3 POWERPLANT
The P68C is powered by two Lycoming 10-360-A I 86 engines, which

are air-cooled, four cylinder, normally aspirated fuel-injected units with
direct propeller drive. Rated power is 200 HP at 2700 RPM at sea level.
Each engine is enclosed in cowlings consisting of two side panels,

upper, lower, and nose sections, and two side fillets. Baffles arc fitted to
direct cooling ai r through the engine compartment.
The Dual Ignition system comprises two mechanically driven magnetos,

a shielded wiring harness, and spark-plugs.
Fuel injection is ensured by an engine driven fuel pump that feeds the
servo fuel injector, located in the manifold behind the alternate air box. The
servo fuel injector senses the air in the manifold, compares it to external
static air pressure, and then sends fuel at the correct pressure to the
distributor, and then to a fue l nozzle in the air intake close to the cylinders.
Air is fed through the manifold ducting after being filtered. An alternate air
system is also fitted between the filter and the manifold intake to prevent ice
build-up.
7-2 DA TE: MAY 7, 2002

The engine lubrication system consists of a wet sump, engine driven oil
pump, an oil filter and an oil cooler.
Engines drive Hartzell two bladed, constant speed, fully feathering

metal propellers.
Propeller speed is maintained constant by a governor that controls the

engine oil pressure being fed to the pitch change mechanism.
7.4 ENGINE CONTROLS (Refer to fig. 7-1)
The engines and propellers arc operated by three sets of control levers
mounted on the control pedestal below and at the centre of the instrument
panel. Controls are (from left to right): power levers, propeller speed levers
and mixture control levers. Control lever friction is adjusted by a friction
wheel located on the right side of the control pedestal. Friction should be set
for smooth but not loose control lever movement. To increase friction, rotate
the wheel clockwise, to decrease friction rotate the wheel counterclockwise.
The alternate air controls are located on the instrument panel.
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 7-3

I
OVERHEAD PANEL FUEL SELECTOR
CONTROL HANDLES
COPILOT'S
CONTROL WHEEL
Figure 7-1
COCK.PIT INSTALLATION
7-4 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

7.5 FLIGHT CONTROLS (Refer to Fig. 7.1)

Flight controls are of a conventional type, operated by dual control
wheels and rudder pedals.
The horizontal tail is entirely mobile (stabilator).
The control wheel operates the ailerons and the stabilator.
The rudder pedals operate the rudder and the nose wheel steering.
A typical contro l wheel incorporates switches associated with autopilot

operation, electrical trim and communications.
Secondary controls arc provided by the stabilator and rudder trim tabs.
Stabilator trim is operated by a wheel, located on the left side of the

control pedestal, which turns a chain sprocket. The rudder trim wheel is
located on the aft of the control pedestal.
An indicator showing trim tab position is mounted close to each trim

control wheel.
The flaps, one on each wing, are operated by an electric motor mounted
in the right wing box. This motor is connected to a drive pulley which
operates the right w ing flap through a push-pull rod, and the left wing drive
pulley through cables. The left wing flap is connected to this pulley by a
push-pull rod.
Electrical up and down limit switches are provided to safeguard against

overtravel.
Flap opera tion is controlled by a switch mounted on the lower part of

the pedestal, while flap position is mechanically/electrically trasmitted to the
indicator located next to this switch.
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 7-5

Section 7 vulcanair5:=
7.6 LANDING GEAR
The P68C is equipped with a fixed tricycle landing gear.
A tapered spring steel leg supports each main wheel, while the nose
wheel is mounted on an air-oil shock strut. The nose wheel is steerable
through the rudder pedals, and incorporates a trailing-link and sector
mechanism which disconnects the nose gear from the rudder and centres the
wheel as soon as it clears the ground.
The main wheels arc equipped with 7.00-6/8 ply tires and with single
hydraulic disc-brake assemblies.
The standard nose wheel mounts a 5.00-5/6 ply tire, or an optional

6.00-6/8 ply tire may be installed.
A fluid filled shimmy-damper is prov~<lt:d to minimize nose wheel

oscillation.
7.7 BRAKE SYSTEM (Refer to Fig. 7.2)

The brakes arc hydraulically operated by individual hydraulic brake
cylinders mounted on the rudder pedals. To operate the brakes, apply toe
pressure against the top of the rudder pedals.
The parking brake consists of a manually operated knob assembly

connected to the parking brake valve. When pressure is applied to the brake
system and the parking brake knob is pulled, the valve holds the pressure on
the brake assemblies until released. Push the knob to release the parking
brake.
Hydraulic fluid for the brake cylinders is contained in a remote reservoir

located in the nose compartment, accessible through the inspection panels.
7-6 DATE: MAY7,2002

A.f: M. PIN N ORJ0. 707-18
LH RUDDER PEDAL
(TYPICAL)
REMOTE RESERVOIR
(NOSE COMPARTMENT)
LH BRAKE
... CYLIP4QER
COPILOT
LEFT BRAKE CYLINDER
/
RIGHT BRAKE C YLINDERS
/iGt==- ____.. FWD
PILOT
LEFT BRAKE CYLINDER
PARKING
BRAKE VALVE
PARK ING BRAKE

COtlTROL
BRAKEASSY BRAKE ASS Y
Figure 7-2
BRAKE SYSTEM
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 7-7

11.F.M. PINNOH/0.707- IH
Section 7 vulcanair ci
7.8 FUEL SYSTEM (Refer to Fig. 7.3A; 7-38; 7-4; 7-5)

Two configurations are provided:
- STD Range Configuration
- Long Range Configuration
STD Range Configuration
Fuel is stored in two integral wing tanks (one in each wing), formed by
the front and rear wing spars and two close-out ribs. Total wing tank fuel
capacity is 538 It (142 U.S.G.) of which 520 It (137 U.S.G .) is usable.
Long Range Configuration
Fuel is stored in four integral wing tanks (two in each wing), formed by
the front and rear wing spars and four close-out ribs. The two tanks in each
wing are interconnected by two large diameter metal ducts. A check valve
is provided to control the fuel flow between the two tanks. Total wing tank
fuel capacity is 696 It (184 U.S.G.) of which 670 It (1 77 U.S.G.) is usable.
lfless than full capacity in either range configuration is embarked, fuel

should be equally distributed between each wing tank.
Access panels are provided in the upper surface of the tanks. A normal
filler opening with a quick-release cap is provided in the top wing skin.
Safety Precautions while Fuelling
- With a ground wire, make an equipotential connection

between the tanker and muffler tube protruding from the
engine cow lings of the aircraft.
- Ensure that no avionics or electrical equipment on the
aircraft is in operation during fuelliflg.
- Do not smoke or use a naked flame in the vicinity of the
aircraft while fuelling.
- Ensure that fire fighting equipment is readily available
during fuelling operations.
Each tank is vented overboard.at its outboard end by means ofa primary
vent line incorporating a vent valve.
Rev. 11
7-8 DATE: AUGUST 31, 2004
A.F.M. PIN NOR/0.707-18
For the STD Range Configuration, two fuel drain valves (one in each
wing) are located in the tank sumps, while for the Long Range
Configuration, two extra drain valves, one in each wing, are provided on
the lower wing surfaces under the external tanks.
Fuel drain valves for both fuel Ii lters are located on the outboard lower
engine eowlings.
To avoid accumulation of water and sediment, the fuel tank sumps and
strainers should be dra ined prior to the first flight of the day, and after
re fueling.
An independent fuel system for each wing permits the relative engine
to operate from its own supply. Both systems, however, are interconnected
by a Cross-Feed line which allows both engines to draw fuel from the same
tank if necessary.
Fuel operations are controlled by fuel selector handles located on the

cabin overhead panel. Movement of these handles is trasmitted by telefiex
cables to the fuel selector valves mounted in the w;ng leading edge,
outboard of the engine nacelles.
Fuel quantity is measured by a capacitive probe mounted diagonally

within each wing tank, and is monitored via a dual-scale LCD indicator on
the instrument pane l.
For aircraft embodying the change No. MOD.P68/68 or Service Bulletin

No. 127, the fuel quantity is me<1sured by a float arm transmitter installed on
the front spar of each wing and is monitored via a dual analog indicator
installed on the instrument panel.
Fue l Flow and Fuel Pressure readings for each engine are presented on
a dedicated VM I 000 integrated engine display.
Fuel is drawn through a strainer in the fuel tank sump to a selector

valve. It then passes through a fue l filter to the auxiliary fue l pump, and into
the engine driven fuel pump which forces the fuel to the engine servo fuel
injector.
Rev. 11
DATE: AUGUST 31 , 2004 7-9
-
-.l
c
I
TOTAL FUEL CAPACITY: 142 U.S. gals (538 It)
RUSA.t.A --i
len
-< en
en
C':> :..
:...
C':> ...
-3 -· ...
- ,..
RIGHT FUEL TANK
r-- -U1£1-: INDICATOR LEFT FUfl TJ..NK ,~ = <::~:..
~
(7t U.S. Gals)

~ lt;;-i (7~U.S. g:61~!._
I II ~
en
-.l
~
fUEl flU.ER CAP _J -r---r-- . I I FUEL Fll...l!:R CAP I I I I~

en "
~
;;;
,,..
~
()
~
.,,C!-3
(/)
-l "Tl
9 c TAHK5UW,
· STRAIN.ER
;:o rn DRAJN YALVE
>r (!;i
FUEL SEl.ECfOR YALVf.
~
02
z~ NORMAL.ON NORMALON
a[Tl (/)
.....l -·
"Tl RIGHT £ HGIHE
C'tUHOER f.io. l CROSSrEED .t!) (9i CROSSFEEO
------
() tn:::
0 3:: ~
• (1Q
ENG. SHUT OfF '.@ G ENG.SHUTOFF
z (/) -.l
"Tl () 0.,
LffTVIGU.:E
C'fUHOE.R No, J
Ci :r: )>
&US BAA
~~ ~-~
c rn sv.t'ICH IUl!AKERr
;:o 3:: ~--· ,,, A
)> )>
-l ...., "-"t<UNC&ATOR
T
12:JAHKUNCV.TOR
u
0
>
on
z aus BAR
BREJ.XER
LIGHT UGHT
c<
~"~
-3
'
r:i
~
>
-<
FUEL PRESS.
Tlt.UiSOUCEA
TRAHJOOCe.R
CPU
ECtOO :
----·- I
LEGEND
DATA PROCESSING UNfT
DATA RECORDER
0
Q,)
:::l
;-l
N
c
VIUOOO :
(9 :
DISPLAY (MAHIFCK..0 PRESSURE. FUEL PRESSURE.
FUEL FLOY/)
FUEL SELECTOR VALVE PLUGGED LINES

.,,
e-
n:>
:::::;;·
c
N
00
() 1!
0 ~
> 00 ~
....,
~
TOTAL FUEL CAPACITY: 184 U.S. gals (696 It)
~ BUS LUI
°'
(j
n
Q)
~-..
3::
> RJGKT FUEL TAHK
(92 U.S. G<11b.
::I
-< BREJ.KfA
OJ
;-.I vtHf IHl!RCONK!CT'IOH
N
<:> r
fVEL n.L.fR CAJI'
vt~'-L~~ - L3 A
~ -
!
VEHTFLOAf
VA.LYE
UHE
f\lfl. fl.LfJI CAP
am
<:>
N
0
z 'Tl ~ ~ - sr~~~,
oC tT1
S: r OJUJNVAlVE
z~
0 (/)
tT1 -l o'Q'
(") tT1 c:
o~~
z (/)
'Tl (")
'Tl
-..J
°'w
~~~r r-r
RtG"1' E'4GIHE
~
"'""'
~
hCUlW.A.LON
CROUf'UO
l!NO.SH:UTO,F
0~ tT1
::i:: IUSSAR
c~ ........ 00
s: > -<
IWITCH
-
-l -l
.....
0 (")
z
-
AHNUNClAlOR •
l>GKT •
&;
~
~
3::
00
0
t!rl
00
(j
LEGEND
OPU DATA PROCES~HG UNrT :;i::l 00
EC100
VM1000
DATA RECOftOEJI
04SPL.AY (MANIFOLD PRESSURE, FUE.L PRESSURE,
-~
"l:i n
...., Q'.
..... FUELFl.OW)
-I FUEL SELECTOR \IA.LYE PLUGGED LINES

-o
O=
2 .....
-
--.J
I
:.:
TOTAL FUEL CAPACllY· H2 U.S. G>ls 1Sl8 111) rJJ rJJ ?-
-< g..... :::>:
(/}
...., -·.
~§~
l
R:GttT fUEl TAUK lEf'T H 1 El TANK
(71 U.S . GollS) (71 U.S. g.ll ~) ::: --.J <
..-.
'Tl rJJ ~
..,0 0 ...
~
~ ~
:::. -1--7:;~::.:;::.,j*"'tE!tt'FlOU rJJ "'
~
;::: 'loU'."t: (j
.., rJJ ~
~ -l 'Tl
;:::> c:
..., t:;
0 ~ 0 U!,(SJU? TA'li<SIJW" -l
3 ~ I:""
.., '=' ~
OftAIN VAL'.'( FU.El..SE...fC1~\'A~\E.
CIUIN\'Al'·'l
0
rJJ
~ 0
.., Q.
rJJ
-< t, OIUJ.Al.O!: ~ P"\> I i:eJ UOR'.t.:.l OH
2
~. '< 0 rJJ 'Tl 00 ..rEna N'.E
(...,,,.
~ (Si
~
C\OUFU:D
:i :;· ...., ciQ' C'I UJtCER !..>. )
1.U.,~1.~
LJ
cqos.!FEEO
ci:i~ (j ~ = TR:.OISOOCER
E.'fG..SHUTO'F i@ G E.U G SHUT Of'.'F
= ;.o::~
=~ zrJJ--.l
~ ,., 'Tl"" l. L EFTEl~l>E
-·=~o:c...-
=- - ') . ,., _ C'fUJ'.o£RNo> l
z = c: ~ 8.1'..~'.X.!11:
? ~ ~:::
$WfTCH
-z>> "'-i i;:

0
>
N 0....,....,
....J. ,..... ~
~'Cl.ATC~
I ._,.~GHT
.....
-l .._,SO<'i
r!l!l
oz
SUS 8'~
~ .., <
c:
2 o•
I:""
=-o ff
-< °'~ ~
~~
~ t') °'
~
OPU
LE GEND
DATA PROCESSl'IG UNIT -0 ro_
N < VinlO>O DISPLA'f rMMFOLO PiUSSURE, FUEL P~SSURE.
0
0
.
- ( S1
FUEL FLO'o'/I
FUEL SEL.EC TOJIVALVE PLUGGED Ut.'ES

°'~ 'am
"'" 0
0 :::0
> ~
TOTAL FUEL CAPACITY: 184 U 5 GJ ls [696 Its)
"C <
-3 ~
I USUR
~c::
~
M
OR EAKER n(')-
= RIGHT FUEL TM~K LEFT FUEL TAf\K
Q)
2C""' (92 U. S. G31s) 192 U.S. 9ol•I
::s
< ~
"'I
\ E·•r IHTE-~:0tu1Ec•.c. 11
LOIE
• 'IC.Hff\.o.tT FL'Ei.U'."f\. u:>.
=
Y'
:.i
:::;·
q C""'
n.€.1. AU~ CAet
r-45-
' YJ.L'IE SEHSOR -;
all
.,,.=
N
0 <:
= :.i
:::;!
o~,-.C::
3 ... ,
2 ~
lAHKSUL\1 TAt.~ 51.J!.IJt
::r:: .
"'I [!fl 01\All~ y,\ LVC C".AUl'.'AL\ll '
cs
r uEL S(~ C fO~ \/.\~VE
~ r::r ;i:l r'

~&_>en MlRVAl..O'l If!) UORIAA1..0'il ~
< G
ii: '<:;· 02 en ~
-·
TaRr C~OS!FEEO ~
l5J
tt.~ENCA(t
~LAOdLJi
c::•:>HffE::I
e'O r.l ~ -3 rr.i· ~:~~· £,~SHJfOrf" 6:: G
=- n~ =
EttG SHUT elf
~;o~ri Tft,At.$,.!cltfr:S
::;g.:zen---1 u n £'NIM£
= :.i ~ n ~ 11..S GA"
CTt..tCIE.ANo 3
en
:z= 25:te::i
? ~~[!fl oquKER $ .'.. TCH
""""~
-11'~1~~~J~ .
svmc" <
en
- 2 ;i:l ~ -3
!j 0 > > y u. ·.~~;roq ~
'-' • -3 -3
~--
L__ ::
en
oOn llllJS 8;.11:
D•..,.<.. o
?-
:ii
~2 ~ ~
":I
°'
~
u" ...c:J--
en
n ~
:c:
C! en~
°'
00 LEGE'ID "C ~ ::.:.
-·~;:;"
...-3og~
-
OP\J : 04TA PROCESSINGurm
---! Vnl10i01t : DISPLAY 1t.lANIFOLO PRESSURE. FUEL FRESSURE.
I
r uEL ncv.1
r::r G: fUELSEl.ECTORVALVE PLUGGED LINES

2---l ~
-
-l
N
I LEFT FUEL CONTROL LINE I I RIGHT FUEL CONTROL LINE I 00 00
-<
rn ~
..., o·
~
;===]
FUEL CONTROL RECEIVER FUEL CONTROL RECEIVER
~=
rci D] "''
,·-.:---n. CABLE GUARD ~ -l
~.Jr r _I.
CASLEGUARD •.. :-
.
, . u...:o-=.""'
~
~·-~·- LJ i :~
GUIDE TUBE
- - ·-.... "-" ·-......,
00
0
~
T.~·
'Tl
00
c FUEL CONTROL
Fl.EXJBLE. CABLE
LUBRJCATION ATTING
c
:::J LUBRJC4TION FITTING FUEL CONTROL
FLEXIBLE CABLE
(J
m
r F\JEL SELECTOR VAi.VE FUEL SELECTOR VALVE ·-,_,,, ~
(J "Cl
0 NORMAL ON NORMAL ON :::l
z J .L
-i 0
2
;;i::i
0
CROSSFEEO
r ~.> OPEN LINES
FUEL CONTROL HAHOLE
OPEN LINES <
L
CROSSFEEO
r 'Tl ENG. SHUT OFF L ..J ENG. SHUT OFF

(/)~·
.··
-<
(/) (')
~
-i -l
m'
3: .j>.
(/) FUEL COHTROL TRANSMJTTER F\JEL CONTROL TRAHSM.ITTER
g STOP T\JBf
F\JEL SELECTOR Pl.A.CARO
S10P TUBE
m
0
> ~-i
-l
t:1 ()
<
c:
~ f)
> ~
-< :J
~-l "Cl CD
N
=
=
N
STD. RANGE CONFIGURATION
TOTAL USABLE FUEL: 137 U.S. gals (520 It)
LONG RANGE CONFIGURATION
TOTAL USABLE FUEL: 177 U.S. gals (670 It)
""oo a\D
'
Ci •iU
FUEL CONTROL
FLEXIBLE CABLE
FUEL CONTROL' STOP TUBE

TRANSMITTER
FUEL SELECTOR
PLACARO
FUEL CONTROL
HANDLE
~ - WASHER
@ LOCK WASHER
n_ BOLT
E3
Figure 7-5
FUEL CONTROL TRANSM ITTER
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 7-1 3

Section 7 vuicanair~
7.9 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

(Refer to Fig. 7-6; 7-7; 7-8; 7-9)
The aircraft system is powered by two 130 A alternators.
A 24 volt, 24 A/h battery provides for engine starting and as a reserve

power source in case of alternator power loss; it is located in the fuselage
ta;l-cone, aft of the baggage compartment.
Two volta.ge regulators maintain effective alternator load sharing while

regulating the system bus voltage at 27 .5 +/- 0.5 volts.
Two overvoltage re lays, one for each alternator circuit, are also
incorporated in the system to prevent damage to a ll electrical loads in case
of regulator failure.
Both the voltage regulators and the overvoltage relays are located in the
tail-cone near the battery; they are accessible through the removable panel
in the close-out panel.
A low voltage unit is installed to indicate a bus-bar voltage equal to, or

less than, the batt;;:ry voltage.
The electrical system is controlled by three switches, located on the

pilot's left side panel, labeled LH FIELD, MASTER, RH Fl ELD. They may
be switched off simultaneously by a gang bar.
Avionic systems power is controlled by one switch, labeled

" A YIONICS" located on the pilot's left side panel.
The electrical system may be monitored through the YM I000 volt and
amp indicators.
Switches and circuit breakers (of the push-to-reset type) are located on
the pilot's left side panel.
Lighting includes standard navigation lights, landing/taxi lights on the

lett wing leading edge, one tail anti-collision light and two wing anti-
collision lights (one in each wing)
Cabin lighting consists of four reading lights. each with its own switch.
Cockpit lighting consists of various indicator lights, instrument panel
7-14 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

vulcanaire:i Section 7
lighting and one map light. The latter is connected directly to the battery,
just after the battery relay.
Two underwing courtesy lights (one in each wing) are located inboard
of the engine nacelles, to illuminate the area around the cabin, the e ntrance
door and the landing gear.
Also located on the pilot's left side panel is the VHF COM emergency
switch. When moved to the " Batte1y" position, the pilot is able to maintain
radio communications in case of electrical system failure. The loudspeaker
is inoperative in this configuration, so a headset must be worn.
An optional wing ice inspection light may be installed in the left

outboard nacelle.
Other electrical systems include pitot heat, a stall warning horn, and
dimming rheostat switches to control instrument panel lighting.
Two auxiliary power sockets rated at 28Vdc 2A (max) arc provided.

One socket is located in the cockpit area, and another serves the passenger
compartment.
An automatically activated Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) is

installed aboard the ai rcraft. The transmitter unit is mounted on the baggage
compartment left wall, forward of the aft bulkhead, and the antenna is
mounted on the cabin roof between frames 11 and 12. A remote switch with
a warning light is installed on the instrument panel. Weight and Balance
information for the ELT and its antenna is included in Section 6 (Para 6.5,
Equipment List - Items F20 and F2 l ).
Although the ELT is designed to activate automatically in the event of
an impact exceeding 2. 7G at 4 fps, the transmitter may also be manually
activated by either the header switch on the transmitter body, or via the
remote switch on the instrument panel. For detailed technical and operating
information, refer to the latest revision of the NA RCO ELT 9 10 Owner's
Manual and Pilot's Guide, PIN 03794-062 1.
WH ENACTIVATED, THEELTTRANSMITSASWEEP TONEONTHE

GUARD FREQUENCIES 121.5AND243.0MHz. TAKE PRECAUTIONS
TO A VOID INADVERTENT TRANSMITTER ACTIV A TlON AND
CONSEQUENT TRIGGERINGOF A FALSE ALARM. REFER TO PARA
2.1.4 OF TH E LA TEST REVISION OF THE AFOREMENTIONED
PILOT'S GUIDE FOR RELATIVE CHECK AND RESET PROCEDURES
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 7-15

Section 7 vulcanair=::i
SYSTEMS DESC RIPTION P68C
ENGINE STARTER LIGHT
--~~~~!-... _\.i.-~~~-
rJ ~1
fiEJ ~1
r~
1\£1
n.1
~I
nn,
LJ t:J
n.n.
lJ CJ
J
OVERHEAD PAii EL
ROTARY LH FIELD BATTERY RH FIE.LO OE'·ICE AVIONICS

011.11\.'IERS S\\1TCH MASTER SW1TCH S\MTCH HOURMETER M.V.tETER MASTER swnc ...
'
Figure. 7-6
OVERHEAD and BREAKER PANEL
7-16 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

vulcanairS: Section 7
28 30 22 23 31 26 27 24 29
1 AIRSPEED INDICATOR 17 Kl 209 VOR/LOC/ILS
2 Kl 256 FLIGHT COMMAND INDICATOR 18 SUCTION GAUGE
3 KEA 130 ENCODING ALTIMETER 19 KA 51B SLAVE CONTROL
4 Kl 525A HSI (DIRECTIONAL GYRO) 20 ELT REMOTE SWITCH
5 VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR 21 GNS 430 COM/NAV/ILSIGSIGPS
6 Kl 229 RADIO MAGNETIC INDICATOR 22 GMA 340 AUDIO PANEL & MARKER
7 VM1000 ENGINE DISPLAYS 23 GTX 320 TRANSPONDER
8 EC100 CHECK & ADVISORY SYSTEM 24 KC 192 AUTOPILOT COMPUTER
9 TURN AND BANK INDICATOR 25 RDR 2000 WEATHER RADAR
10 FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR 26 KR 87 ADF
11 DVR300i DIGITAL RECORDER CLOCK 27 KN 62A DME
12 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL 28 PARKING BRAKE
13 KRA 10 RADAR ALTIMETER 29 ALT AIR HANDLES
14 2"" AIRSPEED INDICATOR 30 FLAP POSITION INDICATOR
15 2' " ATTITUDE INDICATOR 31 INSTRUMENT SWITCHES
16 2"" SENSITIVE ALTIMETER 32 OUTSIDE I CABIN AIR TEMP. GAUGE
Figure. 7-7
INSTRUMENTS
DATE: MAY7,2002 7-17

1. A IRSPEED INDICATOR 17. KRA 10 RADAR ALTIMETER

2. Kl 256 FLIGHT COMMAND INDICATOR 18. SUCTION GAUGE
3. KEA 130 ENCODING ALTIMETER 19. KA 51 B SLAVE CONTROL
4. Kl 525A HSI (DIRECTIONAL GYRO) 20. E.L.T. REMOTE SWITCH
5. V ERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR 21. GMA 340 AUDIO PANEL & MARKER
6. Kl 229 RADIO MAGNETIC INDICATOR 22. GNS 530 COM/NAV/ILS/GS/GPS
7. VM1000 ENGINE DISPLAYS 23. GNS 430 COM/NAV/ILS/GS/GPS
8. EC'I 00 CHECK & ADVISORY SYSTEM 24. KC 192AUTOPILOT COMPUTER
9. TURN & BANK INDICATOR 25. GTX 330 TRANSPONDER
10. FUEL LEV EL INDICATOR 26. KR 87 ADF
11. DVR300i DIGITAL RECORDER CLOCK 27. RDR 2000 W EATHER RADAR
12. ANNUNCIATOR PANEL 28. KCU 951 CONTROL DISPLAY (HF)
13. KOi 572 DME INDICATOR 29. FLAP POSITION INDICATOR
14. Kl 209 VOR/LOC/ILS 30. OUTSIDE/CABIN AIR TEMP. GAUGE
15. 2nd ATTITUDE INDICATOR 31. MAGNETIC COMPASS
16. 2nd SEN SITIVE ALTIMETER
Figure 7-7
INSTRUMENT PANEL
(App licable only for aircraft S/N 416)
7-17a D.-\TE: DECEMBER 16, 2002

A.l ·:M. P/NNORJ0. 707-18
vulcanair=: Section 7
P68C SYSTEMS DESC RIPTION
26
1. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 13. 2nd TURN & BANK INDICATOR

2. ATIITUDE GYRO INDICATOR 14. 2nd A IRSPEED INDICATOR
3. S ENSITIVE OR ENCODING 15. 2nd ATTITUDE G YRO INDICATOR
A LTIMETER 16. 2nd S ENSIT IVE ALTIMETER
4. DIRECTIONAL GYRO IN DICATOR 17. 2nd DIRECTIONAL GYRO INDICATOR
s. RATE OF CLIMB INDICATOR 18. 2nd RATE OF CLIMB INDICATOR
6. RMI OR DME INDICATOR 19. ILSNOR INDICATOR
i. ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYST EM 20. SUCTION GAUGE
DISPLAYS 2 1 SLAVING ACCESSORY
8. ENGINE MANAGEMENT CHECKS. 22. E.L.T. REMOTE SWITCH
ADV ISORY SYSTEM 23. FLAP POSITION IN DICATOR
9. TURN & BANK INDICATOR 24. OUTS IDE/CABIN AIR TEMP. GAUGE
10. FUEL LEVEL IN DI CATOR 25. MAGNETIC COMPASS
11. CHRONOM ETER 26. RADIO RACK
12. ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
Figure 7-7
INSTRUMENT PANEL
(/\pplicablc for aircraft incorporating the change No. MOD.P68/65)
Rcv.6
DATE: MA RCH 23, 2004 7- l7b
A.f: M. PINNORIO.i07-18
Section 7 vulcanair GI
SYSTEMS DESCRIPT ION P68C
11
1
=G®G®
0
ffi 8 G0G
8ffi.[Js
r:'<.. ·O·®
u 0
[J
S000
·O· P
}}:_J
0 0
0 0 0
1. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 15. OAT/CAT INDICATOR

2. ATTITUDE GYRO INDICATOR 16 2nd AIRSPEED INDICATOR
3. ALTIMETER or ENCOOING (OPTIONAL)
ALTIME TER 17. 2nd ATTITUDE GYRO INDICATOR
4. TURN & BANK INDICATOR (OPTIONAL)
5. DIRECTIONAL GYRO INDICATOR 18. 2nd SENSITIVE ALTIMETER
or HSI (OPTIONAL)
6 RATE OF CLIMB INDICATOR 19 2nd TURN & BANK INDICATOR
7. ADF or RMI INDICATOR (OPTIONAL)
(OPTIONAL) 20 2nd DIRECTIONAL GYRO INDICATOR
8 CHRONOMETER INDICATOR (OPTIONAL)
9 FLAP POSITION INDICATOR 21 2nd RATE OF CLIMB INDICATOR
10. SLAVING ACCESSORY (OPTIONAL)
11 . ANNUNCIATOR PANEL 22. VORILOC/GS INDICATOR
12. ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23. E.L.T. REMOTE SWITCH
DISPLAYS 24. MAGNETIC COMPASS
13 SUCTION GAUGE 25 RADIO RACK
14. FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR
Figure 7-7
INSTRUMENT PANEL
(Applicable for aircrafl incorporaling the change No. MOD.P68/69)
Rev. 11
7- 17c DATE: AUGUST 31, 2004
, l.F.M. PIN NORI0. 70 7-1/J
Section 7 vulcanair a
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
-- 1
3
LH RH
/\LT /\LT
OUT OUT '
LH RH
FUEL FUEL
PUMP f-'UMP
LOW SURr'
VOI T 11Flr.F I
I
NOT NOT
USED USED
ANNUNCIATIONS
P~CARD~
PUSH-TO-TEST
BUTTON
I ,
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Figure. 7-8
ANNUNCIATOR PANE L
7-18 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

A.F./lf. PIN NORI0.707-IB
•••
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Figure 7-8
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
(/\pplicahlc for aircrafi incorporating the change~ No. MOD. P6X/69)
Rev. 11
DATE: AUGUST 31 , 2004 7- 18a
A .f '.111. PIN NOH/0.70 7-18
Section 7 vulcanair •
L FUEL R FUEL SURFACE

PUMP PUMP OE~CE
LALT RALT LOW

OUT OUT VOLT
PLACARD
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Figure 7-8
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
(Applicable for aircraft incorporating the changes No. MOD.P68/5 I
and No. MO D.P68/69)
Rev. 11
7-18b DATE: AUGUST 31, 2004
IH\.Ti[Fi' r
fl:"'<ft-1 f:'>
) ~11 ..1 1
r·J=r-:,..,n: )
T•" HF
~
•,;... 1:1
:,1.u.1- HI ~.1:. P 1 ll1l l T

"': A".• t.CTE~
I "1.0:I rt ~1.:.f•+
i;IElD ~ :.IT C,..
LEFT f'(!GtlT
(), l l,', •! llr.(.j t - - - - L J. . . ,___,__ __, ••'.'t -1>.ht ,, (, ~
rt:t..~ . rcu.-.
111 :.t Tr-r.>·1 ~ T 't:-
Figure 7-9
POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATIC
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 7-19

7.10 EXTERNAL POWER

An external power receptacle, located on the right side of the fuselage
tail-cone, allows an external auxiliary power source to be connected.
NOTE
Any external power source used for engine starting
should have a minimum capacity of300 Amps at 28
Volts D.C.
Before connecting the external power unit, make
sure that the battery and alternator switches arc in
the off position.
7.11 INSTRUMENT PANEL (Refer to Fig. 7-7)

The instrument panel is designed to accommodate engine displays and
required VFR and IFR flight instruments.
The gyro instruments are e lectrically driven, except for the artificial
horizon which is vacuum driven.
Radio navigation and communication apparatus arc located in the center

area of the instrument panel.
Pilot and copilot microphone and headphone jacks arc provided on the
top surface of the cockpit wall trim panels. A Digita l Voice Recorder Clock
is incorporated in the audio path, which, in addition to chronometer and
clock functions, digitally records all incoming radio communications on a
continuous loop. The clock also features audio checklists, a periodic alarm,
and manual recording and playback of messages, as well as an elapsed timer
and pseudo-Hobbs meter. Refer to the latest revision of the Flightcom DVR
300i Operations and Installation Manual for detailed information.
The flap control switch and position indicator are located on the
instrument panel.
Fuel pump switches, magneto switches and starter buttons arc installed
on the cockpit overhead panel. A magnetic compass is installed on the
windshield divider.
7-20 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

A.F.M. P/N N OR/0. 707-1/J
7.12 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL (Refer to Fig. 7-8)

The annunciator panel is located on the top of the instrument panel; it
includes alternator amber lights, low voltage red light, fuel pump and
I
surface de-icer green light.
7.13 ST ALL WARNING

The stall warning system consists of a high incidence sensor installed
on the right wing leading edge, and a horn located near the loudspeaker over
the pilot's head.
The system can be checked on the ground by switching the battery on

and by moving the wing sensor vane upwards.
NOTE
If the ba ttery is switched off in flight, the stall
warning system becomes inoperative.
7.14 CABIN AIR SYSTEM

Cabin air is provided by two separate systems; a cabin forced air
heating/windshield defrosting system and a ventilation system.
The forced heated air for the cabin and defroster is obtai ned from two
fan heaters (refer to supplement E/2)
Fresh air is supplied to the cabin through several hole located in the
center of the cabin ceiling.
The fresh air is produced by a blower, which is constituted by a motor

and a blower wheel assembly and is installed on the shelflocated behind the
baggage compartment rear bulkhead. This system can be replaced by an
optional air conditioni ng system. When installed, the air conditioning
system is mounted on this same sheIf (see Supplement Gil).
Rev. 11
DATE: AUGUST 31 , 2004 7-21
il.J-: M. PIN NORI0.707-IH
Section 7 vulcanairt;i
7.15 BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT

Located in the rear of the cabin and accessible through the door on the
right side of the fuselage, it features a reinforced floor that can resist up to
200 lb/sq. ft. Four cargo belt lash-down points are provided.
7.16 PITOT/STATIC SYSTEM (Refer to Fig. 7-10)

The pitot/static system supplies static air pressure to altimeter and rate
of climb indicator, and both dynamic and static air pressure to the airspeed
indicator.
The standard pitot tube for dynamic pressure pick-up is mounted on the
left side of the fuselage nose, while the static source pick-ups are located on
both sides of the rear fuselage.
An alternate static source pick-up is located in the cabin on the left side
of the control pedestal.
An electrical heating element is installed within the pitot tube to prevent

ice obstruction during severe weather conditions.
An optional second pitot tube may be installed on the right side of the
fuselage nose.
7-22 DATE: MAY7,2002

vulcanairi::; Section 7
f~c::=:::==ST=A~TI~C: C:PO=R=•>~
2nd. (~~~~~~~~i~ OF CL IMB lNOICATOr.
2nd. AI RSPEE D INDI CATOR ALTIMETER

(OPT IONA<. )
INOICA'.:"OR
1<: : : / ,,._. _ !l
"r-~ 'r - -~?
~-)
(\fl
:
I
:I
II J .. '-ir-'
:: H=-=="i:===
11"'fr
1
"
!-..: 1 1::: :."::..=.:!:~~--==
....
II 11
II
..
:!
:..":-..=..---":...:
~l=.;:;=--,1
II
II
11
(I
II
,.
1•
1:
,~----"': ::
'I
! ,---/•::~J
I I
I I
~''o' ( O?TION At.I

'"'' l\LTERNl\TE SOURCE
ANO DRAIN VALVE
Pl T OT 7Uli::'.~
Figure 7- 10
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
DATE: MAY 7, 2002 7-23

Section 7 vulcanairs:i
7.17 VACUUM SYSTEM (Refer to Fig. 7-l l)

Suction for the gyro instruments is provided by an engine-driven dry air
pump system consisting of two vacuum pumps, two relief valves, a check
and manifold valve, a central filter, a suction gauge, and all necessary lines
and hoses.
The suction relief valve controls and regulates gyro system pressure to
between 4.5 and 5.2 inches of mercury.
The gauge, which is installed on the instrument panel, has two red
malfunction indicator flags.
-:-~~~VACUU M PUMP~~......,.-
-=-~~~-RELIE F VALVE~~~-'-
D IRECT~ [HORIZO~TALJ.Y"""GYRO PRESSURE

G'D GYRO/II ANO WORC< l'D<CATO•
CHECK VA LVE
AND VACUUM
MANIFOLD
VACUUM
AIR FILTER
Figure 7- 11
VACUUM SYSTEM SCH EMATIC
7-24 DATE: MAY 7, 2002

.11·.11 l'.\ ,\0Jll071i-lll
vulcan~r .,. Scclion 8
1'68C SUl'f'LEMENT E/3
SUPPLEMENT E/3
W INDSlllELD DEFROSTING SYSTEM

(As per change MOD. P68n l)
This supplcmcrll must be ;iltachcd lo the ENAC Appro\•cd ,\1rcrafl

f-lighl M:urnal w hen the :111cr;1ft 1s equipped wllh a \Vmdslucld Defrost mg
System as per change: fl.100 J>68/7 I
The information cont:uncd hcrcm supplements 1hc basic appro\'cd
Aircr;1f1 FhJ>h l M;:1nual Fm linu1a11ons. procedu res and performance
information 1101 contamcd m this supplement co nsult the b:mc approved
:\11\:ran Fllghl Manu:\I \Vhcrc,·cr co110 ic1 :1nscs between 111forma11on m tlus
supplement :md the appro\'cd Flight Manual. the mformat1on lu.:rc111 must
take pn:ct:dcncc
The Windsh1clJ Defrosting System assun;s aJcqu:nc v1s1h1hty ~II all

or
tunes for safe opcrallon on gromu..l or m ll1£hl
Rt.•\', 15
DAT E: FEBIWAlff ! I. !1105 PaJ!c I uf7
.I f" J/ 1•r,.' ,\'0Hlt171~.Jll
Scclio n 8 vulc arn, · e1

SUPPLEM ENT E/3 1'68C
S ECTION 2 - LIM ITAT IONS

The \V111dsh1cld Dr.::frostmg System 1s 1101 JpprO\·cd for opcr;itmn durmg,
the following condition:
SINGLE GENERATOR Ol'ERATION
PL ACARDS
In Full V1cwOf1hc Pilot
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING
- OPERATIONAL LIMITS -
- OFF If single engine
Alternator failure occurs
Near Magnet ic Compass
M•gnotic Composs m•y dovi•tn

by more th•n 10" when Windshield
Defrosting Systom Is oporatlvo
On B1c~1kcr P:mcl
DEFROST c';;~D. HIGH
OFF -
-
WIND. -
DEFR. -
AIR
COND.
-
-
OFF 0
FAN OFF FAN LOW
H.c\'. IS
DATE: FEBRUARY ?I. ::?.UO:i
)'
, I f '.\I l't;\ XU/WI 7#7-111
vulcanrt.r":i S eclion S
1'68C SUPPLEMENT E/J
SECrlON 3 - EMERGENCY PROCEDUru:s
ENG INE O R GENERATO R FAILUR E E~I E RG ENCY

PROCEDURES
NOTE
In case of engine or gcncr;llor f;ulurc. the Wmdslucld
Ddiostmg System will automallc:illy lurn OFF.
Add the followrng steps before performing the procedure

a) WIND. DEFR -OFF-A C Swatch O FF
b) DEFROST-OFF- FAN Sw1tch OFF
SECrlON 4 - NORMAL PROCEDURES

PR~~FLIG llT Cll ECK 1.IST
Add !he followrng check
NOTE
EXTERNAL l'OWER UN IT CONNECTED
\ Vintls h il·hJ Oc fruslL•r Swi lt h

I Dcfroslmg mode
a) WIND DEFR-OFF-/\ C Swatch \\/IND DEFR
b) DEFl\OST-O FF-F/\N Sw1tch DEFKOST
Vcnlllatmg ~lode
a) WIND DEFR -OFF-A C Switch W IND DEFR
b) DEFROST-OFF-FAN Swatch FAN
n.l'\', 15
DATE: FEBRUA RY ? I, ?005 P:ii;r J o r 7
, I l-".ll l'f:\ ,\'()HJ07•..·fll
Seclion S vulcan:i 1 ~
SU PPL EM ENT E/3 P68C
NOTE
Verify proper operation of the DEFROST E R fan
heater by putting your h:md nc:u th1.· air outlets on
the.: ins lrumcnl panel CO\'cr In case of system
fodurc, switch O FF :md invcsttg:ltl."
BEFORE STAlffl NG ENGINE

:\dd lhc following steps before pcrforn11ng tJ1c procedure
a) WIND DEFR.-OFF-A C Sw11ch OFF
b) DEFROST-OFF- FAN Sw11ch OFF
CLl~IBICR U ISE/DESCENT
DEFROST AS REQUI RED
S ECT I ON ~ - PERFORMANCE
No ch.1ngcs lo lhc basic performance pro\'1ded by 1hc Secl1011 S of !he

Appro\'cd 1\11craft Flight Manual arc necessary for 1l11s supplement
SECTION 6 - WEIGHT ANO BALANCE
T iu.: 111sl:1llat1011 of the \VmdsluclJ Dcfrosltng System 1s hstcd as item

Fl 7 m the "1'68C Cqmpmcnl List" 1'/ N NOR 10 7 JtJ .. I
Rev. 15
DATE: FEB IW ARY 21, 2005
.l t-'.ll /',\ .\UHl'1i•7-lll
vulcan; r"::l Srclion 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT E:/3
SECTION 7 - DESCRll'TION AND OPERATION

111c Wmdslucld Dcfroslmg System cons1s1s of one fan hc;\lc1, Vulcana1r
PIN 7,6:!71·1. and the ncccssal)' hardware lo complete the system.
The fan healer IS 111s1allcd on the cabin noor bchmd the mstrumcnl
pancl, two hot air oullcls provide wmdslncld defrosting
The system is conlrollcd by three funcllon switches, msl:illcd on the
breaker p:.incl
a) Swuch "WIND. DEFR. -OFF-AIR COND"

- ll1c \VI ND. DE FR. position enables the \Vmdslucld Defrosting
System
- The A IR. COND pos1t1on enables the C1b111 Air Co11d1t1on111g
System
- The O F F pos1l1on d1~blcs both syslcms
b) Switch "DEFROST-O FF-FAN"

- The DE Fil O ST pos1l!on switches the dcfros1111g mode ON
- The F AN pos1t1on sw11chcs lhc vcnlllat111g mode ON
- The O f f pos111on switches both modes OFF
An opcrat1011al lmuls placard 1s provided on !lu: O\·crhe:1cl p;u1cl. m full

view of lhe pilot
1\ compass corrcc11011 plac:ird 1s provided 11c:1r !he tvbgnctu;: Compass.
In 1hc vcn1ib1111g mode, the air 1s blown d trcctly on h> lhe windshield
through two ;;ur outlelS:
In the defrosting mode. the <iir is wanned by 1hc fan healer eh:ment
be for c bcmg blown on the wmdshidd through the same ;;ur oullels
The system 1s powcrc<l through 1he main bus An ;:n1lonmt1c cul'"'°ff
circuit will d1sconncc1 power from the fan heater whenever :111 alternator
failure occurs. F;:1n l-lcall'r circuit 1s prolcctcJ by a 50 Amp circuit breake r.
;\thermal switch localed 111s1dc the fan he;11cr. together w11h external
rcl<iy arc providL-d lo turn the fon heater OFF an case o f overheating. If this
occurs, lhc system c:ut be reset by 1urn111g lhc swllch OFF ;md ON again
Should O\·crhcatmg. rc·uccur. thl.' syslcm must bt: sw11chcd OFF ;;md
1roublcshoo1111g c<lrru:d oul after l;:mding.
Re\', 15
DA T E: FEBRUARY 21, 20115 P:i~e 5 of7
•.f ,.'. JI l'/.\' MJHl11 ;11;.111
vulc an8J a ....
Section ~ ENT E/3 P68C
SUP PLE~1
Figure 1- I G SYSTEM
WINDSl-IIE LD DEFROST IN
Re''· IS
P:11!l" 6 o(7 DA..I F..
•. FFRllUARY
• 21, 2005
\
. l F.I/ 1'.\ .\tJNlfl7•i-JH
vulcanr.111 ":: Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT E/3
cq Fwo
_... .
,......... ._
' Ull:.11. RAR

IM.Ot.111C l·I
Figure 1-2
ll'INDSlllELD DEFROSTING SYSTEM
He•·. IS
DATE: FElllWARY 21, 2005 Jl:l~C 7 of7
P68C SUPPLEMENT F
SUPPLEMENT F
M.T.O.W. DECREASE TO 1990 Kg

(as per change No. MOD.P68/48)
SECTION l - GENERAL
This supplement must be attached to the ENAC Approved Aircraft
Flight Manual when the aircraft operates with a maximum take-off weight
of 1990 Kg (4387 lbs).
The information contained herein supplements the basic approved
Aircraft Flight Manual. For limitations, procedures and performance
information not contained in this supplement consult the basic approved
Flight Manual. Wherever conflict arises between information in this
supplement and the approved Flight Manual, the infonnation herein must
take precedence.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page I of II
Section 8 vu1canet1r -~
SUPPLEMENT F P68C
SECTION 2 - 0PERATING LIMITATIONS
When the aircraft is modified as per change No MOD.P68/48 :
2.1 AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
SPEED KCAS KJAS
Design Ma noeuvring Speed (VA) -

Do not make full or a brupt control
movements above this speed.
1990 Kg (4387 lb) 126 130
1600 Kg (3527 lb) 115 119
NOTE
Linear interpolation may be used for intermediate
gross weights.
Max imum Flaps Extended Speed

(VFE) - Do not exceed this speed at
the given flap setting.
15° flap 152 157
35° flap 99 101
Air Minimum Control Speed (VMCA)

- Lowes t A irspeed at which th e
aircraft is controllable with a bank of
not more than 5 °when one engine 60 62
suddenly becomes inoperative and the
other engine is operating at Take-off
Power .
Never Exceed Speed (VNE) - Do not

exceed this speed in any operation. 193 200
Maximum Structural Cruising Speed

(VNO) - Do not exceed this speed 153 158
except in s mooth a ir and then only
with caution.

Page 2of11 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
P68C SUPPLEMENT F
2.2 AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS
MARKJNG KIAS VALUE SIGNIFICANCE

OR RANGE
Red Line 62 Minimum Control Speed
Full Flap Operating Ran ge.

Lower limit is maximum weight
V so in la nding configuration.
White Arc 61 - 101
Upper limit is maximum speed
pe rmi ss ible with fl a p s fully
extended.
One Engine Inoperative Best

Blue Line 88
Rate of Climb Speed.
Nonna! Operating Range. Lower

Limit is maxi mum weight V 51
Green Arc 66 to 158 with flaps retracted. Upper Limit
is maximum structura l cruis ing
speed
Operations must be conducted

Yellow Arc 158-200 with caution and only in smooth
air
Ma x imum Spee d for a ll

Red Line 200
operations
2.3 WEIGHT LIMITS

It is the responsibility of the aircraft owner and/or pilot to ensure that
the aircraft is properly loaded. Maximum al lowable weights arc listed
be low. Refer to Section 6 "Weight and Balance" for loading instructions.
Kg Lb
(a) Maximum Takeoff Weight 1990 4387
(b) Maximum Landing Weight 1980 4365

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page 3of11
Section 8 VUIGC::H ICW ~
SUPPLEMENT F P68C
2.4 CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS

(Refer to Figure 2- 1)
(a) Rearward Limits:
- 0.481 m ( 18.92 inches) aft of datum at all weights.
(b) Forward Limits:
- 0.299 m ( 11. 77 inches) aft of datum at Maximum Takeoff

weight of 1990 Kg (4387 pounds).
- 0.230 m (9.06 inches) aft of datum at 1680 Kg (3704 pounds) or

less.
NOTES
Straight line variation between points indicated. The
datum line is located at wing leading edge.

Page 4of11 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanairn:; Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT F
"''
0
2
45
40
14 ~ ·~~\~t\ ~ ~~. ~~~~ m: ~::: ·1~ 7: ;::::: -·~:: "~

30 :1':::: ::•..:: :' ':.:I :. :. :• :• :• i• 1;•
:' :. :. :. !' :••.•••• :• :. :. :• :• i1•::• :• :• :• :• •~ :;-• • ·~. ~--:-:-= ~i-:-_,_.
t. rt1
! ::: i ~Y : : ::;:c: :::: ~ j :::: : l~ : ~: :: D 1:~~~g

12 : I ::
,...
I: :; ::: : : : ; : : : : I :::: ::!; :: :: :: :: :: !. :: :: :: :: :: :: :: !:-:: ::-
: : : ! : : : : : : : : : : : . : : : : I : ::~
I ::,..:.:.;~ :.: j j
: :-f:":::::~:::::.
•••• f •• • • • • • • • •• T • • • • • ••• •• • • • ••• • - ~I • • • • • • • • ! . .... I •• •
::::J ::: :::: ::::r ;:b:::: :i;: :::: :::: :: :~ =~~=~ ~ ~ : :~: ~ :i i
750 JOO J50 . 4SO 500
lrJo tre1 af t detum
!O ~z i .i 16 18 20
c G. POSI n o:. l n cn 11 1 H Cletu m
Figure 2-1
AIRCRAFT WE IGHTS VS. CENTRE OF GRAVITY
2.5 FLIGHT MANOEUVRING LOAD FACTOR

LIMITS
(a) Positive Load Factor (Flaps Up) 3.80 g
(b) Negative Load Factor (Flaps Up) -1.52 g
(c) Positive Load Factor (Flaps Down) 2.00 g
(d) Negative Load Factor (Flaps Down) -0.80 g
NOTE
No inverted manoeuvres approved.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page 5of1 I
Section 8 vu1cana1r""iii
SUPPLEMENT F P68C
2.6 PLACARDS
r
OPERATIONAL LIMITS
- This a irc r aft mu s t be operated as a normal category
aircraft in complia nce with the operating limitations
stated in the form of placards, markings, manuals
and at 1990 Kg M .T.O.W .
- N o aerobatic manoeu vres, including spins, approved.
- Minimum singl e e ngine control speed : 62 KIAS.
- Maximum f lap extended s peed 15° flap : 157 KIAS.

- Maximum f lap extended speed 35° f l ap : 101 KIAS.
- Maximum manoe uvring speed : 130 KIAS .
- The aircraft i s approved for day-night VFR conditions.

It Is approved for day-night IFR conditions if proper
equipment i s installed a nd operational.

Page 6of11 DATE: MAY7,2002
vulcanair':i1 Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT F
3 EMERGENCYPROCEDURES
The procedures and informations provided in the Section 3 of the basic
Ai rpla ne Flight Manual are not changed, with the exception of some
airspeeds significant for the safe operation of the aircraft, change as follows:
(a) Minimum Control Speed 62 KIAS
(b) One Engine Inoperative Best Angle-of-Climb

Speed 76 KI AS
(c) One Engine inoperative Best Rate-of-C limb

Speed 88 KJAS
(d) Take-off rotation speed at M.T .O.W.

(For lower weights refer to pag 5. 14 of the basic) 70 KIAS
Aircraft flight Manual)
(e) Single engine Approach Speed 90 KJAS
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The same procedures recommended in the Basic Flight Manual should be
accomplished, with the exception that the airspeeds for the safe operation
of the a ircra ft are modified as follows:
(a) Maximum Structural

Cruising Speed 158 KIAS
(b) Design Manoeuvring Speed

1990 Kg (4387 lb) 130 KIAS
(c) Maximum Flap Extended Speed

15° flaps (Approach) 157 KI AS
35° flaps 10 1 KI AS
(d) All Engines Best Rate of Climb Speed

(Flaps Up) 92 KIAS

DATE: MAY7,2002 Page 7of11
Section 8 vu1cana1r-~
SUPPLEMENT F P68C
(e) Best Angle of Climb Speed (Flaps Up) 76 KlAS
(t) Final Approach Speed 78 KIAS
(g) Maximum Demonstrated Crosswind Velocity 25 KTS
4.1 NOISE ABATEMENT

Increased emphasis on improving the quality of our environment
requires effort on the part of pilots to minimise the effect of aircraft noise
on the public.
FAR36 (!CAO Annexe 16) regulations have determined the noise

level of the P68C at maximum continuous power to be 76.8 dB (A) and at
Maximum Take-off Weight.
In accordance with the above regulations, the maximum permitted

noise level for the P68C at the highest power setting and at Maximum Take-
off Weight in the normal operating range is 80 dB (A).
NOTE
The Federal Aviation Administration has made

no determination as to whether the noise levels
attributable to this airplane arc, or should be
acceptable, or are unacceptable for operations
at, into, or out of any airport.
P68C SIN ............................. has been issued with a C. of A. that

includes a noise certification statement according to the above regulations.
5 PERFORMANCE
For pe rformance information consult the basic approved Flight Manual
referring to a maximum takeoff of 1990 Kg (4387 lb).
ENAC Approval No.: 02/171243/S PA

Page 8of11 DATE: MAY7,2002
A.F.M. PIN NORI0. 707-IB
P68C S UPPLEMENT F
6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE

When the ai rcraft is modified as per change No. MOD. P68/48, refer to
figure 6-2 of the basic Approved Aircraft Flight Manual for the Basic Empty
Weight.
To detennine the Useful Load, complete the figure F.6-1 " WEIGHT AND
BALANCE DATA FORM" of this supplement instead of the figure 6-3 of
the basic Approved Aircraft Flight Manual.
For Center of Gravity Moment Envelope, refer to figure F.6-2 "Weight
Moment Envelope" of this supplement instead of the figure 6-5 of the basic
Approved Aircraft Flight Manual.
6.1 EQUIPMENT LIST

When the a ircraft is modified as per c hange No. MOD. P68/4 8 the
anemometer, lis ted as item EO I b in the "P68C Equipment List"
P/N NOR I I 0 . 719-1 , must be installed.
Rev. 6
Approved under Authority of DOA No. EASA.21J.009
with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 March 2004 Page 9of11
Section 8 vu1carn:lir-111111i
SUPPLEMENT F P68C
Aircraft Serial Number ............ .

Registration Marks .......... ... . .

ITEM Weight x C.G. Arm= Moment
(Aft of Datum)
Basic Empty Weight* (From Figure 6-2)
Optional Equipment (If not on board
when factory weighed)
* Ai rcraft Basic Empty Weight includes full (7.5 litres) engine oil, full
brake fluid, 18 litres of unusable fue l for the STD Range Configuration
plus a further 8 litres of unu sa bl e fuel for the Long Range
Configuration.
A IRCRAFT USEFUL LOAD

NORMAL CATEGORY OPERATION
(Maximum T.O. Weight) - (Actual Basic Empty Weight) = Useful Load

(4387 lbs) - ( ........................ lbs)= ............................. lbs
( 1990 kg) - ( ......................... kg) = .............................. kg
THIS ACTUAL BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT, C.G. AND USEFUL LOAD

A RE FOR THE A IRCRAFT AS DELIVERED FROM
THE FACTORY.
REF ER TO WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD (F igure 6-4 of the
bas ic Aircraft Flig ht Manaul) WHEN A LTERAT IONS HA VE BEEN
MADE.
Figure F6-l
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA FORM

Page 10 of 11 DATE: MAY7, 2002
P68C SUPPLEMENT F
~
0
..
"
0
1
!11 II
2 2 ::-:-., ; ;l! ~ f r;+:~H°t: I
t u 1.::i El · t-11'= 2~=- di

2•
1
6. 0
2Z
•.5 20
·1,:, • WAX l F W!IOHT lHO K111 :;;.:>;:-;-:-H.-;:! ;;;· .;_,

<.O ~! _t":J i...:.:.:. ._: ,~. :-. ·-- -- - · • .'tJ tt:. :::: 1:: 1::-.~
18
~-::.:
t:::: ~p . .:1 :::i ':;;- ::=::

t. . . ;:! l~
· ~+:::: ::!:.,.,.., m=::::
. , . ··- :r;:-, .... I::I: t . •••••
3.6 16
·:::
~~I
l• ,.. _
-L~ ,
• .
3.0
,_ lZ
,, 1 r.t:::
f .. i~H~
--··t= .· i •• t=:::
t:_!_~ .:; i.:--r::::~:
%
a ±ti:! l.3 :::n:i 4. 81
~ I
t!:l1 UIJ ·ttt< 1__!_.:_: t .:
6 10 lZ
200 •oo 600 800 1000

AIRPLANE llOMENT/100 L8•1n ah H
Figure F6-2
W EIG HT MOVEMENT ENVELOPE

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page 11 of 11
P68C SUPPLEMENT G/ I
SUPPLEMENT G/l
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

(As per change No. MOD.P68/0l)
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
This supplement must be attached to the ENAC Approved Airplane Flight
Manual when the airplane is equipped with KEITH Air-Conditioning
System as per change No. MOD.P68/0 I.
Airplane Flight Manual. For limitations, procedures and performance
Airplane Flight Manual. Wherever conflict arises between information in
this supplement and the approved Flight Manual, the information herein
must take precedence.
The KEITH Air-Conditioning System improves the flight compartment

and cabin cooling during either ground or flight operations.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page I of 8
Section 8 V Ul"-01 10 11 -
SUPPLEMENT G/I P68C
SECTION 2 - LIMITATIONS
Operation of the Air-Conditioning System is not approved for the
following conditions:
Take-Off and Landing
Single generator operation.
PLACARDS
AIR CONDITIONING
- OFF for TIO and Landing
- OFF if single a lternator failure occurs.
On Breakers Panel:
OFF AIRCOND HIGH
0 LOW

Page 2 of8 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
P68C SUPPLEMENT G/ I
SECTION 3 - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

SINGLE ALTERNATOR FAILURE
(Zero Amps or ALT OUT light ON)
NOTE
When engine or alternator failure occurs, the Air
Conditioning System will automatically be powered
OFF.
"HEAT FAN - OFF - AIR COND." switch to OFF

"AIR COND. - OFF - FAN" switch to OFF
ENGINE AIR START

Add the following steps before performing the procedure:
"HEAT FAN - OFF - AIR COND." switch to OFF

IN-FLIGHT ENGINE FIRE

"H EAT FAN - OFF- AIR COND." switch to OFF


Section 8 V Ul'-"UI IC.All -
SUPPLEMENT G/I P68C
SECTION 4 - NORMAL PROCEDURES
PRE-FLIGHT CHECK LIST

Add the following checks
FUSELAGE (left side)

I. Condenser air outlet FREE FROM OBSTRUCTION
FUSELAGE (right side)

On the baggage bulkhead:
I. Evaporator air intake FREE FROM OBSTRUCTION
GROUND OPERATION (with external power unit connected)
"HEAT FAN - OFF - AIR COND." switch to AlRCOND.
1. VENTILATING MODE
a. "AIR COND. - OFF - FAN" switch to FAN
b. "HIGH - LOW" switch to AS REQUIRED
2. CONDITIONING MODE
a. "AIR COND. - OFF - FAN" switch to ALR COND.
b. "HIGH - LOW" switch to AS REQUIRED
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE

I. "HEAT FAN - OFF - AIR COND." switch to OFF
2. "AIR COND. - OFF - FAN" switch to OFF
3. Before starting engine procedure COMPLETE

;U·:M. PIN NORJ0.707-IB
P68C SUPPLEMENT G/l
BEFORE TAXI
I. "HEAT FAN - OFF - AIR COND."switch to AJR-COND.
(if desired)
2. "AIR COND. - OFF - FAN" switch to AS REQUIRED
3. "HIGH - LOW" switch to AS REQUIRED
4. Before Taxi Procedure COMPLETE
BEFORE TAKE-OFF
I. "HEAT FAN - OFF -AlR- COND." switch to OFF

3. Before Take-Off procedure COMPLETE
CLIMB/CRUISE/DESCENT
Air Conditioning System Operation AS REQUIRED
BEFORE LANDING
Add the following steps before performing the procedure.
I. "HEAT FAN - OFF - AIR COND." switch to OFF

3. Before Landing procedure COMPLETE
SECTION 5 - PERFORMANCE
No changes to the basic performance provided by the Section 5 of the
Approved Airplane Flight Manual are necessary for this supplement.
SECTION 6 - WEIGHT AND BALANCE

The installation of the Air Conditioning System is listed as item
J04 in the "P68C Equipment List" PIN NOR 10.719-1.
Rev. 6
Approved under Authority of DOA No. EASA.2 IJ.009
with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 March 2004 Page 5 of8
Section 8 vu1cana1r-.m
SUPPLEMENT G/ I P68C
SECTION 7 - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

In order to improve cabin air cooling, an Air Conditioning System can
be installed in addition to the basic cabin ventilating air system.
The Air Conditioning System consists of two separate units: a
compressor/condenser/receiver dryer unit and evaporator/fan unit which arc
installed in the rear cone section of the fuselage, behind the baggage
bulkhead.
The system is controlled by three switches, installed on the breaker
panel, through the following functions:
a) Switch "HEAT FAN - OFF-AIR COND"

- The HEAT FAN position enables the Cabin Air Heating
System
- The AIR COND position enables the Cabin Air Conditioning
System
- The OFF position disables both systems
b) Switch "AIR COND - OFF - FAN"

- The AIR COND position switches the air conditioning mode
ON
- The FAN position switches the air ventilating mode ON
- The OFF position switches both modes OFF
c) Switch "HIGH - LOW"

- The HIGH position selects the high fan speed
- The LOW position selects the low fan speed
An operational limits placard is provided on the overhead panel, in full

view of the pilot.
Air is drawn through the inlet located on the baggage bulkhead into the
evaporator/fan unit.
In the ventilating mode, the air is directly blown into the cabin through
air outlets.
In the conditioning mode, the air is cooled by refrigeration while being
blown into the cabin through the same air outlets.
Exhaust air flows outside through a vent located on the left skin of the
fuselage rear cone section.
The entire Air Conditioning refrigerant loop is protected against over
pressure conditions by two separate safety devices.

Page 6 of 8 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
P68C SUPPLEMENT G/ 1
The first device is a binary high/low pressure switch that activates in the
event of an over pressure and is located on the compressor discharge port.
This switch will open at approximately 350 psig and will interrupt
power to the compressor control circuit. The swi tch will also interrupt
power to the compressor control circuit under low pressure conditions.
The second over pressure safety device is a fuse plug which will vent
the system refrigerant safely overboard in the event of a system pressure in
excess of 425 psig. It is located on the receiver/dryer.
The system is powered through main bus. An automatic Cut-off circuit
wi ll disconnect power from Air Conditioning System whenever an
alternator failure occurs. However, electrical fan will still be ON.
The Compressor/Condenser circuit is protected by I 00 Amps circuit
breaker while the fan is protected by a l 5 Amps circuit breaker.
SECTION 8 - AIRPLANE HANDLING, SERVICING

AND MAINTENANCE
Refer to the P68C Maintenance Manual Supplement NORJ0.771-28 for
servicing and maintenance operations.

DATE: MAY7,2002 Page 7 of8
Section 8 vu1cana1r-e
SUPPLEMENT G/ l P68C
• AIR CONDITIONING CADINAIR

- OPERATIONAL LIMITS - EVAPJFAN Dl!:TR10UT10N
-OPF For TIO .·ind lnndln!J UtuT DUCT TO CABltj
·\---?_
.........
·OFF Ir slngte tnglnt
alterf'tAtor rallure occurs
..--
_t,0-~
.. 1 • • ~I /
8ACCACE
- - J '- J
OVERHEAD PAHEL OUU<HEAO
.1.
"·!.~..
-~
·~T. CONO.~
·~
'. ' •. C)'IF
••
SWITCHES
••
• t1 AIRCON:> .
FAN
-OF"=
PlAC.A~O
• tcGH
LOW
AUTOMATIC CUT-OFF
DEVICE BREAKER!;
PtACARO
Fig. I
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM LAYOUT

P68C SUPPLEMENT B
SUPPLEMENT 8
GOODRICH SURFACE DE-ICE BOOT

SYSTEM AND PROPELLER ELECTRIC
ANTI-ICE SYSTEM
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
This supplement must be attached to the ENAC Approved Airplane

Flight Manual when the Goodrich Surface De-Ice Boot System and
Propeller Electric Anti-Ice System arc installed.
Airplane Flight Manual. For limitations, procedures and performa nce
this supplement and the approved Flight Ma nual, the information herein
The a ircraft is equipped with pneumatic De-Ice boots on wing and

cmpennagc and electric propeller Anti-Ice.
SECTION 2 - OPERATING LIMITATIONS

A. This aircraft is not approved for flight in icing conditions.
B. De icing boots must be off for take-off and during final approach
for landing.
C. Placards - On front pane l in full view of the pilot "this aircraft is

not approved for flight in icing conditions".
WARNING
Severe icing may result from environmental conditions outside of those

for which the airplane is certificated. Flight in freezing rain, freezing drizzle,

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Paget ofS
Section 7 vulcanaire:il
SUPPLEMENT B P68C
or mixed icing conditions (supercooled liquid water and ice crystals) may
result in ice build-up on protected surfaces exceeding the capability of the
ice protection system, or may result in ice forming aft of the protected
surfaces.
This ice may not be shed using the ice protection systems, and may
seriously degrade the performance and controllability of the airplane.
During flight, severe icing conditions that exceed those for which the
airplane is certificated shall be determined by the following visual cues. If
one or more of these visual cues exists, immediately request priority
handling from Air Traffic Control to facilitate a route or an altitude change
to exit the icing conditions.
A. Unusually extensive ice accumulation on the airframe and

windshield in areas not normally observed to collect ice.
B. Accumulation of ice on the lower surface of the wing aft of the

protected area.
C. Accumulation of ice on the engine nacelles and propeller spinners

farther aft than normally observed.
Since the autopilot, when installed and operating, may mask tactile cues
that indicate adverse changes in handling characteristics, use of the autopilot
is prohibited when any of the visual cues specified above exist, or when
unusual lateral trim requirements or autopilot trim warnings are encountered
while the airplane is in icing conditions.
All wing icing inspection lights must be operative prior to flight into
\
known or forecast icing conditions at night.
NOTE
This s upersedes any relief pro v ided by the
Minimum Equipment List (MEL).

Page 2 of5 DATE: MAY7,2002
vulcanaire:= Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT B
SECTION 3 - EMERGENCY PROCEDURE

A. If Uneven Deicing of Propeller Blades is indicated
l. Propeller Anti-Ice Switch - OFF
SECTION 4 - NORMAL PROCEDURE

Flight in (Inadvertently Encountered)
lcing Conditions
FOR PROCEDURES TO EXIT THE SEVERE ICING

ENVLRONMENT REFER TO SECTION 4, PARA. 4.13 OF THE BASIC
AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL.
A. Before take-off
1. Surface De-Ice Switch - ACTUATE - visually check

operation of boots then OFF.
2. Propeller Anti-Ice Switch - ON - check propeller anti-

ice ammeter
3. Pitot Heat Switch - ON - c heck volt-amperometer
B. In Flight - Inadvertent icing encounter
l. Before Entering Visible Moisture

a. Pitot Heat Switch - ON
2. If Icing Conditions are inadvertently encountered

a. Propeller Anti-ice Switch - ON
3. If lee Accumulates to approximately 1/2 Inch

thickness
a. Surface De-Ice Switch - ACTUATE
4. Prepare for landing check:

a. Surface De-Ice Switch - OFF
ENAC Approval No.: 02/17 1243/SPA

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Pa2e 3 ofS
Section 7 vulcanaire:I
SUPPLEMENT B P68C
NOTES
I. This aircraft is not approved for flight in icing
conditions since wing, horizontal stabilizer and
vertical s tabilizer deice boots alone do not
pro vide adequate protection for the e ntire
aircraft. If icing is encountered inadvertently,
close attention should be given to the pitot -static
system, propellers, induction system and other
components subject to icing, and appropriate
action taken to leave the icing area as soon as
possible.
2. The de-ice system will operate satisfactorily on

either one or both e ngines.
During single-engine operation, suction to the
g yros will drop momentarily during boot
inflation cycle.
Electrical output of one alternator may be
insufficient for sustained flight, depending on
flight conditions (IFR, night, icing). Check volt-
ampcrometer.
3. Proper operation of propeller anti-ice system is

indicated by periodic fluctuation from 8 to 12
a mps on propeller anti-ice amperomctcr. A
reading below 8 amperes indicates that the
blades of the propellers arc not being deiced
uniformly. Should this occur, it is imperative that
the system be turned OFF. Do not operate when
propellers arc static.
4. Pos itioning the surface de-i ce s witch to

ACTUATE will result in one complete inflation
lasting approximately 7 seconds.
Performance is not affected by the installation of the de-ice system.

Pa~e 4 of 5 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
A.F.M. PIN NORI0.707-IB
P68C SUPPLEMENT B

The installation of the Goodrich Surface De-ice Boot System and
Propeller Electric Anti-ice System is listed as items H03, 103, 102 and 103 in
the "P68C Equipment List" PIN NORI0.719-1.
Rev.6
with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 March 2004 Page S ofS
This page intentionally lefi blank
P68C SUPPLEMENT C
SUPPLEMENT C
PARACHUTIST VERSION
(For airplane equipped with Kit P/N 68-012 as per S.L
No. 06 latest revision)
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
Flight Manual when the aircraft is equipped with Kit PIN 68-012 as per S.I.
No. 06 latest revision (Parachutist Version).

Maximum number of persons on board including pilot: 7
Maximum weight of aircraft allowed at take-off: 4594 lbs (2084 Kg)
Maximum speed allowed: 150 KIAS
Minimum control speed: 65 KlAS
Maximum flap angle extension during jumps: 15°
Length of the static line: 3.50 mt
All other limitations indicated in the Flight Manual are also applicable,
unless contradictory to those mentioned above.

The relative sections of the Basic Flight Manual are to be applied with
the exception of higher value of the minimum control speed, Vmc = 65
KIAS.

DATE: MAY7,2002 Page I ofS
Section 8 vulcanair':il
SUPPLEMENT C P68C
SECTION 4 - NORMAL PROCEDURE
a. External checks
In addition to normal checks:
Right wheel fairing (if installed) - REMOVED
Baggage compartment door - REMOVED
b. Internal checks
In addition to normal checks:
Interior equipment according to <VU LCANAIR
SPECIFICATION> for parachutist version
Seating of parachutist on board according to the enclosed graph
c. In Flight
The parachutist must hold onto the proper handles during take-
off, flight in turbulent air conditions and landing
Configuration and speed: Flaps= 15°; Speed = -;.- 75 KIAS;
Engines = Low power
In the case of static line dropping, the pilot must not be
responsible for the recovery of the static lines. They must be
withdrawn and stowed on board by a person not involved in
piloting the aircraft.
The indicated stall airspeed values, with the door removed. are modified
as follows:
Flaps retracted Vs= 65 KIAS

Flaps 15' Vs= 62 KIAS
Flaps 35' Vs= 60 KIAS

To obtain the empty weight and the moment for the parachutist version,
apply the following corrections to the STD eq uipped empty weight and
moment respectively:
37.9 kg
+ 14.832 kgm
Add the weights and moments obtained from the < Load Graph> to the

P68C SUPPLEMENT C
empty equipped weight and moment for the parachutist version. Take-off
weight should not exceed 4594 lbs (2084 kg); weight and moment should
be contained within the allowed envelope shown in the Weight and Balance
data sheet.
EXAMPLE WEIGHTS MOMENT

(Kg) (Kgm)
S}D empty equipped weight of 1400.0 - 7 13.63 +
aircraft
Correction to pass from STD to 37.9 = 14.832 =
parachutist version
S}D equipped empty weight of 1362. 1
aircraft 728.462
Pilot plus parachutist (copilot) 172 165.000
Parachutist 2nd row 172 35.000
Parachutist 3rd row 172 + 145.000
Parachutist - rear 86 + 132.000
Engine oil (full) 13 + 1.300
Fuel 106.9 + 100.000
2084.0 906.762

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page 3 ofS
Section 8 vulcanaire:;
SUPPLEMENT C P68C
Eq1:1ippcd empty Eq1:1ipped empty

weight STD weight moment
version STD version
-37.9 Kg + 14.832 Kgm
Eq1:1ipped empty Eq1:1ipped empty
weight weight moment
Parachutist Parachutist
version version
<1FWD __;.
I
200 46
950 1542
Dimensions in mm

Page 4 ofS DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanaire::= Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT C
.... ...... '
E
' 0 Cl
"""
l.:·
..,
oX
' z...: ....
- Q..
Cl)
I- :e I-
(/) 0
!!? 3 I- u
I- 0 0
::> a: ' ::> w
x x<.:> N
u "O u c(
' c( ~ c( <.:>
....
-... a: "'
~~
a:<.:>
c( c(
o.. m
H ., "
I
0
0
.....
;...i
wt
::::>
u.
' 0
I-
z
w
:E
Cl) ~ oO
>-o 0 :E
~a: .....
I- 0 I- I
. :I:
::> "'
c z in
>==
u Cli c(
::>
~z I- :I:
0 (.)
c( - 0
~ ~ c( 0
I
~ a: N
c( I
~
I
' -..:.,,
'
0
0
0 ~
..... 0
.....
0
II>
·15)1 N 0'/01
Add the load weights and moments to the equipped empty weight
and moment. The total weight and moment values tlius obtained must
correspond to a point within the envelope of the centre of gravity positions.

DATE: MAY7,2002 Page 5 of5
P68C SUPPLEMENT L/2
SUPPLEMENT L/2
AERO SYSTEMS MODEL E16
UNDERWING SILVER IODIDE
SEEDING GENERATORS
(As per change No. MOD.P68/52)
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
Flight Manual when the aircraft is equipped with Aero Systems Model E l 6
Underwing Silver Iodide Seeding Generators. Installation of underwing
Seeding Generators requires the aircraft to be operated with a special
airworthiness certificate in the RESTRICTED CATEGORY ("Categoria
Ristretta" as per R.T. ENAC).
Ai rcraft Flight Manual. For limitations, procedures and performance
information not contained in this supplement, consult the basic approved
Flight Manual. Wherever conflict arises between information in this
supplement a nd the approved Flight Manual, the information herein must
take precedence.
Note: The seeding operation must be performed in accordance with

the laws of the country where the aircraft is operated.
DESCRIPTION
The system consists of three units: No. two Generator Units and a
Remote Control Switch Panel Unit. A Pylon Rack bolted to the front and
rear wing spar between ribs 14 and 15, carrying a single generator, arc
provided under each wing. Each generator is attached to the pylon by means
of two retaining straps, each bolted to a machined retainer block carried on
an integral sway brace mount. The remote control switch panel is located in
the cockpit, on the pilot's left side cabin wall, aft of the breaker panel.
The generators carry a silver iodide/acetone solution in a pressurised 7
gallon tank. A solenoid controls the flow to the nozzle and the atomised
solution is flamed by a spark rod installed in the combustion assembly
located in the tai l cone. External airflow is routed through the tail cone to
disperse the resulting vapour into the atmosphere. The system is powered
through the main bus. The circuit is protected by a "SPRINKLER" 5 Amp.
circuit breaker. Since the power supply for the system is 12 Ydc, a
converter is provided to reduce the 28 Ydc of the main bus to the required
Rev.4
Approved by EASA under Approval
No. 087 on IO October 2003 Page I of 15
Section 8 vu1cana1r..
SUPPLEMENT L/2 P68C
I 2Vde . The converter is installed in the rear cone section of the fuselage,
behind the baggage bulkhead. Two red lights (LH and RH) on the Control
Pa nel tum ON when proper operating temperature is reached in the
combustion chamber, thus indicating correct operation of the system.
00
Figure L/2 1-1

AIRCRAFT THREE-VIEW
Rev.4
Page 2of15 No. 087 on 10 October 2003
vulcanair .i Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT L/2
2.1 AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
KCAS KIAS
Design Manoeuvring Speed (VA) -
Do not make full or abrupt control
movements above this speed.
1500 kg (3307 lb) 112 116
1960 kg (4321 lb) 126 130
Never Exceed Speed (V NiJ 175 182

Do not exceed this speed
in any operation.
2.2 AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS

MARKI NG KIAS VALUE/RANGE DESCRI PTION
Red Button 182 Maximum speed

for all operations
with Seeding
Generators
installed.
2.3 WEIGHT LIMITS

Kg Lb
Maximum Take-off Weight 1960 4321
Maximum Landing We ight 1960 4321
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight 1890 41 67
2.4 CENTRE OF GRAVITY LIMITS (Refer to Figure L/2 2-1)

(a) Rearward Limits
0.481 m ( 18.92 inches) aft of datum at all weights.
(b) Forward Limits
0.293m (I 1.53 inches) aft of datum at Maximum Take-off
Weight of 1960 Kg (432 1 Lbs).
0.230m (9.06 inches) aft of datum at 1680 Kg (3704 Lbs) or less.
Rev. 4
No. 087 on I0 October 2003 Page 3of15
Section 8 vu1cana1r-e
SUPPLEMENT L/2 P68C
NOTE
The Datum line is located at Wing Leading Edge.
Straight line variation between points indicated
Ill CJ)
....I !.:
0 - 0
,...
0
~ 20
' .293 ~ 'MAX T.O. WEIGHT '

45- 1960 K s I .481
20
40- .230 1890 Kg.s j.,

18
M~ ~.F. VJEIGtff"
1680
35- 16
14
30 -
-
~ 12
:i::
c.:>
Ui
:!::
.250 .300 .350 .400 .450 .500
10 12 14 16
. Metres AFT Datum
18 20
C.G. POSITION Inches AFT Datum
Figure L/2 2-1

AIRCRAFT WEIGHTS VS. CENTRE OF GRA YITY
Rev. 4
Page 4 of 15 No. 087 on 10 October 2003
vulcanair9;; Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT L/2
2.5 GENERATOR LIMITATIONS

(a) Operation of the Underwing Silver Iodide Seeding Generator
System is not approved for Take-off and Landing.
(b) In flight the system must be operated at airspeeds withi n 80- 140
KlAS with flaps retracted.
(c) Operation of the Underwing Silver Iodide Seeding Generator

System is not approved in severe turbulent air conditions.
(d) Intentional sidcslippings are prohibited when Underwing Silver

Iodide Generator System is operative. Max allowable LH and RH
bank indications arc shown below:
Max allowable LH and RH

b~k ijicatio.ns
I ·I
[I -~!]
! \
Steady Flight
(c) Always tum on the ignition switch before turning on the solution
switch. Operating the solution switch before the ignition switch
may cause pooling of the solution in the chamber and damage to
components and/or wiring could result.
(f) Do not activate the ignition circuit during or immediately after a

ground check of nozzle flow and spray pattern.
CAUTION
OPERATI NG TH E FLAME ON THE G ROUN D

COULD RESU LT IN IGNITION OF RESIDUAL
SOLUTION POOLED IN THE TAIL CONE AN D
CONTROL AREAS. SHOULD THIS OCCU R,
PLACE THE RELATIVE "SOL" AND " IGN"
SWITCHES IN THE "OFF" POSITION.
Rev.4
No. 087 on to October 2003 Page 5 of 15
Section 8 vu1cana1r-;m
SUPPLEMENT L/2 P68C
CAUTION (Cont.)
THE FIRE WILL NOT EXTINGUISH UNTIL

ALL ACCUMULATED MATERIALS HAVE
BE EN CONSUMED. AFTER THE
COMPONENTS HAVE COOLED, A GEN ERAL
INSPECTION OF THE SOLENOID VAL VE,
SOLID STATE CIRCUITRY AND WIRING IS
REQUIRED.
2.6 TYPE OF OPERATION LIMITS

When the aircraft is configured as per change No. MOD.P68/52 "Aero
Systems Model EI 6 Underwing Silver Iodide Seeding Generators", it must
be operated in the RESTRICTED CATEGORY and only under VFR
day condition.
2.7 PLACARD(S)
a) In full view of Pilot:
OPERATIONAL LIMITS
AERO SYSTEMS Model E16
Underwing Silver Iodide
Seeding Generators
When !he aircraft Is configured as per change

No. MOO.P68/52 "Aero Sys1ems Model E16
Underwing Sliver Iodide Seeding Generators". It
must be operated In the RESTRICTED
CATEGORY with the following llmtllrtlons:
• The aircraft must be operated only under VFR
day condl!lon. ·
• Never Exceed Speed (V..1) : 182 KIAS.
• Maximum Manoeuvring Speed: 130 KIAS.
• Maximum Take-elf Weight : 1960 kg (4321 lbs).
Tile Underwlng Silver Iodide Seeding Generator

System mus! be OFF for Take-off and Landing.
NOTE: ·For other llmltltlons with Underwlng

Sliver Iodide Seeding Generators
operative refer to P"ragraph 2.6 In Section
2oftheA.F.M. Supplement U2.
Rev.4
Page 6 of 15 No. 087 on I 0 October 2003
P68C S UPPLEMENT L/2
b) Near the Silver Iodide Seeding Generator Control Panel:
WARNING
AERO SYSTEMS Model E16
Underwing Silver Iodide
· Seeding Generators
To ovoid pooling of the solution In the

chorrber which could r<!SUlt In c"""°nent
ond/or wiring domogo, tho following ·
soquen~• must be observl>d
OPERATION
1. Swllch"IGN"ON(LH& RH)
2. Switch " SOL" ON (LH & RH)
SHUTDOWN
1. Swltch " SOL"OFF(LH& RH)
2. Swltch " IGN" OFF:(LH,& RH)
c) Near each Generator Solution Tank Filler Cap:
WARNING
RELEASE PRESSURE BEFORE
REPLENISHING SOLUTION TANK
1.Turn butterfly valve ccw lo allow

alr escape. ·"
2. Remove safetv wlre.
3. Replenish tank.
4. R&-applysafetywlre.
SECTION 3 - EMERGENCY PROCE DURES
NO CHANG E
4.1 PREFLIGHT (Perform prior to each flight. Refer to Fig. L/2 4-1 )
- Battery Switch must be OFF -
( I) C HEC K LH and RH generators and pylons for condition and

security of installation.
\
Rev.4
No. 087 on 10 October 2003 Page 7 of IS
Section 8 vu1cana1r4m
SUPPLEMENT L/2 P68C
(2) C HEC K LH and RH generator sway brace mounts for proper

tensioning, proper tightening of lock nuts, and the generators for
absence of lateral movement.
(3) C HECK LH a nd RH generator solution tank filler caps for security

and presence of lockwire.
(4) CHECK LH and RH generator solution tank pressures are between

30 - 75 PSI.
(5) CHECK LH and RH generator AIR ON/OFF Valves are closed.
(6) C HECK LI-I and RH " SOL" a nd " IGN" switches arc OFF before
performing the following steps.
(7) Battery Switch ON.
(8) C HECK control panel LH and RH red lights arc OFF (no " BURN"
indications).
(9) C HECK LI-I and RH generators for evidence of any activity such
as burning and/or solution spraying.
Rev. 4
Page 8 of 15 No. 087 on I 0 October 2003
P68C SUPPLEMENT L/2
r 0
:I
0
I
111111..::c.;v
l •Nl lll.IN U Nl l
!>UC U l l(}N IANK
Cl f'QL!>...-..URl <..AUGL
I LAt.>1
AIR P RESSURE AIR INU : l
OLTLCtOf~
REGUl.ATOP VALVC
CO'.'liUSllUN
ASSLM!!LY ;"R 0.'LOFF
~)t lN(.\ICl l lHA!N \'Al Vt VALVE
SILVER IODIDE GENERATOR
0\.1ff [lU!N
SCI
• IC:I\ ~01
• l!~'I
• • • •
4>'t\0S":"il ..N.i '¥.: U.'\A
CONTROL PANEL
~''IA'Y t;tk.,.\Ct.
MOUN!
LQ<',K M JTS
~WAY UAA(;L
SCREWSIU\FT
PN)
PYLON I SWAY BRACE
Figure L/2 4- 1
SEEDING GEN ERATOR INSTALLATION
Rev. 4
No. 087 on 10 October 2003 Page 9 of 15
Section 8 vu1cana1r•
SUPPLEMENT L/2 P68C
4.2 IN-FLIGHT
SEEDING OPERATION:
( l) " IGN" LH and RH generator switches ON
(2) "SOL" LH and RH generator switches ON
(3) CHECK control panel LH and RH red lights arc "ON" ("BURN"
indications), thus indicating correct operation of the system.
SHUTDOWN:
SHUTDOWN OPERATION may be performed at any time it is
required and must be performed when solution tanks are empty (no
"BURN" indications).
( 1) "SOL" LH and RH generator switches OFF
(2) " IGN" LH and RH generator switches OFF
(3) CHECK control panel LH and RH red lights arc "OFF" (no
"BURN" indications).
NOTE
The E 16 Igniter circuitry is designed for continuous operation
and may be operated until the solution in the tank is exhausted.
In flight the system may be operated at airspeeds within 80- 140
KIAS with flaps retracted.
4.3 BEFORE TAKE-OFF

Add the following steps before performing the normal Take-off
procedure:
( 1) "SOL" LH and RH generator switches OFF

(2) " lGN" LH and RH generator switches OFF
(3) Before Take-off procedure COMPLETE
Rev. 4
P68C SUPPLEMENT L/2
4.4 BEFORE LANDING

Add the following steps before performing the normal Landing
procedure:
(I) "SOL" LI-I and RH generator switches OFF

(2) " IGN" LI-I and RH generator switches OFF
(3) Before Landing procedure COMPLETE
TAKE-OFF DISTANCE OYER 50 ft

Refer to Figure 5-5 of the Basic Flight Manual and increase distance by 5%
when generators arc installed.
TWIN ENG IN E CLIMB - MAXIMUM CLIMB

Refer to Figure 5-7 of the Basic Flight Manual. Subtract 200 fpm from
indicated Rate of Climb when generators are installed.
ONE ENG INE INOPERATIVE CLIMB

Rate of Climb at 5000 ft is equal to -30 fpm.
TWIN ENG INE CLIMB - CRUISE CLIMB

BALKED LANDING CLIMB

indicated Rate of C limb when generators are installed.
T IME AN D FUEL TO CLIMB - MAXIMUM CLIMB

Refer to Figure 5- 1 I of the Basic Flight Manual. Increase time by 20% and
read fuel for the new time value when generators are installed.
Rev.4
No. 087 on IO October 2003 Page II of IS
Section 8 VUIGctrlC:llf -~
SUPPLEMENT L/2 P68C
DISTANCE TO CLIMB- MAXIMUM CLIMB

Refer to Figure 5-12 of the Basic Flight Manual. Increase distance by 20%
when generators are installed.
TIME AND FUEL TO CLIMB - CRUISE CLIMB

Refer to Figure 5-13 of the Basic Flight Manual. Increase time by 21 % and
read fuel for the new time value when generators arc installed.
DISTANCE TO CLIMB - CRUISE CLIMB

Refer to Figure 5-14 of the Basic Flight Manual. Increase distance by 25%
CRUISE PERFORMANCE - BEST ECONOMY MIXTURE

Refer to Figure 5-15 of the Basic Flight Manual. Decrease speed by 3%
CRUISE SPEED
Refer to Figure 5-16 of the Basic Flight Manual. No significant change in
stall speed should be expected. Decrease speed by 3% when generators are
installed.
TIME, FUEL AND DISTANCE TO DESCENT

Refer to Figure 5-19 of the Basic Flight Manual. No significant change
should be expected when generators are installed.
LANDING DISTANCE OVER 50 ft

Refer to Figure 5-20 of the Basic Flight Manual. No significant change
should be expected when generators are installed.
Rev. 4
Page 12of15 No. 087 on I 0 October 2003
vulcanairS:: Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT L/2

When the aircraft is equipped with Aero Systems E 16 Silver Iodide
Seeding Generator System as per change No. Mod P68/52, refer to figure
L/2 6- 1 of this Supplement for the Basic Empty Weight and corresponding
Centre of Gravity position
ITEM WEIGHT x ARM = MOMENT

(Kg) (m) (Kgm)
a. Weight (as weighed) - - -

+
b. Unusable Fuel 13 0.770 10.010
+
c. Pylons (Two) 14 0.618 8.652
+
d. Generators (Two) 37 0.548 20.276
+
c. Solution (Two) 48 0.508 24.384
=
Basic Empty Weight
Figure L/2 6- 1 BASIC EMPTY WE IGHT
To determine the useful load, complete Figure L/2 6-2 "Weight and Balance
Data Form" of this Supplement instead of Figure 6-3 of the Basic Flight
Manual. The Basic Empty Weight, Centre of Gravity location and Useful
Load entered into Figure L/2 6-2 arc for the aircraft as delivered from the
factory. These figures apply only to the specific aircraft identified by Serial
Number and Registration Marks as shown. For the Centre of Gravity
Moment Envelope, refer to Figure L/2 6-3 " Weight Moment Envelope" of
this Supplement instead of figure 6-5 of the Basic Flight Manual. If the
plotted point falls within the approved envelope, the loading meets aircraft
Weight and Balance Requirements.
NOTE
The Pilot and/or Aircraft Owner or Operator
is responsible for ensuring that the aircraft is
properly loaded for flight.
Rev.4
No. 087 on 10 October 2003 Page 13of15
Section 8 VUl(;C::ll ldll •
SUPPLEMENT L/2 P68C
Aircraft Serial Number ...............................
Registration Marks .................................... .
ITEM Weight x CG Arm = Moment

(Aft of Datum)
Basic Empty Weight (From Figure L/2 6- 1)
Optional Equipment
(if not on board when Factory Weighed)
/
'Aircraft Basic Empty Weight includes full (7.5 Litres) Engine Oil. full Brake Fluid. and
18 Litres of Unusable Fuel
AIRCRAFT USEFUL LOAD
(Maximum Take-off Weight) - (Actual Basic Empty Weight)= USEFUL LOAD
(4321 Lbs) - ( ...... Lbs)= ...................... .... Lbs
(1960 Kg) - ( .............. Kg) = ................................... Kg
THIS ACTUAL BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT, CG AND USEFUL LOAD ARE

RELATIVE TO THE AIRCRAFT WITH SEEDING GENERATORS INSTALLED.
THEY ARE FOR THE AIRCRAFT AS DELIVERED FROM THE FACTORY
REFER TO WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD (Figure 6-4 of Basic Aircraft
Flight Manual) WHEN AL TE RATIONS HAVE BEEN MADE
Figure L/2 6-2

WE IGHT AND BALANCE DATA FORM
Rev. 4
Page 14 of IS No. 087 on I 0 October 2003
P68C S UPPLEMENT L/2
m O>
:.::
..J
0 0
0
~ ~ 24
-
so-
22
- MAX T.O. WEIGHT
1960 Kg
MAX Z.F. WEIGHT
~
45 - 1890 Kg
5.74 9.43
20
.
40 · 18
J.86
. 1680
35- 16
.
14
JO •
I- 12
J:
Cl
w
~ 2.30 4.81
I
2 4 6 8 10
200
I
400 600
. I
800
I I
1000
12 Kgm
AIRCRAFT MOMENT/100 LB ·Inches
Figure L/2 6-3

WEIGHT MOMENT ENVELOPE
Rev. 4
No. 087 on I 0 October 2003 Page 15 of 15
vulcanair";; Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT M
SUPPLEMENT .M
CARGO VERSION
SECTION I - GENERAL
This supple ment must be attached to the ENAC Approved Airplane

Flight Manual when the airplane is used for freight transportation according
to the Service Bulletin no. 77; latest revision.
A irplane Flight Manual. For limitations, procedures and performance
DESCRIPTION
All but the pilot's and copilot's scat must be removed and Yulcanair kit
P/ N NOR 7.449-13 must be ins talled on board, in compliance with
Yulcanair Service Bulletin No. 77, latest revision.
The kit contains a cargo web net and the relevant tic-down restraints on
the floorboard scat tracks and airframe.
The total weight of the kit is I 0 Kg (22 lb) and its center of gravity
position s hould be considered to be its vertical center line when it is
installed.
The cargo net is equipped with adjustable buckles, to allow adjustment

to the freight dimensions and to introduce a pre-load.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page I ofS
Section 8 VUICC::Hld lr -4111
SUPPLEMENT M P68C
NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS
The maximum number of occupants must not exceed two, including

pilot.
The pilot must sit in the left hand seat.
LOADING
(a) The lashing restraints on seat tracks must be positioned 450 mm

from main door rear stanchion.
(b) Freight must be contained in packing of adequate construction and

must comply with the Air Navigation Regulations.
(c) Freight must be blocked by means of adequate securing devices

fastened to the attachment points already existing .o n the floor in
the cargo compartment. Lashing restraints can withstand the
following loads in any direction:
MAXIMUM
LASHING
ALLOWABLE LOAD REF.
RESTRAINT
(kg/lb)
A 696/ 1534 Fig. I

B 1100/2425
c 1669/3679
D 1800/3968
NOTE
It is the responsibility of the aircraft operator to
show compliance, with the foregoing, in accordance
with the res ponsible authorities a irworthiness
regulations

P68C SUPPLEMENT M
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
(a) The maximum freight load for each cargo net must not exceed 316
kg (697 lb).
(b) Do not exceed the maximum distributed load limit while loading
freight on board (977 kg/sq.mt. - 200 lb/sq.ft).
(c) The new basic empty weight and the relevant center of gravity
after scat removal and cargo net installation must be calculated
using the weight and balance chart contained in Vulcanair Service
Bulletin No. 77 and recorded in the weight and balance record
Chart in figure 6-4 of the basic A.F.M., or other equivalent form
kept by the operator as allowed by the applicable operational
regulations.
The same applies if the floor carpets are removed and/or floor
protection boards are used under the freight, taking the actual
weights and average C.G. values into account.
{d) It is the responsibility of the pilot and aircraft owner to make sure
that the airplane is properly loaded and within the approved weight
and balance limits.
PLACARD
On the cabin wall in the baggage compartment:
LIMITATIONS FOR THE CARGO VERSION
Maximum load in the freight compartment 316kg(697 lb)

Maximum distributed load on the floor 977 kg/mq (200 lb/sqft)
Freight compartment volume 1.50 me (53 cuft)
Not Applicable.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page 3 ofS
Section 8 VUl\,;Cll l dll 4111
SUPPLEMENT M P68C

PREFLIGHT CHECK
(a) Check cargo nets, tie-down restraints and seat tracks and relevant
fittings for condition.
(b) Check tie-down restraints for proper location and fastening.
(c) Check freight for proper and symmetrical stowage and tie-down.
(d) Check cargo net for proper tension by using the adjustable buckles.
(e) Ventilating air ducts in the cargo compartment must be closed.
No Change

LOADING PROCEDURE
The airplane must be loaded following the procedures and limitations

reported herein and in Section 2 of the ENAC Approved Airplane Flight
Manual.
(a) The cargo net length must be adjusted to the freight dimensions by
using the adjustable buckles.
(b) The freight must be placed symmetrically with respect to the

airplane roll axis and must be fully contained within the cargo net,
using adequate packing and securing it on the floor.
(c) The distance between the longitudinal lashing restraints on the

floorboard and the main door rear stanchion must be 450 mm.
(d) The cargo net pre-loading must be sufficient to guarantee total

freight blockage.

. 111"3
vulcana1r e Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT M
-----'--------
Figure I TION
CARGO NET-1 NSTALLA
ENAC Approval No. ·. 02/171243/SPA

DATE: MAY 7' 2002 Page5of5
This page intentionally leli blank
Garmin Ltd. cir its subsidiaries
do Gmnin Intcm3.tional, Inc.
1200E. 151" Street
Olathe, Kan.us 66062 U.S.A.
GPS 400, GNC 420/420A, GNS 430/430A AFMS I SAFM

(Airplane Flight Manual Supplement I Supplemental Airplane Flight Manual)
Terrain Addendum
The OPS 400, GNC 420/420A; GNS 430/430A AFMS I SAFM (Airplonc Aii;ht M3Dual Supplement I
Supplemental Airplonc Flight M3Dual) Terrain Addendum contains the liniit.ations for the GAID1JN OPS
400, GNC 420/420A; or ONS 430/430A units when inst4lled in aeeordaoce with STC SAOOSOOWI (OPS
400)~ SA00801Wl (GNC 420/420A), SA00705WJ .(GNS 430/430A), or follow-on field approved
installations, modified in aCcordance with Garmin Service Bulletin No. 0532 lo add the Terrain feature. ·
0
·lnscn this addendwn into ihe !:.imitations section of the existing AFMS I SAFM for the Garmin OPS 400,
GNC 420/420A. or GNS 430/430A. The combination of tho existing docuinent and the inscried addendwn
' serves as the FAA Approved AFMS 1 SAFM for the Garmin OPS 400, GNC 420/420A. or GNS 430/430A
with Tcrnin. · · ·
FAA APPROVED
'r' Mar~aretKime .
Monagcr, Aircraft Certification Office
Federal Aviation Administration
Wichiu, Kansas 672<E
190-00140 -14 k cv .'\

Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiruics
clo Garmin International, Inc.
1200 E. 151" Street
Olathe. Knnsas 66062 U.S.A.
GPS 400, GNC 420/420A, GNS 430/430A AFMS I SAFM

(Airplane Flight Manual Supplement I Supplemental Airplane Flight Manual)
Terrain Addendum
LIMITATIONS
1. The GPS 400, GNC 420/420A. or GNS 430/430A when upgraded to include Terrain must utilize M<iin
Sub-System Version 5.01 or later FAA approved software version. The Main software version is
displayed on the self-test page immediately ofter tum-on for 5 seconds.
2 .. Navigation must not be predicated upon the use of the TERRAIN display.
NOTE: The tcrnain display is intended to serve llS o situational oworcnc5s Cool .only ood docs not
provide TA WS e11pobility. It docs ool provide clther U1c accuracy or fidelity, or both, on which
to Solely base deci$;ons and pl.:Jn· m.1ncul·crs to.noid terrain or obstacles.
3. To avoid giving unwanted alerts, TERRAIN should be inhibited 'when. landing at an airport that is not
included in the airport database.
4. Pilots are NOT authori.ied to deviate from their cWTent ATC clc:ironcc to comply with terrain/obstacle
alerts from a TERRAIN unit except as allowed by 14 CFR Part 91.3(b). TERRAIN unit alerts nrc
advisory only and arc not equivalent to warnings provided by a TAWS unit.
5. The TERRAIN databases have an area of coverage as dellliled below:
(a) The Terrain Database has on area of coverage from North 75° Latitude to South 60° Latitude in all
longitude~.
(b) The Airport Terrain Dalllbase has an area of coveroge that includes the United Slates, Canada,
Mexico, Latin America, and South America.
(c) The Obstacle Da!abase h.1s an area or coverage th•t includes the United Stotes.
NOTE: The area of coverage may be modified, ns additional terrnio dala sources become available.
190·00140-14 Rev A Page2

FAA APPROVED
vulcanair':= Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT Q
SUPPLEMENT Q
GARMIN GMA 340 AUDIO PANEL

SECTION 1 - GENERAL

Flight Manual when the Garmin GMA 340 Audio Panel is installed as per
change No. MOD.P68/ 12.
Ai rplane Flight Manual. For limitations, procedures and performance
DESCRIPTION
The Garmin GMA 340 Audio Panel consists of a single rack-mounted

unit with LED push-button selection ofboth NA V and COM audio. The unit
also includes a dual sensitivity Marker Beacon receiver with lamps, and a
six-position intercom.
All operating controls arc mounted on the front of the audio panel.
Controls arc identified in Figure 1.
The GMA 340 Audio Panel provides an intuitive interface for essential
audio switching functions. Single button activation ofCOM microphone and
audio for up to three transceivers simplifies cockpit workload, and a
fail-safe circuit connects the pilot's headset and microphone directly to
COM I should power be interrupted or the unit be inadvertently switched
off.
A split COM transceiver function enables the pilot to transmit and

receive on COM I while the co-pilot transmits and receives on COM 2.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Pag. I of7
Section 8 VUICC:lnc.ur -. i
SUPPLEMENT Q P68C
OPERATION
8
7
Figure I
I. MARKER BEACON LAMPS

2. MARKER BEACON RECEIVER SENSITIV ITY LED's
3. MARKER BEACON RECEIVER AU DIO SELECT/MUTE
4. MARKER BEACON RECEIVER SENSITIVITY SELECT
5. UN IT ON/OFF, PILOT res VOLUME
6. PILOT JCS VOICE ACTIVATED (VOX) SQUELCH LEVEL
7. COPILOT/ PAX JCS VOLUME (PULL FOR PAX VOLUME)
8. COPILOT/PAX VOX INTERCOM SQUELCH LEVEL
9. C REW ISOLATION INTERCOM MODE BUTTON
IO. PILOT ISOLATION INTERCOM MODE BUTTON
12 . ..rt. PASSENGER ADDRESS FUNCTION BUTTON
jl.~ S PEAKER FUNCTION BUTTON
13. TRANSCEIVER AUDIO SELECTOR (COM I, 2, 3)
BUTTONS
14. TRANS MITTER (AUDIO/M IC) SELECTION BUTTONS
15. SPLIT COM BUTTON
16. A IRCRAFT RADIO AUDIO SELECTION BUTTONS (NA V
I , 2, DME, ADF) .
17. ANNUNC IATOR TEST BUTTON

P68C SUPPLEMENT Q
ON, OFF AND FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
The Audio panel is powered off when the left (small) knob is rotated
fully counter clockwise into the detent. To turn the unit on, rotate the knob
clockwise past the click (detent) position. The knob then assumes the
function of pilot ICS volume control. A fail-safe circuit connects the pilot's
headset and microphone directly to COM 1 in case of a power loss.
LIGHTING
Button and Annunciator LED and Marker Beacon Lamp intensity are
controlled automatically by the built-in photocell in the centre of the front
panel.
TRANSCEIVERS
NOTE
Audio Level is controlled by the selected COM

radio volume controls.
Selection of either COM 1, COM 2, or COM 3 (if installed) for both

MIC and Audio source is accomplished by pressing either COM I MIC,
COM 2 MIC, or COM 3 MIC ( 14). Active COM audio is always heard in
the headphones.
In addition, each audio source may be independently selected by

pressing one of the COM buttons ( 13 ). Selected in this way, they remain
active as audio sources regardless of which transceiver has been selected for
microphone use.
Keying a microphone causes the active transceiver MIC button LED to
blink approximately once per second to indicate that the radio is
transmitting.
SPLIT COM
The COM 1/2 button ( 15) activates the split COM function. When this
mode is active COM I is dedicated to the pilot for MIC/Audio while COM
2 is dedicated to the co-pilot for MIC/Audio. In this mode, simultaneous

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Pag. 3 of7
Section 8 vu1carn::ur -llllli
SUPPLEMENT Q P68C
transmissions arc possible over separate radios. Both pilots can still listen
to COM 3, NA V I, NA V 2, DME, ADF and MKR as selected. Pushing the
button a second time cancels split COM mode.
When in split COM mode, the co-pilot may make PA announcements

while the pilot continues using COM I . Pressing the PA button ( 11) with
split COM mode activated outputs the pilot's mic. to the cabin speaker. A
second press of the PA button returns the co-pilot to normal split COM
operation.
AIRCRAFT RADIOS AND NAVIGATION
P.rcssing NA V I, NA V 2, DME, ADF ( 16) or MKR (3) selects that

particular audio source. Audio level is controlled by the selected radio
volume control.
SPEAKER OUTPUT
Pressing the SPKR button ( 12) outputs aircraft radios to the cabin
speaker. Speaker output is muted when a COM microphone is keyed.
PA FUNCTION
Pushing the PA button activates PA mode. This function outputs pilot

and/or co-pilot microphone audio to the cabin speaker. If the SPKR button
is also active, any selected speaker audio is muted while the microphone is
keyed. PA function docs not depend on SPKR being previously active.
INTERCOM SYSTEM (ICS)
Intercom volume and squelch (VOX) levels a re adjusted using the

following front panel knobs:
LEFT SMALL (5) Unit ON/OFF, Pilot ICS volume

P68C SUPPLEMENT Q
LEFT LARGE (6) Pilot ICS mi c. YOX squelch

level.CW rotation increases the YOX
level necessary to break squelch. Full
CCW is " HOT M IC" position
RIGHT SMALL (7) IN Position - Co-pilot JCS volume

OUT Position - Passenger ICS
volume
RIGHT LARGE (8) Co-pilot and passenger ICS mic

YOX squelch level. CW rotation
increases the YOX level necessary to
break squelch. Full CCW is the
"HOT MIC" position
All mic inputs have dedicated VOX circuits to ensure that only the
active microphone(s) is/are heard when squelch is broken.
Three intercom modes are available: PILOT, CREW, and ALL. Select
ICS mode by pressing the PILOT or CREW buttons. The ALL mode is
active when neither PILOT or CREW LED's are lit. Press CREW button to
change from PILOT to CREW mode, and PILOT button to change from
CREW to PILOT mode. Active isolation mode is indicated by an
illuminated LED.
PILOT Mode Isolates, and dedicates the aircraft

radios exclusively to the pilot.
Co-pilot and passengers share
communications but cannot
communicate with the pilot or hear
aircraft radios
CREW Mode Places Pilot and Co-pilot on a

common ICS and aircraft radio
channel. Pa ssenge r s can
communicate with each other but
cannot communicate with either pilot
or hear the aircraft radios.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Pag. S of7
Section 8 VUll;i::IJ l dlf _..
SUPPLEMENT Q P68C
ALL Mode Full intercom communication and

aircraft radios may be heard by all.
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
The Marker Beacon is used as part of an ILS approach, and in some

instances to identify an airway. In addition to the normal Marker Beacon
functions, the GMA 340 provides an audio muting function. When the
aircraft passes over a 75MHz marker beacon transmitter, the lamps ( 1)
illuminate and the associated keytonc is heard (when MKR audio is
selected).
Marker Beacon controls are located on the left hand side of the front
panel. The SENS button (4) selects either high or low sensitivity and the
relative LED (2) will illuminate. Marker audio is initially selected by
pressing the MKR/mute button (3). If no signal is received, a second press
will deselect the the marker audio. If the button is pressed while a signal is
being received the signal will mute but not deselect. The button LED will
remain lit to indicate selection and when the marker signal is no longer
received the audio w ill be automatically un-muted. In the muted state,
pressing the MKR/mute button will deselect marker audio and the button
LED will extinguish. Marker lamps operate independently of any audio
selection.

There arc no changes to the airplane limitations when this avionic
equipment is installed.
The GMA 340 Audio Panel 1s subject to the following operating

limitations:
ALTITUDE
Maximum Operating Altitude is 50,000 Ft.

A.F.M. PIN NOR/0. 707-18
vulcanaira:l Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT Q
TEMPERATURE RANGE
The operating temperature range for the Audio Panel is -20 ° C (-4 • F) to
+ss· C(+ 131 · F).

There are no changes to the airplane emergency procedures when this
avionic equipment is installed.

Tum on the unit by rotating the left hand small knob clockwise past the
detent. Select mic and audio sources and set volume and squelch levels as
required.
There is no change to airplane performance when this avionic equipment
is installed.
SECTION 6 - EQUIPMENT LIST WEIGHT AND

BALANCE
The installation of the GMA 340 Audio Panel is listed as item Kl 7(a) in
the "P68C Equipment List" PIN NORl0.719- 1.
Rev. 6
with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 March 2004 Page 7 of 7
P68C SUPPLEMENT R
SUPPLEMENT R
GARMIN GTX 320/320A

TRANSPONDER
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
Flight Manual when the Garmin GTX 320/320A Transponder is installed as I
per change No. MOD.P68/l 3.
DESCRIPTION
The Garmin GTX 320/320A Transponder is a rack mounted radio I

transmitter and receiver unit which operates on radar frequencies. The
transponder receives a ground radar interrogation signal on a frequency of
I030 MHz to which it replies with a coded response on a freq uency of I 090
MHz. The transponder reply may be any one of 4 ,096 codes which differ in
the position and number of transmitted pulses, and allows ground-based
ATC radar to display aircraft identification, altitude, and ground speed. The
unit is also equipped with an !DENT function that displays a Special
Position Identification (SPI) pulse for approximately 20 seconds on the
controller's scope.
Transponder range is limited to "line of s ight". Low altitude or antenna

shielding by the aircraft itself may result in reduced range. C limbing to a
higher altitude, or ensuring that antenna shielding is limited to abnormal
flight attitudes can improve range performance.
Rev. 2
DATE: MAY 7, 2003 Pag. I ofS
SUPPLEMENT R P68C
All operating controls are mounted on the front of the transponder.

Controls are identified in Figure I.
OPERATION
IDENT BUTTON REPLY LIGHT
CODE SELECTOR KNOBS

FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCH
Figure I
FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCH
A five- position rotary switch. The five positions are:
OFF Tums OFF all power to the transponder

(Unit should be OFF before engine start)
SBY Transponder ON, but will not reply to ground

interrogations
ON Transponder placed in MODE A (identification mode).

Transponder will reply to MODE C altitude
inte rrogations with signals that do not contain altitude
information.
ALT Activates the transponder to altitude digitizer circuitry in

order to reply to ATC identification and altitude
interrogations with the standard pressure altitude of
1013.32 mB (29.92 in. Hg.).

Pag. 2 ors DATE: MAY7,2002
vulcanairs:I Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT R
TST Tests the reply light. This position is spring loaded, and
must be held momentarily. When released, the knob
returns to the ALT position
The transponder is active whenever the Function Selector knob is in the

ON or ALT position. Select one of these positions as late as is practical
before takeoff, and switch to OFF or SBY after completing the landing roll
(unless a switch to SBY is requested earlier by ATC).
CODE SELECTOR KNOBS
Four eight position switches numbered from 0 to 7, providing 4,096

possible active identification codes.
The selected code should be as directed by ATC or in accordance with

instructions for IFR flight or rules applicable to transponder utilisation for
VFR flight.
When making routine code changes, care should be taken not to

inadvertently select the following codes which trigger alarms at automated
ground facilities:
7500- Hijack (Assigned by ATC only after notification

by the pilot that the aircraft is subject to
unlawful interference)
7600 - Loss of Communications
7700 - Emergency (All SSR sites are ready to receive

this code at all times)
Pay attention for example, when changing from code 2700 to code 7200.
Switch first to 2200 then to 7200 as opposed to 7700 then 7200.
This procedure applies to nondiscrete code 7500 and all discrete 7600
and 7700 series codes (7600-7677, 7700-7777).
The aircraft transponder code is used to enhance ATC tracking

capabilities, therefore do not turn the transponder to SBY when making
code changes.

Section 8 vulcanair-=
SUPPLEMENT R P68C
See the Airman's Information Manual (or equivalent) for a detailed

explanation of identification codes.
IDENT BUTTON
Used whenever an ATC controller requests "SQUAWK IDENT".
Momentarily press and release the IDENT button to activate the Special
Position Identification pulse that will appear on the controller's scope for
approximately 20 seconds to identify your transponder return from other
aircraft on the display.
REPLY LIGHT
The REPLY LIGHT illuminates each time the transponder replies to a

ground radar interrogation. It also remains lit during the IDENT time
interval.

There are no changes to the airp lane limitations when this avionic
The GTX 320/320A transponder is subject to the following operating

limitations:
ALTITUDE
TEMPERATURE RANGE
Continuous Operation temperature range for the transponder is -20° C

(-4' F) to +55° C (+ 131 ° F).
Rev. 2
Pag. 4 ofS DATE: MAY7,2003
A.F.M. PIN NORI0.707-IB
P68C SUPPLEMENT R


Turn the Function Selector Switch to the ON or ALT position. Select
one of these positions as late as is practical before takeoff, and switch to
OFF or SBY after completing the landing roll (unless a switch to SBY is
requested earlier by ATC).
There is no change to airplane performance when this avionic equipment
is installed.
SECTION 6 - EQUIPMENT LIST

WEIGHT AND BALANCE
The installation of the GTX 320 Audio Panel is listed as item Kl 7(b)
in the "P68C Equipment List" PIN NORl0.7 19-1.
Rev. 6
with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 March 2004 Page 5 ofS
This page intentionally lcll blank
P68C SUPPLEMENT R/1
SUPPLEMENT R/l
GARMIN GTX 330

TRANSPONDER
SECTION I -GENERAL
Flight Manual when the Garmin GTX 330 Transponder is installed as per
change No. MOD.P68/55.
DESCRIPTION
The Garmin GTX 330 panel mounted Mode A, Mode B and Mode S
Transponder is a radio transmitter and receiver unit which operates on radar
frequencies. The transponder receives a ground radar interrogation signal on
a frequency of I 030 MHz to which it replies with a coded response on a
frequency of 1090 MHz. The transponder reply may be any one of 4,096
codes which differ in the position and number of transmitted pulses, a nd
allows ground-based A TC radar to display aircraft identification, altitude,
and ground speed. The unit is also equipped with an IDENT function that
displays a Special Position Identification (SP!) pulse for approximately 20
seconds on the controller's scope.
The GTX 330 Mode S transponder provides a data link for Tra ffic
Information Service (TIS).
Rev. I
DATE: MARCH 11, 2003 Pag. I of3
vulcanair-:= Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT R/I
Note
TIS function is disabled as per change No. MOD.P68/SS
(Refer to "Operating Limitations" Section 2, of this Supplement).
In addition to 4096 code and pressure altitude, the GTX 330 is capable
of transmitting aircraft registration number or flight ID, transponder
capability and maximum speed range.
Transponder range is limited to " li ne of sight". Low altitude or antenna

shielding by the aircraft itself may result in reduced range. Climbing to a
higher altitude, or ensuring that antenna shielding is limited to abnormal
flight attitudes can improve range performance.
All operating controls are mounted on the front ofthe transponder (Refer
to fig. 1). For control keys functions refer to GARMIN "GTX 330 Pilot's
Guide" PIN 190-00207-00 Rev. A, dated September 2002, or later
appropriate revision.
Figure I
SECTION 2-0PERATING LIMITATIONS

The GTX 330 transponder 1s subject to the following operating

limitations:
ALTITUDE
Rev. I
ENAC Approval No.: 03/171 I03/SPA
Pag. 2 of3 DATE: MARCH 11, 2003
A.F.!11. PIN NOHI0.707-18
vulcanairs:; Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT R/1
TEMPERATURE RANGE
(-49° F) to +70° C (+ 158° F).
TIS "TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE"

This supplement is not approved for TIS function.


Normal operating procedures are described in the GARMfN "GTX 330
Pilot's Guide" PIN 190-00207-00 Rev. A, dated September 2002 or later
appropriate revision.
For TIS operation with Garmin GNS 430/530 refer to "4001500 series
GARMIN Display Interface Pilot's Guide Addendum" PIN 190-00140-1 3
Rev. A, dated November 2002, or later appropriate revision.
There is no change to airplane performance when this avionic

WEIGHT AND BALANCE
The installation of the GTX 330 Audio Panel is listed as item Kl 7(g)
in the "P68C Equipment List" PIN NOR 10.719- 1.
Rev. 6
with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 March 2004 Pag. 3 of3
A.f~M. PIN NORI0. 707-IB
P68C SUPPLEMENT R/2
SUPPLEMENT R/2
GARMIN GTX 327

DIGITAL DISPLAY T RANSPONDER SYSTEM
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
Flight Manual when the Garmin GTX 327 Digital Display Transponder
System is installed as per change No. MOD.P68/63.
When the Garmin GTX 327 Digital Display Transponder

System is installed and operative, the following document
must be carried in the aircraft at all times:
GARMIN "GTX 327 Mode A/C Transponder" Pilot's
G uide PIN 190-00187-00 Rev. B, dated October 2002,
or later approved revision.
DESCRIPTION
The Garmin GTX 327 is a panel-mounted Mode A/Mode C Transponder

wi th addition of altitude reporting and timing functions. The Transponder
is a radio transmitter a nd receiver that operates on radar frequencies,
receiving ground radar or TCAS interrogations at I 030 MHz and
transmitting a coded response of pulses to ground-based radar on a
frequency of 1090 MHz.
Rev. 8
with No. AS-AFM/04/009 on 28 May 2004 Pag. I of3
,.,.,·.1u. r 11" JYVn 1v.1u 1-11J
Section 8 vulcanairS:
SUPPLEMENT R/2 P68C
The GTX 327 replies with any one of 4,096 codes, which differ in the
position and number of pulses transmitted. By replying to ground
transmissions orTCAS interrogations, the GTX 327 enables ATC to display
aircra ft identification, altitude and groundspeed on ATC radar screens or
TCAS traffic indicators. The GTX 327 is equipped with IDENT capability
that activates the Special Position ldenti ti cation (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds.
Transponder range is limited to " line of sight". Low altitude or antenna

shielding by the aircraft itself may result in reduced range. Climbing to a
higher altitude, or ensuring that antenna shielding is limited to abnonnal
flight attitudes can improve range perfonnance.
The GTX 327 Digital Display Transponder System is powered to 28

Vdc by the Avionic Bus and is protected by a " XPDR" 3 Amp. circuit
breaker..
All operating controls are mounted on the front ofthe transponder (Refer
to fig. I). For control keys functions refer to GARMIN "GTX 327 Mode
AIC Transponder" Pilot's Guide PIN 190-00187-00 Rev. B, dated October
2002, or later approved revision.
Figure I
GTX 327 FRONT PANEL
Rev. 8
Pag. 2 of3 with No. AS-AFM/04/009 on 28 May 2004
A.f~M. PIN NOHI0. 707-IB
P68C SUPPLEMENT R/2

The GTX 327 transponder is subject to the following operating

limitations:
ALTITUDE
TEMPERATURE RANGE
(-4° F) to +ss· c (+ 131 · F).


Normal operating procedures are described in the GARMIN "GTX 327
Mode A/C Transponder" Pilot's Guide PIN 190-001 87-00 Rev. B, dated
October 2002, or later approved revision.
There is no change to airplane performance when this avionic

WEIGHT AND BALANCE
The installation o f the GTX 327 Transponder is listed as item K 17(h) in
the "P68C Equipment List" PIN NORl0.719-1.
Rev. 8
Approved under Authority of DOA No. EASA.2 IJ .009
with No. AS-AFM/04/009 on 28 May 2004 Pag. 3 of3
P68C SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENTS
GARMIN GNS 430

VHF COMM UNI CATIONS TRANSCEIVER
VOR/ILS RECEIVER/GPS RECEIVER
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
Flight Manual when the Garmin GNS 430 System is installed as per change
No. MOD.P68/14.
The information contained herein supple ments the basic approved
information not contained in this supple ment consult the basic approved
DESCRIPTION
The Gannin GNS 430 System is a fully integrated panel-mounted unit

which contains a VHF Communications Transceiver, a VOR/ILS Receiver
and a Global Positioning System (GPS) Navigation computer.
System components include a GPS Antenna, GPS Receiver, VHF
VOR/LOC/GS Antenna, VOR/ILS Receiver, VHF COMM Antenna and a
VHF Communications Transceiver.
The GPS Receiver is to be used for supplemental navigation in IFR
En-Route and for Non-Precision Approaches.
NOTE
The GNS 430 VHr Radi os installed in this aircraft are
set to operate with a frequency spacing of25 Khz.
Should it be necessary to operate the radios using the
alternative frequency spacing of 8.33 Khz, change the
AUX group Setup 2 settings as described on the
GARMIN GNS 430 Pilot's Guide and Re ference.
Rev. I
DATE: MARCH 11, 2003 Pag. I of 13
Section 8 vulcanair e11
SUPPLEMENTS P68C
Providing the Garmin GNS 430 GPS Receiver is receiving adequate

signals, it has been demonstrated capable of, and has been shown to meet
the accuracy specifications for:
VFR/IFR en-route, tem1inal and non-precision instrument approaches

(GPS, Loran - C, VOR, VOR-DME, TACAN, NOB, NDB-DME)
operations.
GPS navigation is accomplished using the WGS-84 (NAD-83)

co-ordinate reference datum (a World Geodetic Survey carried out in 1984
that established an accurately plotted ellipsoid upon which all GPS positions
are based). The resulting Navigational data is based upon use of only the
Global Positioning System (GPS) operated by the United States ofAmerica.
Note: The Jeppesen database incorporated in the Garmin GNS 430

Unit must be updated regurarly in order to ensure that its
information is current. Updates are released every 28 days. A
database information packet is included in your GARMIN GNS
430 Unit package. Pilots using an out-of-date database do so
entirely at their own risk.
GPS OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS
EN-ROUTE TERMINAL
Traditional approved IFR Traditional approved IFR

navigation equipment will navigation equipment will
need to be available to need to be available to
continue the flight when continue the flight when
integrity is lost. Integrity may integrity is lost. Integrity
be provided by RAIM or may be provided by RAIM
equivalent or equivalent
For application of these conditions:
a. The ground-based aids along the route to be flown, or ground

based aids for RNA V- Routes must be operational;
b. Aircraft equipment, other than GPS, suitable for the route to be

flown, must be serviceable.
Rev. I
Pag. 2 of 13 DATE: MARCH 11, 2003
P68C SUPPLEMENTS
OPERATION
COM Flip-Flop CLEAR DIRECT TO
RANGE_
MENU
ENTER
COMNLOC CONTROL CURSOR CONTROL (CRSR)
Figure 1
e Unit power and communications radio

volume. Press to disable automatic squelch.
e VOR/Localiser frequency audio volume.

Press to enable/disable the ident tone.
0 Tunes MHz value of the standby frequency

for either the COM Transceiver or VLOC
Receiver, whichever is currently selected by
the tuning cursor.
Tunes kHz value of the standby frequency for

either the COM Transceiver or VLOC
Receiver, as selected by the tuning cursor.
Press to toggle tuning cursor between COM
and VLOC frequency fields.
Transfers between active and standby COM

frequencies. Press and hold to select the
emergency channel ( 121.500 Mhz).
Transfers between active and standby VLOC

frequencies (makes selected standby active).

DATE: MAY7,2002 Pag. 3 of 13
SUPPLEMENTS P68C
Selects desired map scale. Use UP arrow to

zoom out to a larger displayed area and the
DOWN arrow to zoom into a smaller area.
Direct To establishes a direct course to a

selected way-point.
Displays a context-sensitive list of options.

The list allows the user to access additional
features or to make setting changes to the
currently displayed page.
Clears information or cancels an entry. Press

and hold to visualise the Default Navigation
Page.
Approves an operation or completes data

entry.
0 Selects between various page groups (NAV,

WPT, AUX, or NRST). Allows cursor
movement around the page.
Selects between the pages within one of the

above groups.
Press momentarily to enable the on-screen
cursor which allows data entry or option
selection to be made.
Selects which Navigation source (GPS or

VLOC) outputs to the HSI or COi.
Selects automatic or manual way-point

sequencing. Press to select OBS mode which
retains the current "active to" way-point as
the navigation source (prevents sequencing).
Press again to resume nonnal way-point
sequencing. Course may be set from the OBS
page or with the external selector.

Pag. 4 of 13 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
P68C SUPPLEMENTS
Allows Creation/Editing/Activation/Invers-
ion of flight plans. Also accesses Approa-
ches, Departures and An-ivals.
Selects/ Removes Approaches, Departures

and An-ivals from a flight plan. Available
procedures for departure and arrival airport
are offered automatically, or may be selected
as desired.

There are no changes to the airplane limitations when this avionic
The GNS 430 System is subject to the following operating limitations:
I. The GARMIN GNS 430 Pilot's Guide, P/ N 190-00140-00

Rev.A dated October 1998 (or a later appropriate revision) must
be immediately available to the flight crew whenever navigation
is predicated on the use of the system.
2. The GNS 430 system must utilise the following or later FAA
approved software versions:
SUB-SYSTEM SOFTWARE VERSION
MAIN 2
GPS 2
COMM 1.22
YOR/LOC 1.25
G/S 2
The Main software version is displayed on the self-test page for 5

seconds immediately after system power up. Remaining software versions
may be verified on the AUX group s ub-page 2, "SOFTWARE/DATABASE
VER".

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Pag. 5of13
SUPPLEMENTS P68C
3. !FR en-route and terminal navigation predicated upon the GNS

430 GPS receiver is prohibited unless both database currency
and selected waypoint accuracy are verified by reference to
current approved data.
4. Instrument approach/departure navigation must be accom-

plished in accordance with approved procedures retrieved from
the GPS equipment database. The GPS equipment database must
incorporate the current update cycle and the coding must support
the officially published SID/STAR. When flying SID/STAR's,
the procedure established by the State of the aerodrome has to
be authorised/published by that State for the use of GPS. The
State of operator/registry (as applicable) must have authorised
the use of multi-sensor equipment using GPS as one sensor, or
G PS class A 1 equipment for the purpose oftlying non-precision
approaches.
a) Instrument approaches must be conducted in the approach

mode and Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
(RA IM) must be available at the final approach fix. The
database infonnation must be presented to the crew in the
order shown on the published non-precision approach plate.
The published procedure must be identified as a GPS
approach.
b) Accomplishment oflLS, LOC, LOC-BC, LOA, SDF, MLS

or any other type of approach not approved for G PS overlay
is not authorised.
c) Use of the GNS 430 VOR/ILS Receiver to fly approaches

not approved for GPS, require VOR/ILS Navigation to be
displayed on the external indicator.
d) lfno destination alternate is required, at least one non-GPS

based approach must be available at the destination airport.
When an alternate airport is required by applicable operating
rules, it must be served by an approach based on other than
GPS or LORAN-C navigation, the aircraft must be equipped
to use that navigation aid, and the required navigation aid
must be operational. RAIM or equivalent must be avai lable
at the expected time ofarrival. A missed approach procedure
based on traditional navigation must be available.

Pag. 6of13 DATE: MAY7,2002
vulcanair • Section·s
P68C SUPPLEMENTS
e) VNA V infonnation may be utilised for advisory infonnation

only. Use of VNA V infonnation for Instrument Approach
Procedures does not guarantee Step-Down Fix Altitude
Protection, or arrival at approach minimums in nonnal
position to land.
5. The aircraft must have other approved navigation equipment

installed and operating appropriately to the route of flight.
Associated ground based aids along the route must be
operational.
6. GPS positional data is referenced to the WGS-84 or NA D-83

geodetic datums. When flying through airspace where these
references are not applicable to published charts, GPS
navigation infonnation shall be used in an advisory capacity
only, and navigation must be carried out by using published
charts referenced to the correct datum.
The following units must be 'default' in the GNS 430 " SETUP l"
menu:
Navigation Units (dis, spd) nm kt Nautical Miles and Knots
Altitude Units (alt, vs) ft fpm Feet and Feet per Minute
Geodetic Data (map datum) WGS-84 WGS-84
Positional Units (posn) deg-min Degrees, Minutes
ABNORMAL PROCEDURES
1. If GNS 430 navigation data is unavailable or invalid, utilise

operational navigation equipment as required.
2. If " RA IM POSITION WARNING" message is displayed, the

system will flag, and GPS positional based guidance will no
longer be provided. The crew should revert to the GNS 430
VOR/ILS Receiver.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Pag. 7of13
SUPPLEMENT S P68C
3. If "RAIM IS NOT AVAILABLE" message is displayed in the

En-Route, Tenninal, or Initial Approach phase of flight,
continue to navigate using GPS or revert to an alternate means
of navigation appropriate to the route and phase offlight. Where
navigation is continued using the GPS Receiver, positional
infonnation must be verified every 15 minutes by data
originating from another !FR Approved Navigation System.
4. If " RAIM IS NOT AVAILABLE" message is displayed while

on the Final Approach segment, GPS navigation will continue
for up to 5 minutes with approach CDI sensitivity (0.3 nm).
After 5 minutes the system will flag and no longer provide
course guidance with approach sensitivity. Missed approach
course guidance may still be available with 1 nm CDI sensitivity
by executing the missed approach.
5. In an in-flight emergency situation, pressing and holding the

COM transfer button for 2 seconds will select the emergency
frequency of 121.500 MHz into the "Active" frequency window.

1. Nonna) operating procedures are described in the GARMIN
GNS 430 Pilot's Guide, PIN 190-00140-00 Rev. A, dated
October 1998 (or a later appropriate Revision).
2. APPROACH MODE SEQUENCING AND SYSTEM

ANNUNCIATORS:
a) Use the PROC key to select the desired approach.
b) Choose the !AF from the transitions window and select
"Load?" If carrying out an ILS approach, the ILS frequency
is automatically placed in the VLOC window standby field.
Use the VLOC flip-flop key to place it in the active
frequency field as required.
c) Within 30 nm range the GNS 430 will automatically switch
from En-Route (ENR) mode to Terminal (TERM) mode,
and the default NA V page CDI scale will transition from a
full-scale deflection of 5.0 nm to 1.0 nm.

Pag. 8of13 DATE: MAY7,2002
P68C SUPPLEMENTS
d) Adequate way-point alert messages (NEXT DTK 030°) wi ll

appear in the lower right comer of the screen . As the
distance to the way-point in the distance field approaches
zero, the way-point alert will be replaced by a tum advisory
(TURN TO 030°).
e) Procedural turns are advised by the "START PROC TRN"
message.
t) For ILS approaches, once established on the inbound
approach course to the FAF, CDI coupling will
automatically switch from GPS to VLOC if the ILS
frequency has been activated, and 0.30 nm will appear in the
lower right message window signifying a COi scale
transition from 1.0 nm to 0.3 nm. At 2.0 nm from the FAF,
the GPS Receiver will switch from Terminal mode (TERM)
to Approach (APR) mode.
g) As the FAF is crossed, the next indicated way-point is the
MAP. As the MAP is approached, "APPRCHING WPT"
appears in the bottom rig ht comer of the screen. As the
MAP is crossed, a " FROM" indication is displayed on the
external COi.
3. The GNS 430 RAIM prediction capability ensures that available

satellite geometry will allow the receiver to calculate a position
to within 2 nm during the En-Route phase, within lnm for the
Terminal phase, and within 0.3 nm during a non-precision
approach. IfRAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, an
INTEG annunciation is generated and a missed approach must
be flown.
4. SYSTEM ANNUNCIATORS
The GNS 430 system annunciators are integrated into the LCD
display. The following is a description of the main annunciators
that indicate system or navigation status. For all other
annunciators, refer to the GNS 430 Pilot's Guide and Reference.
WAY-POINT ANNUNCIATORS
Appear in the lower right ofthe screen, momentarily replacing the PAGE
GROUP infonnation.
Rev. l
ENAC Approval No.: 03/ l7l l03/SPA
DATE: MARCH l l, 2003 Pag. 9of13
Section 8 vulcanair ..
SUPPLEMENTS P68C
NEXT DTK ### 0 : Warns ofan impending course change with

heading;
TURN T0 ### 0 : Supplies turn point and heading indication;
START PROC TRN: Indicates start of procedural turn;
APPRCHING WPT: Warns of way-point approach.
MESSAGE ANNUNCIATOR
System messages are indicated by a flashing MSG annunciator

immediately above the MSG key on the front panel. For all possible
messages re fer to the appropriate section in the GNS 430 Pilot's Guide and
Reference.
)
APPROACH ANNUNC IATOR
The approach annunciator APR appears in the upper of the two windows
immediately below the YLOC frequency window, as do the:
NA VI GATl ON (PHASE OF FLIGHT) ANNUNCIATORS
ENR: Signifies En-Route navigation phase;

TERM: Signifies entry into Tenninal manoeuvring
phase;
INTEGRITY (RA IM) WARN INGS
Appear in the lower of the two windows below the YLOC frequency
window.
INTEG: Receiver Integrity warning;

WARN: No calculated position available.

Pag. IO of 13 DATE: MAY7,2002
vulcanai1- • Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENTS
NA YIGATION SOURCE ANNUNCIATOR
Immediately above the CD! key on the front panel.
YLOC: Navigation source is YOR/LOC Receiver;

GPS: Navigation source is GPS Receiver.
PILOT'S DISPLAY
GNS 430 navigation data is transferred to the pilot's HSI. Data source
is either G PS or YLOC as annunciated on the display above the front panel
C D! button.
CURSOR MAP DISPLAY

COM WINDOW_ I
jAcnvE
ISTANDBY --
DISTANCE
FREQUENCIES
I ACTIVE
~NOBY
GROUND
SPEED
NAVIGATION SOURCE SYSTEM MESSAGE PAGE GROUP NUMBER OF PAGES

ANNUNCIATOR ANNUNCIATOR ANNUNCIATOR IN GROUP
(active page highlighted)
Figure 2
A typical GNS 430 map page appears in the above illustration. The
system annunciators are an integral part of the display, and appear above the
control keys on the front panel. Approach and Way-point/Track
Annunciation appears in the lower right of the display, momentarily
replac ing annunciation of the active page group and relative number of
pages. The system message annunciator flashes above the MSG key until the
key is pressed, after which a dedicated. message page opens. Receiver
integrity (RAIM) warnings appear in the bottom left hand window under the
phase of flight annunciator. For detailed information on other navigation
pages and the data they contain, refer to the GNS 430 Pilot' s Guide and
Reference.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Pag. 11 ofl3
SUPPLEMENTS P68C
AUTOPILOT/FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
GNS 430 steering infonnation may be coupled to the autopilot/flight

director by engaging the autopilot or flight director in NA V or APP mode.
When the autopilot/flight director is using GNS 430 course infonnation

and the course pointer is not automatically driven to the desired track, the
HSI course pointer must be manually set to the desired track (DTK)
indicated on the GNS 430. For detailed autopilot/flight director operational
instructions, refer to the appropriate supplement in the ENAC Approved
Flight Manual.
CROSS-FILL OPERATIONS
A flight-plan cross-fill capability exists for the dual GNS 430

installation. Refer to the GNS 430 Pilot's Guide for detailed cross-fill
operating instructions.
AUTOMATIC LOCALISER COURSE CAPTURE
The Automatic Localiser Course Capture feature is enabled by default.

This feature provides a method for system navigation data present on
external indicators to be switched automatically from GPS guidance to
Localiser/Glide-slope guidance at the course intercept point on a localiser
at which GPS derived course deviation equals localiser derived course
deviation. If an offset from the final approach course is being flown, it is
possible that the automatic GPS/ Localiser/GS Guidance switch will not
occur. It is the pilot's responsibility to ensure that correct system navigation
data is present on the external indicator before continuing a localiser based
approach beyond the final approach fix.
STORMSCOPE DATA DISPLAY
The GNS 430 displays weather information generated by the Goodrich

WX-500 Stonnscope System. From the default map page, tum the small
right knob to display the map page and press the " MENU" button to set up
the unit to display weather information. Refer to the GNS 430 Pilot's Guide
Addendum and WX-500 User's Guide for correct display setup and clearing
procedures, and for detailed instructions on data interpretation.
Rev. I
Pag.12ofl3 DATE: MARCH 11 , 2003
A.F.111. PIN NOR /0.707-18
vulcanair. Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENTS
All atmospheric electromagnetic discharge activity is represented by a

lightning flash symbol, while the relative mode (either Strike or Cell) and
associated discharge rate annunciation appears in the top right comer, this
estimate rate may be used by Pilot to detennine is storm cells are building
or decaying. Weather data appears on the display relative to aircraft heading
and position, out to the maximum Stormscope range of 200 nm.
NOTE: If aircraft is equipped with dual GNS 430 or GNS 530/GNS 430
systems, the weather information generated by the Goodrich WX-
500 Stormscope system will be displayed only on primary device.
There is no change to airplane performance when this equipment is
installed.

BALANCE
The GNS 430 installation is listed as items Kl 7(c) and Kl 7(d) in
the "P68C Equipment List" PIN NOR 10.719-1.
Rev. 6
with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 March 2004 Page 13 of 13
This page intentionally lefi blank
P68C SUPPLEMENTS/ I
SUPPLEMENT S/1
GARMIN GNS 530

VHF COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
VOR/ILS RECEIVER/GPS RECEIVER
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
Flight Manual when the Garmin GNS 530 System is installed as per change
No. MOD.P68/40.
DESCRIPTION
The Garmin GNS 530 System is a fully integrated panel-mounted unit

which contains a VHF Communications Transceiver, a VORJILS Receiver
and a Global Positioning System (GPS) Navigation computer.
System components include a GPS Antenna, GPS Receiver, VHF
VORJLOC/GS Antenna, VORJILS Receiver, VHF COMM Antenna and a
VHF Communications Transceiver.
The GPS Receiver is to be used for supplemental navigation in IFR
En-Route and for Non-Precision Approaches.
NOTE
The GNS 530 VHF Radios installed in this aircraft are
set to operate with a frequency spacing of25 Khz.
Shou ld it be necessary to operate the radios using the
alternative frequency spacing of 8.33 Khz, change the
AUX group Setup settings as described on the
GARM IN GNS 530 Pilot's Guide and Reference.
Rev. I
DATE: MARCH II, 2003 Pag. I of 14
S UPPLEMENT S/ 1 P68C
Providing the Gann in GNS 530 GPS Receiver is receiving adequate

signals, it has been demonstrated capable of, and has been shown to meet
the accuracy specifications for:
VFR/IFR en-route, terminal and non-precision instrument approaches

(G PS, Loran - C, YOR, YOR-DM E, T ACAN, NOB, NDB-DME)
operations.
GPS navigation is accomplished using the WGS-84 (NAD-83)

co-ordinate reference datum (a World Geodetic Survey carried out in 1984
that established an accurately plotted ellipsoid upon which all GPS positions
arc based). The resulting Navigational data is based upon use o f only the
Global Positioning System (GPS) operated by the United States ofAmerica.
Note: The Jeppesen database incorporated in the Garmin GNS 530

Unit must be updated regurarly in order to ensure that its
information is current. Updates are released every 28 days. A
database information packet is included in your GARMI N GNS
530 Unit package. Pilots using an out-of-date database do so
entirely at their own risk.
GPS OPERAT IONAL CONDITIONS
EN-ROUTE T ERMINAL
Traditional approved IFR Traditional approved IFR

navigation equipment will navigation equipment will
need to be available to need to be available to
continue the flight when continue the flight when
integrity is lost. integrity integrity is lost. integrity
may be provided by RAIM may be provided by RAJ M
or equivalent or equivalent
For application of these conditions:
a. The ground-based aids along the route to be flown, or ground

based aids for RNA Y- Routes must be operational;
b. Aircraft equipment, other than GPS, suitable for the route to be

flown, must be serviceable.
Rev. I
Pag. 2 of 14 DAT E: MARCH 11, 2003
P68C SUPPLEMENT Sil
OPERATION
cor.1
VLOC Volume
lEft.R
LARGE KNOB
SMALL KNOB
r:n1 OBS M SG cpl VNft1/ PROC
Figure I
e Unit power and communications radio

volume. Press to disable automatic squelch.
e VOR/Localiser frequency audio volume.

Press to enable/disable the ident tone.
0
Tunes MHz value of the standby frequency
Receiver, whichever is currently selected by
the tuning cursor.
~
Tunes kHz value of the standby frequency
Receiver, as selected by the tuning cursor.
Press to toggle tuning cursor between COM
and VLOC frequency fields.
I Transfers between active and standby COM

frequencies. Press and hold to select the
emergency channel (1 2 1.500 Mhz).
Transfers between active and standby VLOC

frequencies (makes selected standby active).
Rev. I
DATE: MARCH 11, 2003 Pag. 3of14
SUPPLEMENT S/ 1 P68C
Selects desired map scale. Use UP arrow to

zoom out to a larger displayed area and the
DOWN arrow to zoom into a smaller area.
Direct To establishes a direct course to a

selected way-point.
Displays a context-sensitive list of options.

The list allows the user to access additional
features or to make setting changes to the
currently displayed page.
Clears information or cancels an entry. Press

and hold to visualise the Default Navigation
Page.
Approves an operation or completes data

entry.
0 Selects between various page groups (NAV,

WPT, AUX, or NRST). Allows cursor
movement around the page.
Selects between the pages within one of the
(j) above groups.

Press momentarily to enable the on-screen
cursor which allows data entry or option
selection to be made.
Selects which Navigation source (GPS or

VLOC) outputs to the HSI or CDI.
Selects automatic or manual way-point

sequencing. Press to select OBS mode which
retains the current "active to" way-point as
the navigation source (prevents sequencing).
Press again to resume normal way-point
sequencing. Course may be set from the OBS
page or with the external selector.
Rev. I
Pag. 4of14 DATE: MARCH 11, 2003
P68C SUPPLEMENT S/ l
View system messages and to alert you to

important warnings and requirements.
Allows Creation/Editing/Activation/Invers-
ion of flight plans. Also accesses Approa-
ches, Departures and Arrivals.
Allow to create a three-dimensional profile

which guides you to a final (target) altitude at
a specified location.
Selects/Removes Approaches, Departures and

Arrivals from a flight plan. A vailablc
procedures for departure and arrival airport
arc offered automatically, or may be selected
as desired.

There are no changes to the airplane limitations when this avionic
The GNS 530 System is subject to the following operating limitations:
I. The GARM IN GNS 530 Pilot's Guide, PIN 190-00181-00

Rev .A dated April 2000 (or a later appropriate revision) must be
immediately available to the flight crew whenever navigation is
predicated on the use of the system.
2. The GNS 530 system must utilise the following or later FAA
approved software versions:
SUB-SYSTEM SOFTWARE VERSION
MAIN 2.00
GPS 2.00
COMM 1.22
VOR/LOC 1.25
G/S 2.00
Rev. 1
DATE: MARCH 11, 2003 Pag. 5 of 14
SUPPLEMENT S/1 P68C
The Main software version is displayed on the self-test page for 5

seconds immediately after system power up. Remaining software versions
may be verified on the AUX group sub-page 2, "SOFTWARE/DATA BASE
VERSIONS".
3. lFR en-route and terminal navigation predicated upon the GNS

530 GPS receiver is prohibited unless both database currency
and selected waypoint accuracy are verified by reference to
current approved data.
4. Instrument approach/departure navigation must be accom-

plished in accordance with approved procedures retrieved from
the GPS equipment database. The GPS equipment database must
incorporate the current update cycle and the coding must support
the officially published SID/STAR. When fl~ SID/STAR's,
the procedure established by the State of the aerodrome has to be
authorised/published by that State for the use of GPS. The State
of operator/registry (as applicable) must have authorised the use
of multi-sensor equipment using GPS as one sensor, or GPS
class A 1 equipment for the purpose of flying non-precision
approaches.
a) Instrument approaches must be conducted in the approach

mode and Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
(RAIM) must be available at the final approach fix. The
database information must be presented to the crew in the
order shown on the published non-precision approach plate.
The published procedure must be identified as a GPS
approach.
b) Accomplishment oflLS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF, MLS

or any other type of approach not approved for G PS overlay
is not authorised.
c) Use of the GNS 530 YOR/ILS Receiver to fly approaches

not approved for GPS, requires VOR/ILS Navigation data to
be displayed on the external indicator.
d) If no destination alternate is required, at least one non-GPS

based approach must be available at the destination airport.
When an alternate airport is required by applicable operating
Rev. I
ENAC Approval No. : 03/171 103/SPA
Pag. 6of 14 DATE: MARCH 11 , 2003
P68C SUPPLl!:MENT S/ I
rules, it must be served by an approach based on other than

GPS or LORAN-C navigation, the a ircraft must be equipped
to use that navigation aid, and the required navigation a id
must be operational. RAIM or equivalent must be availa ble
at the expected time of arrival. A missed approach procedure
based on traditional navigation must be available.
e ) VNA V infonnation may be utilised for advisory infonnation

only. Use of VNA V information for Instrument Approach
Procedures does not guarantee Step-Down Fix A ltitude
Protection, or arrival at approach minimums in normal
position to land.
5. The ai rcraft must have other approved navigation equipment

installed and operating appropriately to the route of flight.
Associated ground based aids a long the route must be
operational.
6. GPS positional data is referenced to the WGS-84 or NA D-83

geodetic datums. When flying through a irspace where these
references are not applicable to published charts, GPS navigation
infonnation shall be used in an advisory capacity only, and
navigation must be carried out by using published charts
referenced to the correct datum.
The following units must be 'defiwlt' in the GNS 530 "SETUP 1" menu:
Navigation Units (dis, spd) nm kt Nautical Miles and Knots
Altitude Units (alt, vs) ft fpm Feet and Feet per Minute
Geodetic Data (map datum) WGS-84 WGS-84
Positional Units (posn) deg-min Degrees, Minutes
Rev. I
SUPPLEMENT S/ l P68C

ABNORMAL PROCEDURES
I. If GNS 530 navigation data is unavailable or invalid, utilise

operational navigation equipment as required.
2. If "RAIM POSITION WARNING" message is displayed, the

system will flag, and GPS positional based guidance will no
longer be provided. The crew should revert to the GNS 530
VOR/ILS Receiver.
3. If " RAIM IS NOT AVAILABLE" message is displayed in the

En-Route, Terminal, or initial Approach phase offlight, continue
to navigate using GPS or revert to an alternate means of
navigation appropriate to the route and phase of flight. Where
navigation is continued using the GPS Receiver, positional
information must be verified every 15 minutes by data
originating from another IFR Approved Navigation System.
4. If " RAIM IS NOT AVAILABLE" message is displayed while

on the Final Approach segment, GPS navigation will continue
for up to 5 minutes with approach CDI sensitivity (0.3 nm). After
5 minutes the system will flag and no longer provide course
guidance with approach sensitivity. Missed approach course
guidance may still be available with I nm CD! sensitivity by
executing the missed approach.
5. In an in-flight emergency situation, pressing and holding the

COM transfer button for 2 seconds will select the emergency
frequency of 121.500 MHz into the "Active" frequency window.
Rev. I
Pag. 8 of 14 DATE: MARCH 11, 2003
P68C SUPPLEMENTS/I

1. Normal operating procedures are described in the GARMIN
GNS 530 Pilot's Guide, PIN 190-00181-00 Rev. A, dated April
2000 (or a later appropriate Revision).
2. APPROACH MODE SEQUENCING AND SYSTEM

ANNUNCIATORS:
a) Use the PROC key to select the desired approach.
b) Choose the IAF from the transitions window and select
"Load?" If carryin~ out an ILS approach., the ILS frequency
is automatically placed in the VLOC window standby field.
Use the VLOC flip-flop key to place it in the active
frequency field as required.
c) Within 30 nm ran~e the GNS 530 will automatically switch
from En-Route (ENR) mode to Terminal (TERM) mode,
and the default NAV page CDI scale will transition from a
full-scale deflection of 5.0 nm to 1.0 nm.
d) Adequate way-point alert messages (NEXT DTK 030") will
appear in the lower right corner of the screen . As the
distance to the way-point in the distance field approaches
zero, the way-point alert will be replaced by a turn advisory
(TURN TO 030").
e) Procedural turns are advised by the "START PROC TRN"
mess~e.
t)For ILS approaches, once established on the inbound

approach course to the FAF, CDI couplin~ will
automatically switch from GPS to VLOC if the ILS
frequency has been activated, and 0.30 nm will appear in the
lower right message window signifying a CDI scale
transition from 1.0 run to 0.3 nm. At 2.0 nm from the FAF,
the GPS Receiver will switch from Terminal mode (TERM)
to Approach (APR) mode.
g) As the FAF is crossed, the next indicated way-point is the
MAP. As the MAP is approached. "APPRCHING WPT'
appears in the bottom right comer of the screen. As the
MAP is crossed, a ''FROM" indication is displayed on the
external CDI.
Rev. I
DATE: MARCH II , 2003 Pag. 9 of 14
SUPPLEMENT S/ l P68C
3. The GNS 530 RAIM prediction capability ensures that available

satellite _geometry will allow the receiver to calculate a position
to within 2 nm during the En-Route phase, within lnm for the
Terminal phase, and within 0.3 run during a non-precision
approach. ff RAIM is not available when crossin~ the FAF, an
INTEG annunciation is generated and a missed approach must
be flown.
4. SYSTEM ANNUNCIATORS
The GNS 530 system annunciators are inte_grated into the LCD
display. The followin~ is a description of the main annunciators
that indicate system or navigation status. For all other
annunciators, refer to the GNS 530 Pilot's Guide and Reference.
WAY-POINT ANNUNCIATORS
Appear in the lower right of the screen, momentarily replacing the PAGE
GROUP information.
NEXT DTK. ### . : Warns of an impending course change with

heading;
0
TURN TO### : Supplies turn Point and headin~ indication;
START PROC TRN: Indicates start of procedural turn;
APPRCHING WPT: Warns of way-point approach.
MESSAGE ANNUNCIATOR
System messages are indicated by a flashing MSG annunciator

immediately above the MSG key on the front panel. For all Possible
messages refer to the appropriate section in the GNS 530 Pilot's Guide and
Reference.
Rev. I
Pag.10ofl4 DATE: MARCH 11, 2003
P68C S UPPLEMENT S/1
APPROACH ANNUNCIATOR
The approach annunciator APR appears in the upper of the two windows
immediately below the VLOC frequency window, as do the:
NAVIGATION (PHASE OF FLIGHT) ANNUNCIATORS
ENR: Signifies En-Route naviJi;ation phase;

TERM: Signifies entry into Terminal manoeuvring
phase;
INTEGRITY (RAIM) WARNINGS
Appear in the lower of the two windows below the VLOC frequency
window.
INTEG: Receiver Intew:ity warnin_g;

WARN: No calculated position available.
NAVIGATION SOURCE ANNUNCIATOR
Immediately above the CDI key on the front panel.
VLOC: NaviJi;ation source is VOR/LOC Receiver;

GPS: Navigation source is GPS Receiver.
Rev. 1
ENAC Approva l No. : 03/17 1103/SPA
DATE: MA RC H 11, 2003 Pag. )) of 14
SUPPLEMENT S/1 P68C
PILOT'S DISPLAY
GNS 530 navigation data is transferred to the pilot' s HSI. Data source is
either GPS or VLOC as annunciated on the display above the front panel
CDlbutton.
CURSOR MAPOi$;A.l,Y
VLOC >\1NDOW
VLOC IOErH \1;1NOOW

(Use1-~ICC1:lblc)
PH•\SC OF FLIGHT
rNNUNC!ATOR
NAV!GA110"8 SOURCE SVSi ::M MESS.'\GE PAGE GROUP r-.ur-,1s::R OF PAGf:S

,\r.Jr JUNCIATOR /·NMUl•JCl/,TOR /,MMUNC IATOR l NCROUP
I Actrvc PJ:Oe h1Qh~r;h:C.-d)
Figure 2
A typical GNS 530 map pap;e appears in the above illustration. The
system annunciators are an integral part of the display, and appear above the
control keys on the front panel. Approach and Way-point/Track
Annunciation appears in the lower right of the display, momentarily
replacing annunciation of the active pap;e group and relative number of
pages. The system message annunciator flashes above the MSG key until the
key is pressed. after which a dedicated message pap;e opens. Receiver
inte_grity (RAIM) warnings appear in the bottom left hand window under the
phase of flight annunciator. For detailed information on other navigation
pages and the data they contain, refer to the GNS 530 Pilot's Guide and
Reference.
Rev. I
Pag. 12 of 14 DATE: MARCH 11 , 2003
A.f:M. PIN NOR/0. 707-18
P68C SUPPLEMENT S/1
AUTOPILOT/FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
GNS 530 steering information may be coupled to the autopilot/flight

director by engaging the autopilot or flight director in NA V or APR mode.
When the autopilot/flight director is using GNS 530 course information

and the course pointer is not automatically driven to the desired track, the
HSI course pointer must be manually set to the desired track (DTK)
indicated on the GNS 530. For detailed autopilot/flight director operational
instructions, refer to the appropriate supplement in the ENAC Approved
Flight Manual.
CROSS-FILL OPERATIONS
A fl ight-plan cross-fill capability exists for the dual GNS 530 or GNS
530/GNS 430 installation. Refer to the GNS 530 Pilot's Guide for detailed
cross-fill operating instructions.
AUTO MATIC LOCALISER COURS E CAPTURE
The Automatic Localiser Course Capture feature is enabled by default.

This feature provides a method for system navigation data present on
external indicators to be switched automatically from GPS guidance to
Localiser/Glide-slope guidance at the course intercept point on a localiser at
which GPS derived course deviation equals localiser derived course
deviation. If an o ffset from the final approach course is being flown, it is
possible that the automatic GPS/ Localiser/GS Guidance switch will not
occur. It is the pilot's responsibility to ensure that correct system navigation
data is present on the external indicator before continuing a localiser based
approach beyond the final approach fix.
STORMSCOPE DAT A DISPLAY
The GNS 530 displays weather information generated by the Goodrich

WX-500 Stormscope system. From the default map PaRe, turn the small right
knob to display the map page and press the "MENU'' button to set up the
writ to display weather information. Refer to the GNS 530 and WX-500
Pilot's Guides for correct display setup and clearing procedures, and for
detailed instructions on data interpretation.
Rev. I
A.J·:/11. PIN NOR JO. 707-1/J
Section 8 vulcanair ~
SUPPLEMENTS/I P68C
All atmospheric electromagnetic discharge activity is represented by a

lightning flash symbol, while the relative mode (either Strike or Cell) and
associated discharge rate annunciation appears in the top right corner, this
estimate rate may be used by Pilot to detennine is storm cells are building
or decaying. Weather data appears on the display relative to aircraft heading
and position, out to the maximum Stormscope range of200 nm.
NOTE: If aircraft is equipped with dual GNS 530 or GNS 530/GNS 430
systems, the weather infonnation generated by the Goodrich WX-
500 Stonnscopc system will be displayed only on primary device.
There is no change to airplane perfonnance when this equipment is
installed.

BALANCE
The GNS 530 installation is listed as items Kl7(e) and KI7(f)
in the "P68C Equipment List" PIN NORI0.7 19-1.
Rev. 6
Page 14 of 14 with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 March 2004
vulcanair';; Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT T
SUPPLEMENT T
AERIAL SURVEY CONFIGURATION

WESCAM AIRBORNE IMAGING SYSTEM
(As per change No. MOD.P68/l 1)
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
Flight Manual when the WESCAM Airborne imaging System is installed
as per change No. MOD.P68/l J. In this configuration, the aircraft must be
operated within the Restricted Category in accordance with the limitations
laid down in this supplement.
The WESCAM 14 Airborne Imaging System is a multi-sensor turreted

surveillance system capable ofoperating at long stand-off ranges for various
airborne applications. The external, rugged Gyro-stabilised Platform can
contain up to four sensors including a long-range FUR, a Television with
Zoom Lens and a Television equipped with Spotter Telescope. The system
may also be upgraded with a microwave transmission system.
The Gyro-stabilised Platform, commonly called a Gimbal, is a four-axis,

two-gimbal design that carries the internal payload on low friction bearings.
During Aerial Surveillance missions the operator lowers the Gimbal through
the aircraft photogramrnetric hatch located in the aircraft fuselage floor,
therefore Supplement A "Installation of Photogrammetric Hatch" must
be regarded as an integral part of this supplement.
Figs. I and 2 illustrate system components and Gimbal positions.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Pag. I of7
SUPPLEMENT T P68 OBSERVER 2
OPERATION
EXTERNAL GIMBAL HAND CONTROLLER

Figure I
Movement of the Gimbal after being lowered through the

photogrammetric hatch (Figure 2) is controlled by the Hand Controller
shown at right. Detailed sensor setup/operating instructions and switch
functions are contained in the relative WESCAM Model 14 Operator' s
Manual.
-
GIMBAL RETRACTED
OPTIONAL
MICROWAVE ANTENNA
-
GIMBAL LOWERED
Figure 2

Pag. 2 of7 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
P68C SUPPLEMENT T

AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
G IMBAL LOW ERED
Maximum Operating Speed 140 K.IAS

M inimum Speed 1.2 Vs 1 (All Flap Configurations)
Max Load Factor (Flaps UP) 2.5 g
Max Yaw Angle 15"
NOTE
Intentional sideslips are not permitted.
Aircraft must be operated in smooth
air
TAKE-OFF AND LANDING
Gimbal must be retracted and hatch external doors closed.

To avoid the possibility ofa tail-scrape, do not raise the nose above 10°
(indicated) during take-off or when flaring to land.
NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS
Minimum crew requirements are one pilot and one operator.

Maximum seating in this configuration allows for two pilots and two
crew members (seated on the rear bench scat), for a total of four occupants.
FROM DATUM
N° SEAT
Inch Metres
PILOT 1 -37.401 -0.95
CO-PILOT I -37.401 -0.95
OPERATOR 1 I 34.134 0.87
OPERATOR 2 1 34.134 0.87

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Pag.3of7
Section 8 vulcanair-:::
OPERATl ON AL LIMIT TYPE
When the ai rcraft is configured for Aerial Survey missions it must be

operated in the Restricted Category.
PLACARDS
Within the pilot's primary field of view:
WHEN CONFIGURED FOR AERIAL SURVEY AS PER MOO. P68111,

AIRCRAFT MUST BE OPERATED IN RESTRICTED.CATEGORY
WITH THE FOLLOWING LIMITATIONS:
MICROWAVE ANTENNA
WHEN ANTENNA IS INSTALLED. DO NOT RAISE THE NOSE
ABOVE 10" DURING TAKE OFF OR WHEN FLARING TO LANO
GIMBAL LOWERED
MAX LOAD FACTOR
2.SG }
Vmo 140 KIAS
Vnii n 1.2Vs1
MAX YAW ANGLE 15'
On the hatch cover:
OPERATIVE MODE - WARNING -

CAMERA MUST BE IN THE
OPEN THE PHOTOGRAMMETRIC HATCH INOPERATIVE POSITION
EXTERNAL DOORS FOR TAKEOFF AND LANDING
SUPPORT THE CAMERA USING THE
HANDLE AND REMOVE THE SUPPORT
STRUT SAFETY PINS
3. LOWER THE CAMERA
4 STOW THE SUPPORT STRUTS USING THE
UPPER RIGHT
LATERAL CLAMPS
5. ENGAGE AND SCREW DOWN THE KNOB
TO SECURE THE CAMERA IN THE
OPERATIVE POSITION
INOPERATIVE MODE
1 UNSCREW ANO RELEASE THE KNOB
2. LIFT THE CAMERA USING THE HANDLE
3. UNSTOW ANO POSITION THE SUPPORT
STRUTS ANO INSTALL THE SAFETY PINS
4. CLOSE THE PHOTOGRAMMETRIC HATCH
EXTERNAL DOORS
HATCH LOCK
UPPER LEFT

Pag. 4 of7 DATE: MAY7,2002
P68C SUPPLEMENT T
ENGINE F Al LURE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM FAILURE

Gimbal must be retracted and hatch external doors closed .
ALTERNATOR FAILURE
In case of Alternator failure, the system must be turned off immediately.

NOTE
The WESCAM operator must wear a
safety belt and have it fastened at all
times.
RECOMMENDATION
The WESCAM operator should wear
a headset at all times
BEFORE TAKEOFF
OPERATOR:
I. Ensure Gimbal is retracted and hatch external doors are closed.
IN FLIGHT At operating speed:

PILOT:
I. Communicate Gimbal lowering clearance to operator.
OPERATOR:
I. Open hatch external doors;
2. Support hatch cover using handle and remove support strut
safety pins;

3. Lower hatch cover with handle and lock Gimbal in down

position;
4. Stow support struts;
5. Communicate Gimbal operative condition to pilot.
BEFORE LANDING
OPERATOR:
1. Unlock hatch cover;
2. Raise hatch cover with handle;
3. Position support struts and insert safety pins;
4. Close hatch external doors;
5. Communicate Gimbal retracted condition to pilot.
NO CHANGE

Weight and Balance detennination for flight.
When operated in the Aerial Survey configuration as per MOD.P68/ 11 ,

the airplane Basic Empty Weight and corresponding Centre of Gravity
position changes should be detennined and the resulting values referenced
to Fig. 6.5, the Weight Moment Envelope contained in the Basic AFM.
NOTE
It is the responsibility of the pilot and/or aircraft
owner to ensure that the aircraft is properly loaded
before flight.

Pag. 6 of7 DATE: MAY7,2002
P68C SUPPLEMENT T
ITEM WEIGHT ARM MOMENT
(Kg) (m) (Kgm)
EQUIPPED EMPTY WEIGHT
SUBTRACT WEIGHTS
SEAT N°3 7.8 -0.145 -1 .131
SEAT N°4 7.8 -0.145 -1.131
NEW EMPTY WEIGHT (A) (C)
INSERT WEIGHTS :
PILOT -0.95
CO-PILOT -0.95
OPERATOR 1 0.87
OPERATOR 2 0.87
GIMBAL (PIN 14DS-S101P) 42.9 0.093 3.9897
RACK (P/N 7.9555-1) 33 -0.75 -24.75
ANTENNA (P/N 54404) 7 1.588 11 .116
BAGGAGE (180 Kg. Max) 1.542
FUEL 0.77
TOTAL (8) (D)
TOTAL (G= A + B) (M = C+D)
C.G. POSITION (X = M/G)
C .G. varituions during G imbal extension and/or retraction nrc negligible.

This page intentionally lcfi blank
A.F.M. PIN NORIO. 707-10
P68C SUPPLEMENT T/ l
SUPPLEMENT T/1
AERIAL SURVEY CONFIGURATION
WESCAM MX-15 AIRBORNE IMAGING SYSTEM
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
Flight Manual when the WESCAM MX- 15 Airborne Imaging System is
installed as per change No. MOD. P68/ 100. In this configuration, the
aircraft must be operated in accordance with the limitations laid down in
this supplement.
The WESCAM MX-15 system on the aircraft provides long stand off
range day/night surveillance capabilities.
During Aerial Surveillance missions the operator lowers the gimbal

through the aircraft photogrammetric hatch located in the aircraft fuselage
floor, therefore Supplement A "Installation of Photogrammetric
Hatch" must be regarded as an integral part of this supplement.
Reference Publication:
Wescam MX-15 Hex Operation and Maintenance Manual TM00286.
Rev.19
DATE: JANUARY 15, 2007 Page 1 of8
A. F.M. PIN NOR I 0. 707-1B
SUPPLEMENT T/1 P68C
SECTION 2 OPERATING LIMITATIONS

AIRSPEED LIMITA TIO NS
GIMBAL LOWERED
Maximum Operating Speed 140 KI AS

Minimum Speed 1.2 Vs 1(All Flap Configurations)
Max Load Factor (Flaps UP) 2.5 g
Max Yaw Angle 15°
NOTE
Intentional sideslips are not permitted.
Aircraft must be operated in smooth Air

To avoid the possibility of a tai l-scrape, do not raise the nose above
I 0° (indicated) during take-off or when flaring to land.
NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS
Minimum crew requirements are one pilot and one operator.

Maximum seating in this configuration allows for two pilots and two
crew members (seated on the third row seats), for a total of four occupants.
FROM DATUM
N° SEAT
Inch Metres
PILOT I -37. 401 -0. 95
CO-PILOT I -37. 401 -0. 95
OPERATOR I I 34.134 0.87
OPERATOR2 I 34.134 0.87
Rev. 19
Page 2 of8 DATE: JANUARY 15, 2007
A.F.M. PIN NOR /O. 707-IB
P68C SUPPLEMENT T/1
TYPE OF OPERATION LIMITS
When the aircraft is configured for Aerial Survey missions it must be

operated in accordance with the limitations laid down in this supplement.
PLACARDS
ON THE OVERHEAD PANEL
WHEN CONFIGURED FOR AERIAL SURVEY AS PER MOO. PU/100

AIRCRAFT MUST BE OPERATED IN niE RESTRICTED CATEGORY
WITH THE FOLLOWING LIMITATIONS·
GIMBAL LOWERED
MAX LOAD FACTOR 2 SG
Vmo 140 KIAS
Vmln 1.2 Vu1
MAX YAW ANGLE 15"
ON THE HATCH COVER
Rev.19
A.F.111. PINNORI0. 707-IB
SUPPLEMENT T/1 P68C

ENGINE FAILURE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM FAILURE
ALTERNATOR FAILURE
In case of Alternator failure, the system must be turned off
immediately.

NOTE
The WESCAM operator must wear a
safety belt and have it fastened at all
times.
RECOMMENDATION
The WESCAM operator should wear
a headset at all times
BEFORE TAKEOFF
PILOT:
I. Ensure that the "AUX PWR-OUT" switch is in the OFF
position.
OPERATOR:
I . Ensure that the Gimbal is retracted and hatch external doors are
closed.
IN FLIGHT At operating speed:

PILOT:
I. Communicate Gimbal lowering clearance to operator.
OPERATOR:
I. Open the photogrammetric hatch external doors
2. Support the camera using handle and remove support strut
safety pins;
3. Lower the camera;
4. Engage and screw down the two knobs to secure the camera in
the operative position;
5. Stow support struts using the lateral clamps;
6. Communicate Gimbal operative condition to pilot.
Rev. 19
A.F.M. PIN NOR JO. 707-IB
P68C SUPPLEMENT T/1
PILOT:
I. Set ON the "AUX PWR-OUT" switch.
BEFORE LANDING
PILOT:
I. Set OFF the "AUX PWR-OUT" switch;
2. Communicate aux power off to operator.
OPERATOR:
I. Unscrew and release the two knobs that secure the hatch cover;
2. Lift the camera using the handle;
3. Un-stow and position the support struts and install the safety pins;
4. Close the photogrammetric hatch external doors;
5. Communicate Gimbal retracted condition to pilot.
NO CHANGE

Weight and Balance determination for flight.
When operated in the Aerial Survey configuration as per

MOD.P68/100, the aircraft Basic Empty Weight and corresponding
Centre ofGravity position changes should be determined and the resulting
values referenced to Fig. 6.5, the Weight Moment Envelope contained in
the Basic AFM (Table T/ 1-1 Refers).
NOTE
It is the responsibility of the pilot and/or aircraft
owner to ensure that the aircraft is properly
loaded before flight.
Rev.19
DATE: JANUARY 15, 2007 Page S of8
A.F.llf. PIN NOR /O. 707-IB
SUPPLEMENT T/1 P68C
WEIGHT ARM MOMENT

ITEM
(KG) (m) (kgm)
BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT A= ...... ...... G= ... ... .......
SUBTRACT WEIGHTS
SEAT N°3 10 - 0.146 - 1.46
SEAT N°4 10 - 0.146 -1.46
TOTAL B= 20 H= -2.92
INSERT WEIGHTS
GIMBAL (P/N 7.9554-801) 52 0.110 5.72
MONITOR + RACK 9 0.110 0.99
MCU + EQUIPMENT 17 1.412 24.004
TOTAL C=78 I= 30.71

NEW BASIC EMPTY
D= ............ L= ...... .......
W EIGHT D=A-B+C L= G-H+I
LOADING
PILOT -0.95
CO-PILOT -0.95
OPERATOR 1 0.87
OPERATOR2 0.87
BAGGAGE (160 kg. Max) 1.542
FUEL 0.77
TOTAL E= ........... M= ..........••

TAKE OFF WEIGHT
F= F= ........... N=
D+E N= L+M
T.O. C.G. POSITION (m) O=N/F= •..•.. ...... metres
T.0. C.G. POSITION (%) % MAC= (0/1.55)*100 = ..•... ••.•%
C.G. variations during Gimbal extension retraction are negligible.
Table T/1-1
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA AND LOADING FORM
Rev. 19
A.F.M. PIN NOR JO. 707-/B
P68C SUPPLEMENT T/1

T he System consists of the fo llowing equipment:
• The Turret contains the followi ng imaging sensor:
- A low magnification continuous zoom lens with a color video
camera, which is referred to as the EOW sensor.
- A high magnification stepped zoom lens and infrared sensor,
referred to as the !FR sensor.
- A high magnification dual channel spotter with color
daylight/monochrome lowlight cameras, referred to as the EON
sensor.
- A wide angle Laser Illuminator.
• The 314 ATR MCU (Master Control Unit) containing the following
equipment:
A IR VP 2.7 CCA which provides IR video output.
An MCU CCA which provides the overlay, the video routing and
master control and is the interface hub of the MX system.
A power supply CCA which provides power to the MCU CCAs
and the MCU internal fan.
• The Hand Controller provides:
Turret steering controls.
Menu access and navigation controls.
Turret sensor controls.
Laser controls and indications.
• GPS A ntenna and GPS Receiver.
• The Aval~ Display AVM4150 complete the current installation.
The Wescam gimbal is mounted on a manually operated extension
and retraction mechanism that allows the gimbal to be lowered and
retracted during flight through the aircraft photogrammetric hatch located
in the a ircraft fuselage floor. The system must be in the retracted position
with the hatch outer doors closed during takeoff and landing.
A specially designed lift an·d support mechanism allows the gimbal
operator to easily raise and lower the hatch during surveillance operations.
The monitor is mounted on a rack installed on the seat tracks in the
area between the co-pilot seat and the photograrnmetric hatch, while the
equipment necessary to operate the wescarn (MCU, GPS receiver, DC/DC
converter) has been mounted on a support installed in the baggage
compartment behind the third row seats using the cargo net attachments.
The system is powered through the main bus at 28 V de by means the
auxiliary power socket located on the right side wall of the cabin near the
photograrnmetric hatch. The circuit is protected by a 30 Amp circuit
breaker, which is located on the left power panel. The complete system is
Rev.19
A.F.M. PIN NORJ0.707- IR
Section 8 vulcanair'=
SUPPLEMENT T/l P68C
controlled by a switch located on the breaker panel labelled "AUX PWR-

OUT".
For detailed description and operation of the system refer to the latest
applicable revision of the "Wescam MX-15 - Hex Operation &
Maintenance Manual" TM00286.
Fig. T/ 1-1 illustrate system components and gimbal positions.
PHOTOGRAMMETRIC
HATCH
~C --:;, -
CIMBAL LOWERED
'- ~
, l
>[l-1
I
DEAD-MAN
~ SWITCH
;• /
\ 1!
\ \
\.
:-:-; L --r,'.
HAND CONTROLLER
Figure T/1-1
WESCAM MX-15 SYSTEM LAYOUT
Rev. 19
P68C SUPPLEMENT U
SUPPLEMENT U
HONEYWELL (ex-BENDIX/KING) RDR 2000

COLOR WEATHER RADAR
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
Flight Manual when the Honeywell (ex-Bendix/ King) RDR 2000 Color
Weather Radar is installed as per change No. MOD.P68/ 16.
DESCRIPTION
The RDR 2000 Color Weather Radar system consists ofa nose mounted
receiver-transmitter and stabilized I 0 in., X-Band radar antenna, and a panel
mounted radar indicator.
All operating controls are mounted on the front panel of the radar
indicator and operating controls and functions are described in fig. 1 and 2.
The RDR 2000 Color Weather Radar system is designed to detect
significant en-route formations up to a distance of 190 nautical miles (when
set to maximum range) to preclude undesired penetration of heavy weather
and its usually associated turbulence.
The antenna is fully stabilized to compensate for up to +/- 30° ofaircraft
pitch and roll.
The indicator provides a four color weather display, showing four
separate levels of rainfall intensity in green, yellow, red and magenta.
Evenly spaced blue segmented concentric range arcs, blue
alphanumerics and an amber antenna tilt angle readout is also provided.
In addition to its primary purpose of weather mapping, a ground

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page I of 14
SUPPLEMENT U P68C
mapping mode permits displaying prominent topographical features such as

lakes, bays, islands, shore lines and urban areas.
In the MAP mode the magenta color is not used.
WARNING
This system generates microwave radiation in the
WX/WXA, MAP and VP operating modes.
Imprope r use, or exposure, may cause serious bodily
injury.
DO NOT OPERATE UNTIL YOU HA VE READ AND CAREFULLY

FOLLOWED ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS
CALLED OUT IN SECTION 4 (NORMAL PROCEDURES) OF THIS
SUPPLEMENT.
Users of this equipment are strongly urged to familiarize themselves

with FAA Advisory Circular AC N° 00-248 ( 1-20-83), subject:
"Thunderstorms".
OPERATING CONTROLS AND DISPLAY FEATURES
TRACK FUNCTION
CURSOR SWITCH
ROLL
TRIM
WEATHER INDICATED
MODE SELECTED
_:...=.'--+- RANGE
WEATHER
/\LERT PRESS TO
.,..,...,.,,._...__ INC~ EASE
MODE
RANGE
GROUND PRESS TO
MAP DECREASE
MODE RANGE
PRESS TO PRESS TO
WA~~~~ -1--lr."J':\'ll MOVETKACK
CURSOR LEFT
&COURSE
PRESS TO
ADJUSTS MOVE TRACK
RADAR CURSOR RIGHT
RECEIVER
GAININ TURN TO
GNDMAP AOJUST ANTENNA
MODE TILT
RANGE MARK (40 MILES)
Figure I

P68C SUPPLEMENT U
DEGREES OF TRACK PLUS THOUSANDS OF FEET

VERTICAL PROFILE FROM NOSE OF /\IRCRllFT FROM REL/\TIVE /\LTITUDE
MOOE ANNUNCIATION 1• STEPS UP TO 45• (Will VARY WITH SELECTED
RIGHT OR LEFT AANGE X 1000)
LEFT OR RIGHT
TRACK
ANNUNCIATION_,__ _
WEATHER/
WEATHER ALERT
SELECT BUTTON
VERTICAL PROFILE
SELECT BUTTON r--==-- 1 RELATIVE ALTITUOE
REFERENCE LINE
VP SCAN I---===-+- MINUS THOUSANDS

ANGLE FROM o• OF FEET FROM
RELATIVE ALTITUDE
•
SELECTED MODE (WEATHER) RANGE RINGS
Figure 2
~ BRT control Adjust brightness of the display for

varying cockpit light conditions.
~ Wx pushbutton Selects the weather mode (Wx) when

pressed. Wx appears in display.
Weather compensation not active.
e WxA pushbutton Selects the weather mode (Wx) when

pressed. Wx appears in display.
Weather compensation not active.
Wx/WxA pushbutton Toggles between Weather Alert mode

in units with Vertical Profile option

SUPPLEMENT U P68C
a VP pushbutton Selects and deselects the Vertical

Profile mode of operation on units
containing this option.
0 MAP pushbutton Selects ground mapping mode (MAP)

when pressed. MAP appears in the
display. Red color is not used in the
MAP mode.
~ NAV pushbutton Selects Navigation mode and displays

preprogrammed way-points when
system is used with optional radar
graphics unit and Flight Management
System.
Function selector 1. OFF pos1t1on removes primary

power from the system.
2. SBY (standby) position places

system in the standby condition
during warm-up period and when
the system is not in use. The
screen is blank with word STBY
displayed in the lower left comer.
NA V mode may be selected while
in standby. No transmission exists
In the SBY condition.
3. TST (test) position selects test

function to determine operability
of the system. A test pattern is
displayed and 80 mile range is
automatically selected, but can be
changed. No transmission exists
In the TST condition.

vulcanaire:; Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT U
4. ON posi tion selects the condition

for normal operation. Radar
transmission exists in the ON
position The Wx mode and 80
mile range arc automatically
selected when turned on.
5. LOG position is used only when a

Bendix/King IU 2023 series radar
graphics unit is installed with a
compatible Jong range navigation
system. This mode lists the
latitudes a nd longitudes of
selected waypoints, selected VOR
frequencies and bearings and
distances to waypoints. No radar
transmission occurs in this mode.
TILT control Tum the knob to adjust antenna

tilt. Adjusts the antenna to move
the radar beam up to a maximum
of+ 15° above the horizontal or to
a maximum of -1 5° below the
horizontal position.
The horizontal pos1tton is
indicated as 0° on the control. The
tilt angle is displayed in the upper
right corner o f the indicator.
ENAC Approval No. : 02/ 17 1243/SPA

Section 8 vulcanaira:;
SUPPLEMENT U P68C
TILT control Pulling this knob out disables

stabilization. If the system is in a
non-stabilized installation, "STAB
OFF" will appear in the upper left
corner of the screen.
~ RANGE increase
~ pushbutton Clears the display and advances the
indicator to the next higher range
each time the pushbutton is pressed
(eg: 20 to 40, 40 to 80, etc.), until
240 mile range is reached. The
range selected is displayed in the
upper right corner on the last range
mark, and the distance to each of
the other range mark circles is
displayed along the right edge of
the circles (arcs)
~ RANGE decrease
~ pushbutton Clears the display and places the
indicator in the next lower range
each time the pushbutton is pressed
( eg: 40 to 20), until the minimum
range of I 0 miles is reached at the
outermost range mark ring.
TRACK left
pushbutton Moves azimuth line to the left in I'
steps until 45' is displayed when
button is pushed. Also, used to
select the vertical "slice" to be
displayed when in Vertical Profile
mode on units with this option and
increments in 2' steps after each
horizontal scan.

P68C SUPPLEMENT U
TRACK right
---... pushbutton Moves azimuth line to the right in
l 0steps until 45° is displayed when
button is pushed. Also, used to
select the vertical «slice» to be
displayed when in Vertical Profile
mode on units with this option and
increments in 2° steps after each
horizontal scan.
@ GAIN control Varies the radar receiver gain when

in the MAP mode. Gain and STC
are preset in TEST function and in
the Wx, WxA and VP modes.
ROLL TRIM Adjust for a mechanical error of2°

or less if the radar sensor is not
mounted parallel to the wings. lfthe
error is greater than 2°, the radar
sensor must be removed and
mechanically aligned as close to o·
as possible.
SECTION 2 -OPERATING LIMITATIONS

There is no change to the airplane limitations when this avionic

There is no change to the airplane emergency procedures when this

Section 8 vulcanair ':;
SUPPLEMENT U P68C
SECTION 4- NORMAL PROCEDURES
PRIOR TO FLIGHT
WARNING
The radar system generates microwave radiation and
improper use, or exposure, may cause serious bodily
injury.
DO NOT OPERATE THIS EQU IPM ENT UNTIL YOU HA VE

READ AND CAREFULLY FOLLOWED THE FOLLOWING SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BE

FOLLOWED PRIOR TO RADAR OPERATIONS ON THE GROUND:
I. Do not turn on, or operate radar within 15 feet of ground personnel

or containers holding flammable or explosive material.
2. Do not turn on, or operate radar during refueling operations.

vulcanairm:1 Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT U
PREFLIGHT CHECKS PRIOR TO .ENERGIZING RADAR
WARNING
IN ORDER TO PREVENT POSSIBLE SERIOUS
BODILY INJURY TO GROUND PERSONNEL
OR IG N ITION OF FLAMMABLE OR
EXPLOSIVE MATERIALS, THE FOLLOWING
TESTS MUST BE ACCOMPLISHED WITH THE
FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCH ALWAYS TN
THE TEST (TST) MODE OF OPERATION.
I. Function selector Switch - SBY (standby) position and after 30

seconds select test (TST) position.
2. Antenna TILT control - Set to +5°.
3. BRT Control - Adjust to mid-range.
4. Indicator test display - Check TEST PATTERN with the
following:
A. After 7 to 8 seconds, four equally spaced blue range

marks should be visible, the word TEST and the number
"80" should appear and be visible in blue displays in
opposite comers of the display.
B. No video noise distortion should appear on the display.
C. There are four colored bands appearing on the indicator.
D. Starting with the closest band to the origin, the bands will
be green, yellow, red and magenta.
NOTE
The width of the best pattern bands is not critical, nor is

the position of the bands relative to the range marks.
E. The update action may be observed as a small "ripple"

moving along the outer magenta band, indicating that the
antenna is scanning.
5. WxA Mode Selector pushbutton - Select WxA position and

observe that magenta band alternates from magenta to black
approximately once per second.

Section 8 vulcanair"a
SUPPLEMENT U P68C
6. Function Selector Switch - SBY position.
PREFLIGHT CHECKS WITH RADAR ENERGIZED
WARNING
IN ORDER TO PREVENT POSSIBLE BODILY
INJURY TO GROUND PERSONNEL OR
IGNITION OF FLAMMABLE OR EXPLOSIVE
MATERJALS THE AIRPLANE MUST BE
TAX I ED WITH THE FUNCTION SWITCH IN
THE OFF, SBY, OR TST POSITIONS ONLY TO
A "CLEAR-AHEAD" AREA WHERE METAL
BUILDINGS , AI RCR AFT, GROUND
PERSONNEL, ETC. ARE NOT IN LINE-OF-
SIGHT OF THE RADAR UN IT.
OBSERVE THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS

AT THE START OF SECTION 4 PRJOR TO PERFORMING THE
FOLLOWING CHECKS WITH THE RADAR UNIT ENERGIZED.
I. Ensure safety precautions have been observed.

2. Function selector Switch - ON position. The indicator will
automatically be in the weather (WX) mode.
3. RNG (Range) Selector Push button - 80-20 range.
4. Antenna Tilt Control - +5° to minimize ground return.
5. BRT Control - Adjust as required.
6. Antenna Tilt Control - TILT UP ( + and DOWN (- in small
0
)
0
)
increments.
7. Function Selector Switch - SBY position for taxi manoeuvres.
OPERATIONAL NOTES
FALSE RETURN DISPLAY
I. Ground radar stations or other airborne weather radars may

occasionally cause interference with the presentation of the return.
The effect of this interference is to create one or more radial bands
of false signal or noise extending from the bottom center outward
to the outer range scale.

Page IO of 14 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
P68C SUPPLEMENT U
These e ffects are usually of short duration and are dependent on

the airplane's position and range from the ground station, the signal
strength, and other factors.
HIGH ALTITUDE OPERATION
I. There is no change to radar performance up to maximum aircraft

altitude.
OPERATING ALTITUDE LIMITS
I. Operating temperature limits for the IN I 82A indicator is -20° C

(- 4° F)to55°C(-131 °F).
EFFECT OF SOME SUNGLASSES ON THE RADAR

DISPLAY
I. The IN I 82A color indicator utilizes a special filter to ensure

optimum video contrast to the pilot in the presence of high cockpit
ambient light. Some sunglasses may interfere with effectiveness o f
this filter. To check for this, cock your head to one side while
viewing the display and note any dramatic c hange in brillance. If
brillance decreases sharply, some compromise such as removing
or changing sunglasses should be effected.
TURN - OFF PROCEDURES (on the ground)
I. The ART2000 Antenna/receiver/transmitter will tilt the antenna

down, for increased radar receiver protection, when the indicator
is switched to SBY and OFF position.
Always tum the indicator function switch to SBY or OFF before
disengaging the master switch in the ai rcraft. The system will
power-down in about 5 seconds after switched to the OFF position,
to allow time for the antenna to move to the down position (-25°).

SUPPLEMENT U P68C
GROUND MAPPING DISPLAYS
1. The display resulting from ground resembles an ordinary pilotage

chart. C ities, open ground and bodies ofwater arc distinguished by
the intensity of the signals that they reflect back to the signal
source.
Cities usually provide the most intense reflections and appear red
on the display.
Open ground and water provide progressively less intense
re flections and appear as yellow and green. Calm bodies of water
provide very weak signal returns, and are usually not displayed,
while very rough water provides a stronger return signal and will
usually appear as green colour. The magenta level docs not appear
in the ground mapping mode.
NORMAL OPERATIONS
WEATHER DETECTION
I. Function selector Switch - ON position (allow 30 seconds warm-

up)
NOTE
The indicator will automatically be in the weather

(Wx) mode when Function Selector switch is placed
in the ON position.
2. Mode Selector Pushbuttons - Select and press as desired. Wx -

Weather. WxA - Weather Alert.
3. BRT Control - Adjust as required for ambient light conditions.
4. Antenna Tilt control - +5° to +8° (approximately minimum angle
relative to horizon without ground return.
5. RNG( Range) Selector Pushbuttons - Select desired range.
6. Aircraft - MAINTAIN SPEED and HEA DING to assure an
accurate picture of relative motion of storm in next step.
7. TRK (Track) Selector Pushbutton - Select as desired. Press and
hold the track button until the cursor reaches the desired position
and the n release the pushbutton.
As the button is held down the line will move in 1• steps. The
track cursor stops moving and the position (in degrees away from

A.F.M. PIN NOR JO. 707-1 B
P68C SUPPLEMENT U
the aircraft headi ng) is displayed in yellow numbers at the upper

left comer of the screen. If neither button has been pressed for 15
seconds, the track line will disappear.
8. VP (Vertical Profile) Selector Pushbutton - Press the VP button
with the system in Wx or WxA mode.
A short period of time will elapse before the vertical picture is
"painted". This is because the radar continues to scan normally
after the VP is pressed, until it reaches the selected azimuth
position.
Press the track buttons to change vertical scan position with the
track line in 2° steps at the end of each horizontal scan.
Push the Wx/WxA button to return to the horizontal weather scan.
GROUND MAPPING
NOTE
Ground mapping is a secondary feature of this radar

which should only be used after the operator is very
familiar with this equipment
1. Function Selector Switch - ON position (allow 30 seconds warm-

up)
2. RNG (Range) Selector Pushbuttons - select desired range.
3. MAP Mode Selector Pushbutton - Press. Set GAIN as desired for
clearest ground mapping interpretation.
4. BRT Control - Adjust as required.
5. Antenna T ILT Control - ADJUST for clearest display.
WARNING
The RDR2000 radar system performs only the
functions ofweather detection and ground mapping.
IT WAS NOT DES IGNED FOR GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING

OR COLLISION AVO IDANCE AND THEREFORE SHOULD NEVER
BE USED OR RELI ED UPON FOR TH ESE PURPOSES.

.-1.1·.1n. r11v I VUKIU. I U l ·JIJ
SUPPLEMENT U P68C
There is no change to the airplane performance when this avionic

WEIGHT AND BALANCE
The installation of the RDR 2000 color weather radar is listed as item
105 in the "P68C Equipment List" PIN NORl0.719-1.
Rev. 6
Page 14 of 14 with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 March 2004
, t.IZlll. l'/ N NORI0.70 7-18
P68C SUPPLEMENT U/l
SUPPLEMENT U/l
BENDIX/KING KMD 850
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY SYSTEM
SECTION I - GENERAL
Flight Manual when the Bendix/King KMD 850 Multi-Function Display
System is installed as per change No. MOD.P68/62.
Aircraft Flight Manual. Wherever conflict arises between information in this
supplement and the approved Flight Manual, the information herein must
take precedence.
When the KMD 850 Multi-Function Display System is

installed and operative, the following documents must be
carried in the aircraft at all times:
Bendix/King KMD 550/850 Multi-Function Display
Pilot's Guide PIN 006-18222-0000, Rev. 3 dated
May 2002 or latest approved revision;
Bendix/ King KMD 850 Digital Weather Radar
Function Pilot's Guide Addendum PIN 006-18235-
0000, Rev. 2 dated January 2002 or latest approved
revision.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The KMD 850 is a Multi-Function Display System (MFD) that utilizes

a 5" Diagonal AMLCD to display a detailed moving map using data from
the front loading datacard.
Rev.7
with No. AS-AFM/04/008 on 21 May 2004 Page I of8
vulcanair~
, l./': 111. PIN NOR Ill. 7117-llJ
Section 8
SUPPLEMENT U/1 P68C
The datacard contains application software and a customized Jeppesen©

aeronautical database with airports, victor airways, YORs, N DBs,
intersections, and special use airspace (including altitude limits). It is also
an enhanced cartographic database and includes rivers, roads, lakes,
coastlines, cities, railroad tracks, towers (including AGL and MSL
altitudes), regional topographical/elevation information and topographic
shading.
The Data Card must be installed prior to power up. During power up
and normal operation, the K.MD 850 will test for the presence ofa valid data
card. If the card is not installed or a faulty card is installed, the K.MD 850
wi ll not continue to operate and will display an error message.
Never remove the database card while the unit is

switched ON and never attempt to switch the unit ON
when there is no database card installed.
Database Update: Refer to Bendix/King K.MD 550/850 Multi-Function

Display Pilot's Guide PIN 006-1 8222-0000, Section DATA CARDS.
The K.MD 850 is not a replacement for your chart. It is

intended as an aid to navigation only.
Never use the terrain displayed on this equipment as
your reference for terrain avoidance.
When the Goodrich WX-500 Stormscope is installed and operative, the

K.MD 850 d isplays weather information generated by this equipment. The
WX-500 detects electrical discharges assoc iated with thunderstorms within
a 200 nm radius of the aircraft. The information is then sent to the KMD 850
and will display the location of the thunderstorms both on the map displays
and on a dedicated Stormoscope display.
The K.MD 850 include the KAC 50 I Weather Radar Module. This
module is installed in the unit as part of the aircraft installation. It is an
independent part of the system and has its own top level unit part number
and serial tag.
Rev. 7
Page 2 of8 with No. AS-AFM/04/008 on 21 May 2004
A.f: M. PINNORI0. 707-IB
P68C SUPPLEMENT U/1
When the Bendix/King RDR 2000 Radar is installed and operative, the
KMD 850 controls and displays weather information generated by this
equipment.
WARNING
The RDR 2000 Radar equipment generates
microwave radiation. Improper use, or exposure,
may cause serious bodily injury.
DO NOT OPERATE WITH "WX RADAR" UNTIL YOU HA VE

READ AND CAREFULLY FOLLOWED ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
AND INSTRUCTIONS CALLED OUT IN SECTION 4 (NORMAL
PROCEDURES) OF THIS SUPPLEMENT.
Users of this equipment are strongly urged to familiarize themselves

with FAA Advisory Circular AC N° 00-24B (1-20-83), subject:
"Thunderstorms".
The KMD 850 system is powered to 28 Vdc by the Main Bus and is
protected by a "MFD KMD 850" 5 Amp. circuit breaker while the RXffX
Radar (ART 2000) is protected by a separate "RADAR METEO" 5 Amp.
circuit breaker.
OPERATING CONTROLS AND DISPLAY FEATURES
PowerKeysl
Brightness
Control ..,.
. .
..
LCD Display •• -1
""/"
....
Fault Indicator
•••
Available Soft Labels Power Key
Function/Overlay
Legend --i:'j
i ....~
Labels
!.!
On/Off Control I
1-
MAI
... W< ,.. -J
..... ..........
Control Knobs
(Inner ond Outer)
Function Select Keys
Figure I
Rcv.7
with No. AS-AFM/04/008 on 21 May 2004 Page 3 of8
A.J-:M. /'IN NURllJ.707-18
Section 8 vulcanairS:
SUPPLEMENT U/l P68C
FUNCTION SELECT KEYS
These Keys arc used to select available data sources (as indicated on the
key) for display on the LCD. When a function key is pressed, the
annunciator above it will illuminate to show that this function is currently
being displayed. Pressing the same key multiple times will sequence
through the available pages associated with that function. Figure 2 shows
the available pages under each function.
MAP wx TRFC TERR AUX
TopoOn WX Radar' TASffCAS/ EGPWS Setup Pages

Map TIS
Topo Off Stormscope External

Map NTSCVideo
FIS Graphical
Products
Legend: c=J Available page
FIS Textual
Products c=J Not available page
Figure 2

There is no change to the aircraft limitations when this av1omc

There is no c hange to the aircraft emergency procedures when this
Rev. 7
A.F./11. PIN NOR JO. 707-1 B
P68C SUPPLEMENT U/l

PRIOR TO FLIGHT
(Whe n the Bendix/King RDR 2000 Radar equipment is installed and
operative)
WARNING
The radar system generates microwave radiation and
improper use, or exposure, may cause serious bodily
injury.
DO NOT OPERATE T HIS EQUIPMENT UNTIL YOU HA VE

READ AND CAREFULLY FOLLOWED THE FOLLOWING SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS AN D INSTRUCTIONS.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BE

FOLLOWED PRIOR TO RADAR OPERATIONS ON TH E GROUND:
I. Do not tum on, or operate radar w ithin 15 feet of ground personnel

or containers holding fla mmable or explosive materia l.
2. Do not turn on, or operate radar during re fueling operations.
PREFLIGHT CHECKS PRIOR TO ENERGIZING RADAR
WARNING
IN ORDER TO PREVENT POSSIBLE SERIOUS
BODILY INJURY TO GROUND PERSONNEL OR
IGN ITION OF FLAMMAB LE OR EXPLOS IVE
MATERIALS, THE FOLLOWING TESTS MUST BE
ACCOMPLISHED WITH THE FUNCTION
SELECTOR SWITCH ALWAYS IN THE T EST (TST)
MODE OF OPERATl ON.
I. WX RADAR - SBY (standby) position and after 20 seconds select

Outer Control Knob to TST (test) position.
2. Antenna T ILT Joistick (up and down) - Set to + 15'.
3. Brightness Control - Adjust to mid-range.
4. Indicator tes t display - C heck TEST PATIERN with the following:
Rev.7
,11.r.1n. r11v I VVltlV. t U / -Jfj
Section 8 vulcanairr::!J
SUPPLEMENT U/l P68C
A. After 7 to 8 seconds, four equally spaced blue range marks

should be visible, the word TST and the number "80" should
appear and be visible in blue displays in opposite comers of the
display.
B. No video noise distortion should appear on the display.
C. There arc four colored bands appearing on the indicator.
D. Starting with the closest band to the origin, the bands will be
green, yellow, red and magenta.
NOTE
The width of the best pattern bands is not critical, nor is the
position of the bands relative to the range marks.
E. The update action may be observed as a small "ripple" moving

along the outer magenta band, indicating that the antenna is
scanning.
5. VIEW Power Key- Select Vertical Profile position and observe that
magenta band alternates from magenta to black approximately once
per second.
6. WX RADAR - SBY (standby) position.
PREFLIGHT CHECKS WITH RADAR ENERGIZED
WARNING
IN ORDER TO PREVENT POSSIBLE BODILY
INJURY TO GROUND PERSONNEL OR IGNITION
OF FLAMMABLE OR EXPLOSIVE MATERIALS
THE AIRCRAFT MUST BE TAXIED WITH THE
FUNCTION SWITCH IN THE OFF, SBY, OR TST
POSITIONS ONLY TO A "CLEAR-AHEAD" AREA
WHERE METAL BUILDINGS, AIRCRAFT, GROUND
PERSONNEL, ETC. ARE NOT IN LINE-OF-SIGHT
OF THE RADAR UNIT.
Rev. 7
A.F.M. PIN NORIO. i 07-/IJ
P68C SUPPLEMENT U/1
OBSERVE THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS

AT THE START OF SECTION 4 PRJOR TO PERFORMING THE
FOLLOWING CHECKS WITH THE RADAR UN IT ENERGIZED.
I. Ensure safety precautions have been observed.

2. WX RADAR - ON position. The indicator will automatically be in
the weather (WX) mode.
3. RNG (Range) Selector Push button - 80-20 range.
4. Antenna Tilt Control - set to minimize ground return.
5. Brightness Control - Adjust as required.
6. Antenna Tilt Control - TILT UP in small increments until a clear
weather image and/or eventual ground target will be displayed.
7. WX RADAR - SBY position for taxi manoeuvres.
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
Operating temperature range for the KMD 850 indicator is -20' C (- 4'
F) to +70' C (158'F).
NORMAL OPERATION
For Normal Operating Procedures of the Bendix/King KMD 850 Multi-

Function Display, refer to the following documentations:
Bendix/King KMD 550/850 Multi-Function Display Pilot's

Guide PIN 006-18222-0000, Rev. 3 dated May 2002 or latest
approved revision;
Bendix/King KMD 850 Digital Weather Radar Function Pilot's
Guide Addendum PIN 006- 18235-0000, Rev. 2 dated January
2002 or latest approved revision;
Bendix/King RDR 2000 Color Weather Radar Pilot's Guide PIN
006-08755-0001 , Rev. 3 dated May 1998 or latest approved
rev1s1on;
Goodrich WX-500 Stormscope User' s Guide PIN 009-11501-
001, Rev. B dated 14/08/2001 or latest approved revision.
Rev.7
/ t.r.lt'l. r 1t"t l "tVltlU. I U l - lD
SUPPLEMENT U/1 P68C
There is no change to the aircraft performance when this avionic
SECTION 6- EQUIPMENT LIST

WEIGHT AND BALANCE
The installation of the Bendix/King KMD 850 Multi-Function Display is
listed as item J06 in the " P68C Equipment List" P/N NORI 0.719-1.
Rev. 7
'V~l 1 IC ~""( r
~ Cl;~
,,,. ~
I .(_•.'
P68C
SUPPLEMENT V
VMIOOO i!:LS!:CTRON IC POWER.PLANT

INSTRUMENTATION
(As per d12nge No. MOD.P68/rn)
SECTION I - GENERAL
T his supplement must be allachcd to the ENAC Approved Ai rplane

Flight Manual when VM i 000 Electronic Powcrplant Instrumentation is
installed as per change No. MOD.P68/ 18. The information contained herein
supplements the basic approved Airplane Flight Manual. For limitations,
procedures and performance information not contained in this supplement
consult the b~sic aporoved Airplane Flight Manual a:id/or the VM I000
Owners Manual. Wherever conflict arises between information in this
supplement and the approved Flight Manual, the information herein takes
precedence.
DESCRIPT10N
The VM I 000 Electronic Powerplant Instrumentation consist-; or a high

resol ution LCD indicator al lied to an EC I00 Ek:ctronic Chcckli~a and
Caution Advisory System. Separate Fuel Level and/\. ir Temperature Gaw~c s
and a Chronometer complete the system.
The VM 1000 LCD indicator displays RPM. Manifold Pressu1c. Fuel

Pressu re. Fuel Flow, Oil Prcs:rnrc. Oil Temperature. EGT, Cl IT and
electrical system Volts and /\mps.
Other available functions such as /\utotrack, Fu9I Computer and Engim.:

Hours arc deal t with in the relative 1Jpcration section.
The ECIOO Elcctni:1i;.; Ci1\Tki ist mici C;:utio11 :\d vi.:ory Sysk111 1s
mounted above the VM I 000 c!i.-;play.
Figs. I through 5 illustrate system components.
EN AC Approval No : 02/ l 7 i Z-13/S PA

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page I pf 14
s(' l.:ion ti V Ul\Jeil 10.11 ~
SUPPLEMl':NT V P68C
OPERAT;ON
FUNCTION BurroNs/ .
Figure I
VMIOOO INTEGRATED DISPL/\Y
INITIAL SYSTEM SETUP
The system has been calibrated by Vulcanair. Refer to Secti on 2 for

further in fo rmation.
TACHOMETER OPERATION
The RPM Indicator provides a fu ll sweep graphic analogue display and

a fo ur place digital display. The graphic sweep is provided with full colour
range marks lo enable rapid qualitative analysis or normal and red-line
engine RPM.
The digital display reads in I 0 RPM increments lo avoid distracting
display fluctuations.
J\ warning alert is activated whenever engine red-l ine limit is reached.

Pag. 2 of 14 DATE : MAY 7, 2002
Section 8
.:..
P_6.:..
8_ f '_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _____ _ _ __ __ S_U-'-Pi>i .F.MENT V
The RPM display nashes until the condition is rectified.
When the engine is sh ut down, the digital display reads total

acc umulated engine hours lo a 111axi111u111 of 5999.9. Engine hours arc
accumulated any time engine RPM cxcceds 1500 RPM .
MANIFOLD PRESSURE OPERATION
The Mani fold Pressure Indicator provides a full sweep graphic analogue
display and a three place digital display. Graphic display resolution is I in.
HG, and fu ll colour range marks enable rapid qualitative pressure analysis
during fast power changes. The digital display supplies precise manifold
pressure information.
OIL SYSTEM OPERATION

Oil Pressure and Temperature arc continuously displayed in two separate
graphic and digital indicators. Ful l colour range marks enable rapid
qualitati ve analysis or oil system performance.
The Oil Pressu re display reads in I ps i increments to a maximum of90
psi.
The Oil Temperature display reads out in I F increments to a maximum
0
ol"245°F.
/\ warni ng akrt is activated whenever red-li ne limit is reached. The
relevant display will flash until the condition is rcctiticd.
ENAC Approva l No. : 02/ 171243/SPA

• . •./• ' . 'tltl
- - --·-- - - - ---------~
W ARNmG
Tl-IF. fUEL COM PUTER IS NOT A TOTALISER. REfER TO Tl-IE
rUEL GAUG E ro R ACCURATE FUEL TAN K QUANTITY
REA DING. INCORRECT USF. OF THIS FEATURE W ILL SUPPLY
I NCO RRl ~CT FUEL REM A INJ:Ki (REM) A ND ENDURANCE{! IRS)
DATA. FNSURE ADEQUATE KNOWLEDGE OF FUEL
COMPUTER OPERATING PROCEDUR ES BErORE USING IT IN
FLIG HT.
T he fuel computer displays simultaneous fuel pressure and computer

functions.
FUEL pr~ ir:S?l lli. J<'. is • i i--::•lot~ed di:_:.il<.ll y ;::td graphical ly: Full colour
:·;rnge ma.·k:; <'tl~l~Jlc .apid t,ualit:->tive analysis of the rucl pressure to be
c::trried ou1.
A built- in warning system nashcs on the display should fuel press ure
drop below minimum.
FUEL FLOW is displayed digitally and graphically. The digital displa)I

provides I/ 10th gallon resolution.
AJd iiional rucl C'Olllj)lllCr foatur..:s arc:
REM - Fuel Remaining;
l1RN - Fuel Burned since last power-up:
I l RS - I lours of fuel remaining:
ADO - Adel fuel to computer memory.
A Lmv Fuel Wami11~ //w11111c ialor is incoq1oratcd into the system. When
computed fuel total is less than l l gallons, the disp lay wi ll flash.
Al>DI . (;FUEL TO THE FUEL COM PUTER
I) P1,ss BUTTON 4 u11t il Ai);) indic:11or m:ti vatcs;
2) P n;s~ BUTTON 3 to add tens ami BUTTON 5 to add o nes to

match the fuel added to the tank(s).
EN AC App rova l No.: 02117121'3/SPA

I».11~. 4 of l 4 Oi\TE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanau-~ Scctioa R
P68C SUPPLE IW~ NT V
NOT!!:
To "'Top-Off" the tanks, press BUTfON 3 to run up a

high number. The system will only add the fuel
necessary to till the computer's electronic tank as
defined in the initial tank calibration .
In casl.! ur an l.!rrur when a<l<ling fuel, suspend all
actio11s for more tlian 20 seconds and the computer will
cancel the AD D mode.
If the value is correct, press BUTTON 4 to add this
quantity to the prior REM fuel. Double check by
pressing BUTTO N 4 until REM fud is shown. To zero
the remaining fuel val ue, press BUTTON 4 to disp lay
REM and continue to hold. Press BUTTON 3
simultaneously to zero the REM value.
FlJEL COMPUTER NORMAL OPERAT~ON
Press BUTTON 4 to select the desired fuel computc1 opl.!rating mode.

The operational mode will be shown below the words FUEL FLW on the
display.
Fuel Flow is the mode after power-up, and docs not activate any other
letters on the display. This modl.! displays fuel fl ow in Gallons per flour on
a graphical and digital indicator. The digital indicator has a resolu tion ol'0. 1
gallon.
REM - Displays current remaining fuel total in gallons. Mode is only

usable if the computer memory has been updated with fuel information
corresponding to actual usable fuel and the computl.!r has bl.!en opcration:il
during fuel burn. No graphic display with this mode.
HRS - Displays hours of flight timl.! (endurance) calculatl.!d from fuel

remaining as a function of fuel flow and current fuel total i11 computer
memory. Mode is only usable if the computer memory has been updated
with fuel information corresponding to actual usable fuel and the computer
has been operational during l'ud burn. No graphic display with th is modl.!.
BRN - Displays gallons of i'uel burned in 0.1 gallon iiv ·1.: mc111s since
system Power-up. No graphi l.! display with this mode.
ADD - Perm its the l'uel computer electru11ic tank to be updall.!d based
ENAC Approval No.: 02/i 7 1243/SPA

.; -~
' . · d•:Fr?f,J';T '/ ~~~~~~~~~

P6~C
~. :--i... ;1 .;:c act11ai f• 1el added to the ain:ratl tank(s) durmg refuelling.
CYLINDER ANALYSER SYSTEM OPERATION

Vertical Diamond Graph Indicators display cylinder information both
graphically and digitally. Full colour range marks enable rapid qualitative
analysis of cylinder temperatures.
The system powers up in NORMAL MODE and relative cylinders are

graphically displayed from left to right, one through four. EGT graphics arc
initially displayed above the Cl IT rcdlinc marks. Digital values for
C ! l'/EGT pairs arc cycled by pressing BUTTON 2. A detective EGT or
C!-IT probe will leave the respective graph blank. A flashing CHT graph
indicates that a cylinder is too hot, or is being shock cooled.
Pressing BUTTON I when in NORMAL MOD E will place the EGT

: ,,,_;!n;:, within th<: c:nt:rc: cli:-imnnd ~r;1 !1h dis!'l:iy ~n en:ihlP. ra!licl qualitative
<' J'~ l~ ; i:·:. T!1is mode :s temporarily used for precise high resol!:tio1~ engine
!..;Lining, as detailed in the LEANING MODE procedure in Section 2, Para
2.fl. I of the VM I000 Owners Manual (ifan EGT probe was found defective
al power-up, LEANING MODE is unavailable). Carry out engine leaning
until a flashing EGT graph indicates leanest EGT has been detected.
Another press or DUTTON I returns the display to NORMAL MODE.
~ LECTRiCAL MONiTORING SYSTEM OPERATION

VOLTAGE is grap hically and digitally displayed on a dedicated
indicator with full colour range marks permitting rapid qualitative analysis
of voltage levels. A built-in warning system will cause the analogue and
digital indications lo tlash if system voltage is out of nominal range.
AMPERAGE is graphically and digitally displayed on a dedicated

indicator with full colour range marks permitting rapid qualitative analysis
of amperage levels. The digital readout has a resolution of l ampere.
Thi: amp system functions as an alternator load meter, indicating
whether systems arc effectively drawing power.

vu!can.J1r ': Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT V
AIR TEMPERATURE SYSTEM OPERATION
Outside Air Temperature and Cabin Air Temperature arc indicated on

the dcdicatc<l gauge illustrated in f"igurc 2.
OAT is displayed graphically and digitally in degrees Con the left hand
side of lhc indicator. Full colour range marks allow rapid appraisal of
conditions conduci ve to icing.
CAT is displayed graphically and digitally in degrees C on the right

hand side of the indicator. The display reads in I· increments to a maximum
of99°C an<l a minimum of-55°C.
Figure 2
AIR TEMPERATURE GAUGE
CHRONOMETER OPERATION
The chronometer displays Hours, Minutes and Seconds in 24 hour

format, and a rotary switch may be used to select various operating modes.
Both local time LOC and universal time UTC functions arc provided, and
the stopwatch will count either UP or DOWN. In the count down mode the
graphic display sta11s at ti.Ill scale and <lccrcascs proportionately. When time
expires, the entire display !lashes.
ENAC Approval No.: 02/17l2.+3/SPA

Pli3C
StTil f~G UNIVERSAL TIM E CO-OR0 li'1t\TE (UTC)
With power on, position the selector switch "straight up" (between RU N
and STOP). The display should blank. Turn power off then back on. The
display should alternately show Ute! or Loe ! Set UTC time first. When the
display shows Ute! Move the selector switch to the 1-1 RS position. When the
hours value is corn.:ct, move the switch to MIN. Set the minutes a f:;w ahead
or the actual time to ::nab le you to set the '"CConds. Move the switch to SEC
and set it to the desired time. Move switch to STO P. When the preset time
equals the actual time, place the selector switch "straight up" once more.
The display will read Uterdy. When the message disappears, move the
selector switch to any position.
SETT ING LOCAL TIME
With power o n, position the selector switch "straight up" (between RUN
a11t! STOF). Th<: display shr,1tld hlank . Turn power or~· then hack •m. :ne
l'i;.r)lr>y should altcn11k ly show Ute! or Loe? When <~1 c display ,~1 ows Loe?
Move the selector switch to the HRS position. When the hour value is
correct, move the selector switch "straight up". The display will show
Loerdy . Wait for this message to disappear and move the switch to any
desired position .
• '
Figure 3
CHRONOMETER AND SELECTOR SWITCH
(Not to Scale)

vulcanc.ur :ii: Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT V
CHRONOMETER NORMAL OPERATION
RUN -TIMER
Move the selector lo the RUN position. lf no preset countdown time has
been loaded, the display will count up in seconds, minutes and ho urs just
like a normal s topwatch. lfa countdown time has been loaded, the display
wil l coun t down and a g raphic display is also shown.
FLT - FLIGHT TIMER
In the r:LT pos ition the dis play w il l show the total lime in hours, m inutes
and seconds s ince the last system power-up. When required for log-book
entries. flig ht time s hould be noted before closing the Master Switch as the
time is zeroed at the next power-up.
COUNT DOWN - r:UNCTION
Pre-set the timer by moving the selector switch to SEC, MIN, and 1-1RS.
and allow each to increment up to the des ired val ue. When eac h value is
correct, quickly move the selector to the next position. When all values arc
pre-set. se lect the STOP posi tion ( in case of an error, move the selector to
RUN for a few seconds. and re-s tart the procedure).
To beg in timing, select RU N. The graph, represen ting the percentage of

pre-set time re maining, w ill fill to full scale and the dis play w ill begin lo
co unt down.
When countdown is complete, the entire dis play flashes to warn tha t
ti me is expired.
UTC - UN IVERS AL T IME CO-O RDI NATE
Select UTC. T he display w ill s how universal time - equi va lent to

G reenwich Mean Time - along w ith a distinct g raphic pattern indicating that
the time mode is active.

'1, 1·_.,r - LOC/\L TIM E
Select LOC. The display will show local time along with a distinct
graphic pattern showing that one of the two time modes is active.
ECIOO ELECTRONIC C HECKLIST and CAUTION

AD VISORY SYSTEM
Figure 4
EC IOO ELECTRON IC CHECK LI ST
·:·!ic E;' I 00 provides several categories of information that may be

accessec! through the front-panel buttons. Press the I> button to go forward
th;:.itig11 the categories, or the <J button to go backwards. Press the \J button
to select the desired category, and press it again for further information.
Major info rmation categories arc:
ENG INE INFORMATION - Scroll through this category fo r engine

related parameters such as POWER, CYLN DRS, F COMP, etc.
O PERATIONA L CHECKLISTS - The normal checklist has been pre-

programmed into the EC I00.
EMERGENC Y CHECKLISTS - In case of an emergency. press both

<J I> buttons TOGETH ER. This will immediately select the pre-
programmed emergency check Iist category and disable any warning/alert
messages. Press I> to scroll to the checklist topic. and press \J to sec
specific information.
ALERTS and WARN INGS - Corrective action and/or attention is

required. In case of an initial alert/warning condition, the EC I 00 will begin
to flash the condition.
Pressing any button on the front panel will cancel the alarm lor
approxi mately 1.5 minutes to allow other information to be accessed.
ENAC Approval No.: 021171243/S PA

Pag.10ofl4 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcana1r': Section 3
P68C S UPPLEMENT V
To quickly return to the beginning display, press and hold \J /::; buttons
TOGETHER until the beginning display appears.
FUEL SYSTEM OPERATION
The fuel system is an automatic readout capacitative probe system. The

indicator displays a digital readoc1t of the fuel quantity rema ining in each
tank, along with a quick reference graphical representation. A low fuel
warning is im:orporatcd into the system.
WARNING
FUEL TANKCALlBRATlON WASCARR lEDOUTW lTl-I
Tl-IE AIRCRAFT JACKED AND LEVELLED. BE AWARE
THAT A DIFFERENT Kn' ITUDE MAY CAUSE
ERRO NEOUS FUEL LEVEL READI NGS.
If a fuel probe malfunctions, the indicator display is blanked. An

unsteady disp lay should be suspci:tcd and possibly disregarded as fau lty
operation.
Figure 5
f-UE L LEVEL GAUGE
AUTOTRACK SYSTEM OPERATION
The AUTOTRACK system monitors engine parameters and warns or

deviations from established conditions. Operation is as follows :
I) ESTABLISH desired power and mixture conditions. Al low

pressures and temperatures to stabilise. Press BUTTON 3.

$;~ct;..; {I 8
S fJ PPLF.MENT V P68C
2) The AUTOTRACK annunciator will appear on the display and

the system will Lrack engine performance and warn of dev iations
from the start condition(s). Parameter deviations arc alerted by a
flashing corresponding graphic display. Press BUTTON 3 to
cancel and/or re-arm at any time.
Any alert condition will automatically cancel AUTOTRACK
mode.
FLIGHT DATA RECORDER SYSTEM OPERATION
The VM I 000 is supplied with an built-in Flight Data Recorder System

designed to moni tor engine and associated systems performance. Minimum
and maxi mum values arc automatically recorded, and data may be retrieved
at any time, either during or after a fl ight. Actual flight time is also
recorded. Recall of recorded in-flight parameters is cffoctcd as follows:
I) Press BUTTO N 5. The first set of data shown arc flight

minimums cncountcrccl, while the RPM display will show actual
flight time in hours and tenths.
2) Press BUTTON 5 again. The next page contains flig ht maxi mums
encountered. To shut off the recorder display, press BUTTON 5
again. If no button is pressed, the display will shut off after
approximatel y 20 seconds.
There arc no operating limitations associated with this system
SECTI ON 3 - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
3.1 OAT SYSTEM FAILU R E
(a) Avoid flight in freezing moisture condition
ENAC Approva l No.: 02/ 171243/SPA

Pag.12ofl4 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
A.F.M. PINNORW. 7117-111
vulcana1r'a Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT V
3.2 CHRONOMETER SYSTEM FAILURE
(a) Use alternative timing devices
3.3 TOTAL LH ENGINE PARAMETERS AND FUEL Q.TY

INDICATOR FAILURE
(a) Do not modify levers position
(b) To change the flight condition:

RH Throttle SET AS REQUIRED
LH Throttle /\LIGN with RH Throttle
RH Propeller SET AS REQU IRED
LH Propeller ALIGN with RH
Propeller and ADJUST
to reduce propeller RPM
unbalance
(c) Calculate actual Fuel Level by reference to RH Engine Fuel Flow

and Flight Time, with reference to the tables Cruise Performance
in Section 5, para 5.20 of the Flight Manual.
(d) As soon as possi ble LAN D
3.4 TOTAL RH ENGINE PARAMETERS AND OAT AND

CHRONOMETER SYSTEM FAILURE
(a) Do not modify levers position
(b) To change the flight condition:

LH Throttle SET AS REQU IR ED
RH Throttle ALIGN with RH Throttle
LH Propeller SET AS REQUIRED
RH Propeller ALIGN with RH
Propeller and ADJUST
to reduce propeller RPM
unbalance
(a) Avoid flight in freezing moisture conditions and use alternative

timing devices.

. . '·t ,;q q v~..m.;;Cll~ k :tlf ~
SU p ?~ ,r::1vrnl\IT v
---·-·- -·- - --- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -P68C
--
~ a~ As soon as possible LAND
3.5 VM IOOO SYSTEM FAILURE (LH AND RH)
(a) Propellers SET to 50'% full travel

(2500 RPM )
(b) Thrott les AS REQU IRED

(But not ru ll forwa rd )
NOTE
Rckr to different propeller traction due to
engines Manifold Pressure unbalance. Reier to
propeller noise induced by different RPM
(c) As soon as possible LAND
~~CTaG-N 4 - NORMAL PROCEDURES
There are no changes to Normal Operating Procedures when this

equip1rn.:nt is installed.
SECTV1N 5 · PERFORMANCE
There is no change to aircraft performance when this eq uipment is

installed.
T he VM I 000 installation is li sted as item E 11 in the " P68C

Equipment List" P/N NOR I0. 719-1.
Rev. 6
Approved under Authority of DOA No. EASA.2 l.J.009
P:~ge 14of14 with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 March 2004
P68C SUPPLEMF.NT V/I
SUPPLEMENT V/1
DUAL FUEL LEVEL SYSTEM
"ELECTRONICS INTERNATIONAL, Inc."
MODEL FL-2CA
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
Flight Manual when the aircraft is equipped with "Electronics International.
Inc." Model FL-2CA Dual Fuel Level System.
The information contained herein supplements the basic Approved
information not contained in this supplement, consult the basic Approved
Flight Manual. Wherever conflict arises between infonnation in this
supplement and the Approved Flight Manual, the information herein must
take precedence.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

The system consists of the following items: two P-300C Capacitive
Probes with Interface Module, two P-300C/4 Modules and one FL-2CA
Dual Fuel Level Indicator.
One Capacitive Probe is installed in the LH and RH fuel tanks respectively,
between ribs No. I 0 and No. 12. They arc attached to the wing structures by
means ofsuitable mechanical interfaces. Each Interface Module converts the
probe capacitance to a pulse. They arc located externally from the probes
and inserted in the wiring connected to the annaturc and the central
electrode of the probes. The Dual Fuel Level Indicato r is installed on the
instrument panel. The P-300C/4 Module that allows operation with 2 to 4
feet long Capacitive Probes, is installed between the Interface Module and
the Dual Fuel Level Indicator.
The Dual Fuel Level Indicator featuring dual 90 degree analog displays
and a digital display. These two disp lays provide the indication of the fuel
level for the lctl and right wing tanks. Although the digital display can be
calibrated in gallons, pounds or liters, Vulcanair calibrates the display in
gallons with 0.5 gallon increments and NO ANY OTHER
CONFIGURATION IS APPROVED.
Rev.5
Apprnvcd by EASA unde1· Approval
No. 088 on 10 October 2003 Page I of6
s~ctioll ~
vu;cana:r-e:J
SUPFLEMENT Vi l P68C
Th:.: Dual Fuel Level Indicator has a programmed filter that affects the
r~sponsc of the instrument to changes in fuel level. Although the tilter can
be set to 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128 seconds response, Vulcanair sets the filter to
32 seconds and NO ANY OTHER CONFIGURATION IS APPROVED.
The dual 90 degree analog displays provide a quick rctcrencc of the

left and right tank fuel levels. More precise information is provided in the
digital display. An ad vantage of the analog display is its ability to emit a
green, yellow or red light. With a quick glance you can determine if your
fuel level is in the green, yellow, or red operating range. In addition the
Dual Fuel Level Indicator provides the following warnings:
a) 1/4 TANK WARNING - If the fuel level i11 the Je ll or right tank
reaches 1/4, the appropriate YELLOW LED will blink. This is
intended to alert you that the fuel level is getting LOW.
b) LOW FUEL - If the fuel level in the left or right tank reaches 1/8,
the appropri:itl' RFD !_.FD will hlink This is intr.n<ir.<i to alert you
t;rnt the fuel level is getting VERY LOW.
c) "OPEN" - If one of the wires coming from the left or right fuel
tank probe is interrupted, the analog display relative to the tank
with the problem will show tank empty and the digital display will
show "OPEN." This warning is intended to alert you when the
Dual Fuel Level Indicator has lost the signal from one or both of
the: rucl probes.
Note:
To acknowledge a blinking LED (i.e., to stop the blinking), change
the position of the Tank Selector Switch. Once a blinking warning
is acknowledged it will not occur again until the Dual Fuel Level
Indicator's power has been turned off and back on. Although these
blinking warnings arc valuable, they can be annoying. For this reason
a way of shutting them off is provided.
During night operation the analog LEDs may be too bright.
If so, turn the instrument light dimmer and the analog lights (LEDs)
will dim. The red LEDs will always be displayed at rull intensity
/\ single switch allows selection of left, right or both fuel tank

quantities. With the Tank Selector Switch in the LEFT or RIGHT position.
the digital display will show the fuel level in the appropriate tank ( 1-/- 4 U.S.
Rev.5
P68C SUPPLEMENT VII
Gallons f'o r fuel levels of more than a I/4 of fue l tank capacity; +/- 2 U.S.
Gallons for fuel levels of less than a 1/4 of fuel tank capacity). With the
Tank Selector Switch in the TOTAL position the total fuel (left + right) will
be displayed. Fuel levels below 2 gallons will be displayed as "O" in the left,
right and total position. The digital display backlight is permanently
powered up.
On every power-up, the FL-2CA checks the left and right tank
calibration data independently and if an error is found, the FL-2CA will
display it and locks the unit in an inoperative mode. The tirst error code that
is found is shown in the digital display.
Note:
For more detailed operational information and troubleshooting refer to
the "Electronics International Inc." Operating and Installation
Instructions P/N 0 1 0131941 A dated 15 October 200 I or latest
app licable revision.
The system is powered to 28 Ydc by the Main Bus and is protected by

a "FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR" 2 Amp. circuit breaker.
. ... _
e•F .·. ;•. ·.
. _, .
:1n .~1n:
E FUEL
TOTAi.
LEF'r ~ RIGHT
E
Figure I
FL-2CA Fuel Level Indicator
Rev. 5
Approved by EASA under Apprnval
No. 088 on I 0 October 2003 Page 3 of6
V U l\;idl ldll E3
P68C

There arc no changes to the airplane limitations when this system is
installed and operative.
FL-2CA /, CCURACY LIMITATIO NS
Angle of Attack:
The FL-2CA must be calibrated with the aircraft jacked and levelled.
If the aircraft is in a different attitude, the fuel level indicator may
di!<play inaccurate fuel level.
Full Fuel Readings:

When the tank is full , the Fuel Level Probe is not able to detect the total
lo1dcd fuel. The max fuel level detected from the FL-2CA system is 60
U5 Gallons for the STD Range Configuration and 72 U.S. Gallons for
the Long Range Configuration. Below these val ues the Fuel Level
Probe i.:; able to detect a c huugc, lhcii t!i~ dispiiiycd fuc! !eve! shvuk! be
accurate; ab:,vc these val ues the Fut::I Level Probe may not be able to
accurately measure a change.
Low Fuel Readings:

Do not rely on the FL-2CA to determine the fuel in the tank for
indicated tank levels below 1/8, since the FL-2CA may not be able to
accuratdy mCH'illre the last few gallons o J' fuel in the tanks.
: MPORTANT CONSIDERATIONS
DO NOT SOLELY RELY ON THE FUEL LEVEL INSTRUMENT TO
DETERM INE T HE FUEL LEVELS IN THE AIRCRAFT. The use of the
FL-2CA does not eliminate or reduce the necessity for the pilot to use good
fli ght planning, preflight and in-flight techniques for managing fuel.
Refer to the "Electronics International Inc." Operating and Installation

Instructions P/N 0 10131941 A dated 15 October 200 I or latest applicable
revis ion for more accuracy limitations and important considerations.
A copy of the a foresaid m a nu l must be kept in the ai rcraft at a ll times.
Rev.5
A.r·.M. P/ 1V NVJ(/rJ. 707- t i:
vulcanai"~ Section 8
P68C SUPPU~ MENT V/ 1
PLACARD(S)
a) Near the FL-2CA lndi.c ator:
C~UTION
DO NOT SOLEl..Y RELY-ON THE FUEL L.EVEL:
INSTRUMEHT•.TO - DETERMlNE. THlbFUEL..
·l:EVELS,JN :THE AIRCRAFT, BECAUSE-THE,
; USE'OF .tHe:F~A DOES. NOT EUMINATE-
;:O.R:ReotJ~THENliCESSITY.FOR ll!EPILOT_
: TO~ Cl's~"'llO,Otn Fl:IGHl'' : p LANNING;;;
, P.REl'U~'(:YfD'JNfLIGHT ·~CHNIQU~S::
~ FOR~·rr~om~~UEL.-· .: ' •. -,: '::- • !=
b) In full view of Pilot:
: . :. · · - - WARNING •. · ·.:.
- FUEL TANK . CALIBRATION WAS CARRIED
OUT WITH ·THE AIRCRAFT JACKED AND
'LEVELLSO. BE AWARE-THAT A DIFFERENT
ATirf\jO'E MAY c;e.use"ERRONEOUS Fuei.:-
- - _
LEVELREADINGS. • · . . . -
....~- ~ ~·.. ·.... -

FUEL LEVEL SYSTEM FAILURE/ MALFUNCTION
IN-FLIGHT
(a) Calculate actual Fuel Level using the LH and RH Engi ne Fuel
Flow Indications Vs. the fli ght time or. ifopcrativc, use additional
fuel computer features of the fue l flow indicators.
(b) As soon as poss ible LAND
Rev.5
No. 088 on lO October 2003 Page 5 of6
i~:rncana.i, ~
P68C
PREFUGHT
Do nut solely rely on the FL-2CA to determine the fuel level in the fuci
tanks. The rilot must visually check/measure th;; fucl levels in the tanks
before cv.::ry take-off. Cross-check the measured fuel levels with the
disp',1; d levels on the FL-2CA. Also cros:>-chcck these levels with the fuel
1
r~· qui rc mcnts for the flight listed in your Ilight plan.
P~-.Z C A OPERATION
:,!) Set the Tank Selector Switch to the LEFT position to

display the LI-I Tank Fuel Level.
(b) Sc: the Tank Selector Switch to the. RIGHT position to

~i ~ Jlay the RH Tank Fuel Le vcl.
I_:·) '": . ' th: Tank Selector Switch to the TOTAL oosillon !o
j1 ..,.!i:!y the Totai Fuci Level (idl + right).
~i !'.LC'fiON S - PERFORMANCE
There arc no chi;;gcs to the ai rplane pcrfrmnanccs when this system
is i11stallcd and operative.
t 'ECT!ON 6 - W EIGHT AND BALANCE

T he im;1·11lation of the "Electronics International Inc." Model FL-2CA
Dual Fuc! Lc'lcl System is listed as item E 13 in the "P68C Equipment List"
P/N NORI 0.719- 1.
Rcv.6
Approved under Authority of DOA No. EASA.21..1.009
Page p of6 with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 Ma rch 2004
SUPPLEMENTS P68C
The following is a list of Supplements applicable to the P68C aircraft:
SERIAL NUMBER ... 1-3 ') .................. .

REGISTRATION MARKS. . . 0(~ 01.V.... .
INSERTION
SUPPLEMENT BY APPROVED
DATE
1/i .; / z /oc; S/El E J-/.;llJJ. /
Figure 8- 1

8-iv DATE: MAY 7, 2002
A.f: M. P/NNORI0.707-18
vulcanaire: Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENTS
SECTION 8
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT V VM I 000 ELECTRON IC POWER

PLANT INSTRUMENTATION
(As per change No. MOD.P68/ 18) ..... 11 pages
SUPPLEMENT Vi l DUAL FUEL LEVEL SYSTEM
"ELECTRONICS INTERNATIONAL, INC."
Model FL-2CA
(As per change No. MOD.P68/54 ) ...... 6 pages
Rev.8
with No. AS-AFM/04/009 on 28 May 2004 8-iia
This page inlcnlionally lcfl blank
P68C SUPPLEMENTS
SECTION 8
SUPPLEMENTS
8.1 INTRODUCTION
This section consists of a series of supplements, each of which covers
a single optional system which may be installed in the aircraft.
NOTE
The aforementioned Flight Manual Supplements for
the Vulcanair model P68C a ircraft a re FAA-
approved for U.S. registered aircrafts in accordance
with the provisions of 14 CFR Section 21.29.
The information contained in each supplement
applies only when the related equipment is installed
in the aircraft.
Complete figure 8-1 by inserting the applicable
supplements for the installed equipment, so as to
define the aircraft configuration.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 8-iii
Section 8 vulcanaire:=
SUPPLEMENTS P68C
The following is a list of Supplements applicable to the P68C aircraft:

. '?:> .:;-
SERIAL NUMBER .... ~ .. . .. ...... .......... .
t1/f-.. VHV
REG ISTRATION MARKS. . V . ___ . _ ...... _. .. .
INSERTION
SUPPLEMENT BY APPROVED
DATE
~ii
f:.i z ~
~ l"l~n Ir SoA I
M46-CS 1
-~r\
C'-.1
Q. .._ - me TardfB \
·~ '
~
en '\\. \ \..
t?.12 -C'.J
\\ -
'~
s
\j
Figure 8-1

8-iv DATE: MAY7,2002
vulcanaire:l Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT A
SUPPLEMENT A
INSTALLATION OF
PHOTOGRAMMETRIC HATCH
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
Flight Manual when the Photogrammetric Hatch is installed.
Airplane Flig ht Manua l. For limitations, procedures and performance
this supplement and the approved Flig ht Manual, the information herein
The Photogrammetric Hatch can be opened in flight.

The hatch is actuated by a hand wheel located at frame no. 8, on the
floor, right hand side.
The hatch can be operated at all speeds and configurations permitted.
Intentional sideslips with the hatch open are prohibited.

None

It is compulsory for the hatch operator to keep his safety belt fastened.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page I of2
Section 8 vulcanaire:I
SUPPLEMENT A P68C
No change

No change
ENAC Approva l No. : 02/171243/SPA

Pa~e 2 of2 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
vulcanaira: Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT D/1
SUPPLEMENT D/l
HONEYWELL (ex-BENDIX/KING) 150 SERIES

FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 1 - GENERAL

Flight Manual when the airplane is equipped with the Honeywell 150 Series
Automatic Flight Control Systems.
DESCRIPTION
This manual is provided to acquaint the pilot with the limitations as well
as normal and emergency operating procedures of the King 150 Series
Automatic Flight Control Systems. The limitations presented arc pertinent
to the operation of the 150 System as installed in the Vulcanair Model P68C
airplane; the Flight Control System must be operated within the limitations
herein specified.
The 150 Series AFCS is certified in this airplane with 2 ax is autopilot

control pitch and roll.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page I of31
SUPPU<:MENT D/t P68C
The 150 Series AFCS has an electric pitch trim system which provides
autotrim during autopilot operation and manual electric trim for the pilot.
The trim system is designed to withstand any single inflight malfunction.
Trim faults are visually and aurally annunciated.
A lockout device prevents autopilot engagement until the system has

been successfully preflight tested.
The following conditions will cause the Autopilot to disengage

automatically:
(a) Power failure.
(b) Internal Flight Control System failure.
(c) With the KCS 55A Compass System, loss of a valid compass
signal (displaying HDG flag) disengages the Autopilot when a
mode using heading information is engaged. With the HOG flag
present, the Autopilot may be re-engaged in the basic w ings level
mode along with any vertical mode.
(d) Roll rates in excess of 16' per second will cause the autopilot to
disengage except when the CWS switch is depressed.
(e) Pitch rates in excess of 8' per second will cause the autopilot to
disengage except when the CWS switch is depressed.

Page 2 of 31 DATE: MAY7,2002
P68C SUPPLEMENT 0 /1
KC 192
Kl256 AUTOPILOT COMPUTER
AP MASTER
SWITCH
SWITCH PLACARD BREAKER PLACARDS
Figure I
AUTOPILOT INSTRUMENT LAYOUT

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page 3 of31
SUPPLEMENT D/l P68C
I. KFC 150 SYSTEM KC 192 AUTOPILOT COMPUTER
Complete FLIGHT Director and Autopilot computer, including

system mode annunciators and system controls.
2. NOTUSED
3. MODE ANNUNCIATORS (OPTIONAL)
Illuminated when a mode is selected by the corresponding mode

selector button (PUSH ON - PUSH OFF).
4. GLIDESLOPE (GS) ANNUNCIATOR
Illuminated continuously whenever the autopilot is coupled to the

glideslope signal. The GS annunciator will flash if the glideslopc
signal is lost (GS flag in CD! or absence of glideslope pointers in
KI 525A).
The autopilot reverts to pitch attitude hold operation. If a valid
glideslope signa! returns within six seconds, the autopilot will
automatically recouple in the GS mode.
If the valid signal does not return within six seconds, the autopilot
wi ll remain in pitch attitude hold mode until such time that a valid
glideslope returns and the aircraft passes thru the glideslope. At
that point GS couple will re-occur.

vulcanaire: Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT D/1
5. TRIM WARNING LIGHT (TRIM)
On continuously whenever trim power is not on or the system has

not been preflight tested. THE TRIM warning light comes on and
is accompanied by an audible warning whenever a manual trim
fault is detected.
The Manual Trim System is monitored for the Trim Servo running
without a command. The TRIM warning light comes on and will
be accompanied by a steady audible tone whenever an autotrim
failure occurs.
The autotrim system is monitored for the following failures: trim
servo running w ithout a command; trim servo not running when
commanded to run; trim servo running in the wrong direction.
The Trim Circuit Breaker may be cycled off to silence the
continuous tone but the trim fail light wi ll remain on. Manual
Electric Trim may be used but the autopilot should not be engaged.
6. AUTOPILOT (AP) ANNUNC IATOR
Illuminated continuously whenever the autopilot is engaged.

Flashes approximately 12 times whenever the autopilot is
disengaged (an aural alert will also sound for 2 seconds).
7. AUTOPILOT ENGAGE (A P ENG) BUTTON
When pushed, it engages autopilot if all logic conditions are met.
8. PREFLIGHT TEST (TEST) BUTTON
When momentarily pushed, it initiates preflight test sequence

which automatically turns on all annunciator lights, tests the roll
and pitch rate monitors, tests the autotrim fault monitor, checks the
manual trim drive voltage and tests all a utopilot valid and dump
logic. If the preflight is successfully passed, the AP annunciator
light will flash for approximately 6 seconds (an aural tone will also
sound simultaneously with the annunciator flashes).
The autopilot can not be engaged until the autopilot preflight tests
are successfully passed.

SUPPLEMENT D/1 P68C
9. BACK COURSE APPROACH (Bq MODE SELECTOR

BUTTON
When pressed it will select the Back Course Approach mode. This
mode functions identically to the approach mode except that
response to LOC signals is reversed. Glideslope coupling 1s
inhibited in the Back Course Approach mode.
I 0. APPROACH (APR) MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
When pressed, it will select the Approach mode. This mode

prov'.des all angle intercept (with HSI) or a fixed angle intercept of
45° (with DG), automatic beam capture and tracking of YOR,
RNAV or LOC signals plus Glideslope coupling in the case of an
ILS.
The tracking gain of the APR mode is greater than the gain in the
NA V mode. The APR annunciator on the Autopilot Computer wi 11
flash until the automatic capture sequence is initiated.
11. NA YIGATl.ON (NA V) MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
When pressed, it will select the Navigation mode. The mode

provides all angle intercept (with HSI) or a fixed angle intercept of
45° (with DG), automatic beam capture and tracking of VOR,
RNA Y or LOC signals.
The NA V annunciator on the Autopilot Computer will flash until
the automatic capture sequen.::e is initiated.
12. HEA DI NG (HOG) MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
When pressed, it will select the Heading mode, which commands

the airplane to turn to and maintain the heading selected by the
heading bug on the DG or HSI.
A new heading may be selected at any time and will result in the
airplane turning to the new heading with a maximum bank angle
of about 22°. Selecting HOG mode will cancel NAY, APR or BC
track mode.

P68C SUPPLEMENT D/1
13. ALTITUDE HOLD (ALT) MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
When pressed, it wi ll select the Altitude Hold mode, which

commands the airplane to maintain the pressure altitude existing
at the moment of selection.
Engagement may be accomp lished in climb, descent, or level
flight. In the APR mode, altitude hold will automatically disengage
when the glideslope is captured.
14. FLIGHT DIRECTOR (FD) MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
When pressed, it will select the Flight Director mode (with KC

192 Autopilot Computer only), bringing the Command Bar in view
on the Kl 256 and will command wings level and pitch attitude
hold. The FD mode must be selected prior to Autopilot
engagement.
15. VERTICAL TRIM CONTROL
A spring loaded to center rocker switch which will provide up or

down pitch command changes: while in ALT, it will adjust altitude
at rate of about 500 fpm; when not in ALT, it will adjust pitch
attitude at a rate of 0.7 deg/sec.
It will cancel GS couple. The aircraft must pass through the
glideslope again to allow GS recouple.
16. AUTOPILOT CONTROL WHEEL SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Switch assembly mounted on the pilot's control wheel associated

with the autopilot and manual electric trim systems.
17. AUTOPILOT DISCO NNECT/TRIM INTERRUPT (NP

DISC/TRIM INTER) Switch
When pressed, it will disengage the autopilot and cancel all

operating Flight Director modes. When pressed and held, it will
interrupt all electric trim power (stop trim motion), disengage the
autopilot and cancel all operating Flight Director modes.

SUPPLEMENT D/ 1 P68C
18. CONTROL WHEEL STEERING (CWS) BUTTON
When pressed, it allows pilot to control manually the aircraft

(disengages the pitch, roll and pitch trim servos) without
cancellation of any of the selected modes.
It will engage the Flight Director mode ifnot previously engaged.
Automatically synchronizes the Flight Director/Autopilot to the
pitch attitude present when the CWS switch is released, or to the
present pressure altitude when operating in the ALT hold mode.
Will cancel GS couple.
The aircraft must pass through the glideslopc again to allow GS
recouple.
19. MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM CONTROL SWITCHES
A split switch unit in which the left half provides power to engage
the trim servo clutch and the right half to control the direction of
motion of the trim servo motor.
Both halves of the split trim switch must be actuated in order for
the manual trim to cooperate in the desired direction. When the
autopilot is engaged, operation of the manual electric trim wi ll
automatically disconnect the autopilot.
20. KI 256 FLIGHT COMMAND INDICATOR (FCI)
Displays airplane attitude as a conventional attitude gyro and

displays commands for flight director operation. The gyro is air
driven.
21. DECISION HEIGHT (DH) ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT
Optional light for use with the aircraft optional radar altimeter.

vulcanaire:: Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT D/1
Figure 2
KC 192

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Pa~e 9 of31
Section 8 vulcanaire::
SUPPLEMENT D/ I P68C
-@
PILOT'S CONTROL WHEEL

LEFT HORN
Figure 3
AUTOPILOT CONTROL WHEEL SW ITCH CAP

Pa~e 10 of31 DATE: MAY 7, 2002
P68C SUPPLEMENT D/1
22. ROLL ATTITUDE INDEX
Displays airplane roll attitude with respect to the roll attitude scale.
23. ROLL ATTITUDE SCALE
Scale marked at 0, I 0, 20,30,60 and 90 degrees.
24. PITCH ATTITUDE SCALE
Moves with respect to the symbolic airplane to present pitch

attitude. Scale graduated at 0, 5, I 0, 15, 20 and 25 degrees.
25. COMMAND BAR
Displays computed steering commands referenced to the symbolic

airplane.
The command bar is visible only when FD mode is selected. The
command bar will be biased out of view whenever the system is
invalid or a Flight Director mode is not engaged.
26. FCI SYMBOLIC A IRPLANE
Airplane pitch and roll attitude is displayed by the relationship

between the fixed symbolic airplane and the movable background.
During flight director operation, the symbolic airplane is flown to
align it with the command bar to satis fy the flight director
commands.

Section 8 vulcanair":l
SUPPLEMENT D/l P68C
Figure 4
Kl 256

P68C SUPPLEMENT D/1
27. Kl 525A HORIZONTAL S ITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
Provides a pictorial presentation of aircraft deviation relative to

YOR radials or localizer beams. It also displays glideslope
deviations and gives heading reference with respect to magnetic
north.
28. NAY FLAG
Flag is in view when the NA V receiver signal is inadequate. When

a NA V flag is present in the navigation indicator (COi or Kl
525A) the autopilot operation is not affected.
The pilot must monitor the navigation indicators for NAV flags to
insure that the Autopi lot and/or Flight Director are tracking valid
navigation information.
29. LUBBER LI NE
Indicates aircraft magnetic heading on compass card (45).
30. HEADING WARNING FLAG (HOG)
When flag is in view the heading display is inval id. Ifa HDG flag
appears and a lateral mode (HDG, NAY, APR or APR BC) is
selected, the Autopilot wi ll be disengaged. The Autopilot may be
re-engaged in the basic wings level mode along with any vertical
mode. The CWS switch would be used to manouevrc the aircraft.
3 1. COURSE BEARING POINTER
Indicates selected VOR course or localizer course on compass card

(36).
The selected VOR radial or localizer heading remains set on the
compass card when the compass card (36) rotates.
32. TO/ FROM INDICATOR FLAG
Indicates direction of YOR station relative to selected course.

DATE: MAY?,2002 Pa~e 13 of31
Sec(ion 8 vulcanaire:
SUPPLEMENT D/ 1 P68C
33. DUAL GLIDESLOPE POINTERS
Indicate on glideslopc scale (34) aircraft displacement from

glideslope beam center. Glideslope pointers in view indicate a
usable glideslopc signal is being received.
34. GLIDESLOPE SCALES
Indicate displacement from glideslopc beam center. A glideslopc

deviation bar displacement of 2 dots, represents full scale (0. 7°)
deviation above or below glidcslope beam centerline.
3.5. HEADING SELECTOR KNOB ( L.. ..-')
Positions heading bug (40) on compass card (36) by rotating the

heading selector knob. The Bug rotates with the compass card.
36. COMPASS CA RD
Rotates to display heading of airplane with reference to lubber line

(29) on HSI or DG.
37. COURSE SELECTOR KNOB
Position course bearing pointer (3 1) on the compass card (36) by

rotating the course selector knob.
38. COURSE DEVlATION BAR (D-BAR)
The center portion of the omni bearing pointer moves laterally to

indicate pictorially the relat!cnship between the aircraft and the
selected course. It indicates degrees of angular displacement from
YOR radials and local izer beams, or displacement in nautical miles
from RNA V courses.
39. COURSE DEVIATION SCALE
A course deviation bar displacement of 5 dots represents full scale

(VOR =JO", LOC = 2 1/2°, RNAV = 5NM, RNAV APR = 1
l/4NM) deviation from beam centerline.

Page 14 of3l DATE: MAY 7, 2002
P68C SUPPLEMENT D/ 1
40. HEADING BUG
Moved by ' , ,- • knob (35) to select desired heading.
41. K I 07 NON-SLA YEO DIRECTIONAL GYRO (DG)
Provides a stable visual indication of aircraft heading to the pilot.

The gyro is air driven.
42. GYRO ADJUSTMENT KNOB (PUSH)
When pushed in, allows the pilot to manually rotate the gyro
compass card (36) to correspond with the magnetic heading
indicated by the magnetic compass. The un-slaved compass card
must be manually reset periodically to compensate for precessional
errors in the gyro.
43. Kl 209 VOR/LOC/GLIDESLOPE IND ICATOR
Provides rectilinear display of VOR/LOC and Glideslope

deviation.
44. COURSE INDEX
Indicates selected VOR course.
45. COURSE CARD
Indicates selected VOR course under course index.
46. GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION NEEDLE
Indicates deviation from ILS glideslope.
47. G LIDESLOPE SCALE
Indicates displacement from glideslope bea m center. A glideslope

deviation needle displacement of5 dots, represents full scale (0.7°)
deviation above or below glidcslopc beam centerline.

SUPPLEMENT D/l P68C
48. RECIPROCAL COURSE INDEX
Indicates reciprocal of selected VOR course.
49. OMNI BEARING SELECTOR (OBS) KNOB
Rotates course card to selected course.
50. COURSE DEVIATION NEEDLE
Indicates course deviation from selected omni course or localizer

centerline.
51. GLIDESLOPE (GS) FLAG
Flag is in view when the GS receiver signal is inadequate.
FIGURE I KING 150 AUTOPILOT SYSTEM

CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
The airplane BATTERY switch function is unchanged and can be used

in an emergency to shut off electrical power to all flight control systems
while the problem is isolated.
The AUTOPILOT switch supplies power to the autopi lot (A/ P) and
TRJM circuit breakers. ·
The following circuit breakers are used to protect the following

elements of the King 150 Series Autopilot:
LABEL FUNCTION
A/ P Supplies power to the KC 192 computer, to the

autopilot pitch and roll servo, and the TRIM circuit
breaker. The A/ P circuit breaker receives power from
the bar.

P68C SUPPLEMENT D/ I
TRlM Supplies power to the autotrim and manual electric

pitch trim systems. The trim circuit breaker receives
power from the N P circuit breaker.
HSI Supplies power to the optional KCS 55A Compass

System.
The HSI circuit breaker receives power from the bar.

SUPPLEMENT D/1 P68C
Figure 5
Kl 525A HSI

P68C SUPPLEMENT D/t
Figure 6
K1209
VOR/LOC/GS INDICATOR

SECTION 2-LIMITATIONS
(a) During autopilot operation, a pilot with seat belt fastened must be
seated at the left pilot position.
(b) The autopilot must be OFF during takeoff and landing.
(c) The system is approved for Category I operation only (Approach

mode selected).
(d) Autopilot operation prohibited with more than 15° flaps.
( e) The minimum altitude for autopilot operating is 200 ft AGL during

an approach and 1000 ft AGL during cruise, climb and descent.
(f) Max A/P operating speed is 170 KlAS.
NOTE
In accordance with FAA recommendation
(AC00-24A), use of basic "Altitude Hold"
mode is not recommended during operation
in severe turbulence.
PLACARDS:
NONE
SECTION 3·- EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

(a) In case of Autopilot malfunction: (accomplish Items 1 and 2
simultaneously)
( l) Airplane Control Wheel -

GRASP FlRMLY and regain aircraft control.
(2) A/ P DISC/TRIM INTER Switch -

PRESS and HOLD.

vulcanair':l Section 8
(3) A/P DlSC/TRJM INTER Switch -

RELEASE while observing pitch trim wheel. If pitch trim
wheel is in motion, follow the Electric Trim Malfunction
Procedure.
(b) In case of Electric Trim Malfunction (either manual electric or

autotrim):
( I) N P DlSC/TRJM INTER Switch -

PRESS and HOLD throughout recovery.
(2) TRIM Circuit Breaker - OFF.
(3) Aircraft - RETRI M manually.
CA UT I ON
When disconnecting the autopilot after a trim

malfunction, hold the control wheel firml y, up to 45
pounds of force on the control wheel may be
necessary to hold the aircraft leveled.
(c) Engine Failure (Coupled)
( I) Disengage AP.
(2) Follow basic A irplane Flight Manual engine inoperative
procedures.
(3) Airplane rudder and aileron axes must be manually trimmed
prior to engaging autopilot for engine inoperative operations.
CAUTION
If rudder trim cannot be maintained when power is

changed during an engine inoperative coupied
approach, disengage a utopilot and continue
approach manually.

DAT E: MAY 7, 2002 Page 21 of31
SUPPLEMENT D/l P68C
Maximum Altitude losses due to autopi lot malfunction:
Configuration Alt loss
Cruise, Climb 300'
Descent 300'
Manoeuvering 180'
APPR 50'
SE APPR 70'
(a) PREFLIGHT (Perform prior to each flight)
(1) GYROS -
Allow 3-4 minutes for gyros to come up to speed.
(2) A/ P MASTER - ON
(3) PREFLIGHT TEST BUTTON -

PRESS momentarily and NOTE:
a. All annunciator lights on (Trim annunciator flashing).
b. After approximately 5 seconds, all annunciator lights go

off except AP which will flash approx imately 12 times
and then remain off. Aural alert tone should also sound.
NOTE
If trim warning light stays on then the autotrim did

not pass preflight test. The autopi lot circuit breaker
should be pulled. Manual electric trim can not be
used.

vulcanair-:= Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT D/l
(4) MANUAL ELECTRlC TRlM - TEST as follows:
a. Actuate left side of split switch unit to the fore and aft
positions. The trim wheel should not move on its own.
Rotate the trim wheel manually against the engaged
clutch to check the pilot's trim overpower capability.
b. Actuate right side of split switch unit to the fore and aft
positions. Trim wheel should not move on its own and
normal trimwhccl force is required to move it manually.
e. Press the AIP DISC/RIM INTER switch down and

hold. Manual Electric Trim should not operate either
nose up or nose down.
(5) FLIGHT DIRECTOR -

ENGAGE by pressing FD or CWS button.
(6) AUTOPILOT -
ENGAGE by pressing AP ENG button.
(7) FLIGHT CONTROLS -

MOVE fore, aft, left & right to veri fy that the autopilot can
be overpowered.
(8) N P DISC/TRIM INTER Switeh-

PRESS. Verify that the autopilot disconnects and all flight
director modes arc cancelled.
(9) TRIM -
SET to take off position.

DATE: MAY 7, 2002 Page 23 of3l
SUPPLEMENT 0 /1 P68C
(b) AUTOPILOT OPERATION
(I) Before takeoff

A/P DISCffRlM INTER Switch - PRESS.
(2) lnflight Autopilot Engagement
a. FD Mode Selector Button (KFC 150 Only) - PRESS.
b. AP ENG Button - PRESS. Note AP annunciator on. If

no other modes are selected the autopilot will operate in
wings level and pitch attitude hold.
CAUTION
Do not help the autopilot as the autopilot will

run the pitch trim to oppose your he lp.
(3) Climb or Descent
a. Usi ngC WS
I. CWS Button -
PRESS and MOYE aircraft nose to the desired
attitude.
2. CWS Button -
RELEASE. Autopilot will mainta in aircraft
pitch attitude up to the pitch limits of + 15 ' or -
10'.
b. Using Vertical Trim
I. VERTICAL TRJM Control - PRESS either up

or down to modify aircraft attitude at a rate of
0.7 deg/sec. up to the pitch limits of + 15° or -
IO' .
ENAC Approval No.: 02/ 17 1243/SPA

P68C SUPPLEMENT D/I
2. VERTICAL TRIM Control - RELEASE when

desired aircraft attitude is reached. The autopilot
will maintain the desired pitch attitude.
(4) Altitude Hold
a. ALT Mode Selector Button -PRESS. Note ALT mode

annunciator ON. Autopilot will maintain the selected
pressure altitude.
b. Change selected altitudes
1. Using CWS (Recommended for altitude

changes greater than I 00 ft.)
a) CWS Button - PRESS and fly aircraft

to desired pressure altitude.
b) CWS Button - RELEASE when

desi red pressure altitude is reached.
The autopilot will maintain the desired
pressure altitude.
2. Using Vertical Trim (Recommended for altitude

changes less than I 00 ft.)
a) VERTICAL TRIM Control -

PRESS either up or down. Vertical
Trim will seek an altitude rate of
change of about 500 fpm.
b) VERTICAL TRIM Control -

RELEASE when desi red pressure
altitude is reached. The autopilot will
maintain the desired pressure altitude.
(5) Heading Changes
a. Manual Heading Changes
I. CWS Button PRESS and MANOEUVRE

aircraft to the desired heading.

SUPPLEMENT D/1 P68C
2. CWS Button RELEASE. Autopilot will

maintain aircraft in wings level attitude.
NOTE
Aircraft heading may change in the wings level

mode due to an aircraft out of trim condition.
b. Heading Hold
I. HEADING Selector Knob -

SET BUG to desired heading.
2. HOG Mode Selector Button -

PRESS. Note HOG mode annunciator ON.
Autopilot will automatically tum the aircraft to
the selected heading.
c. Command Tums (Heading Hold mode ON)
I. HEADING Selector Knob -

MOVE BUG to the desired heading. Autopilot
will automatically tum the ai rcraft to the new
selected heading.
(6) NAV Coupling
a. When equipped with HSI.
I. COURSE Bearing Pointer -

SET to desired course.
NOTE
When equipped with NA V I/NA V 2 switching and

NA V 2 is selected, set OBS to the desi\ipred course.
2. HEADING Selector Knob -

SET BUG to provide desired intercept angle.

3. NAY Mode Selector Button - PRESS.
a) If the Course Deviation Bar is greater

than 2 to 3 dots: the aircraft will
continue in HOG mode (or wings level
if HOG not selected) with the NAY
annunciator flashing; when the
computed capture point is reached the
HOG mode wi ll disengage, the NAY
annunciator will come on steady and
the selected course will be
automatically captured and tracked.
b) If the 0-Bar is less than 2 to 3 dots:

the HOG mode will disengage upon
selecting NAY mode; the NAY
the capture/track sequence will begin
automatically.
b. When equipped with DG.
1. OBS Knob - SELECT desired course.
2. NAY Mode Selector Button - PRESS.
3. HEADING Selector Knob - ROTATE BUG to

agree with OBS course.
NOTE
When NAY is selected, the lateral operating

mode will change from HOG (if selected) to
w ings level for 5 seconds. A 45° intercept
angle wi ll be then automatically established
based on the position of the bug.

a) If the D-Bar is greater than 2 to 3 dots:

the autopilot will annunciate HOG
mode (unless HOG not selected) and
NA V flashing; when the computed
capture point is reached the HOG
annunciator will go off, the NA V
th e selected course wil l b e
automatically captured and tracked .
b) If the D-Bar is less than 2 to 3 dots:

selecting NA V mode; the NA V
the capture/ track sequence will
automatically begin.
(7) Approach (APR) Coupling
With Kl 525A HSI.
I. COURSE Bearing Pointer -

SET to desired course.
NOTE
When equipped with NA V I/NAV 2 switching and

NA V 2 is selected, set OBS to the desidcrcd course.
2. HEADING Selector Knob -

3. APR Mode Selector Button - PRESS.


than 2 to 3 ·dots: the a ircraft will
if HOG not selected) with the APR
annunc iator flashing; whe n the
HOG mode will disengage, the APR
annum.:iator will come on steady and
the se lected course will be
b) If the 0 -Bar is less than 2 to 3 dots:

selecting APR mode; the APR
annunc iator will come on steady and
the capture/track sequence will
automatically begin.
(8) BC Approach Coupling
a. With Kl 525A HSI
1. CO URSE Bearing Pointer -

SET to the !LS front course inbound headi ng.
NOTE
When equipped with NA V I/NA V 2 switching and

NA V 2 is selected, set O BS to the ILS front course
inbound heading.
2. HEA DING Selector Knob -

3. BC Mode Se lector Button - PRESS.

than 2 to 3 dots: the aircraft will

SUPPLEMENT D/ l P68C
if HOG not selected) with BC

annunciated steady and APR
annunciator flashing; when the
HOG mode will disengage, and the BC
and APR annunciators will come on
steady and the selected course will be
b) If the D-Bar is less than 2 to 3 dots:

selecting BC mode; the APR BC
the capture/track sequence will begin
automatically.
(9) Glideslope Coupling
NOTE
Glideslope coupling is inhibited when operating in

NA V or APR BC modes. Glideslope coupling
occurs automatically in the APR mode.
a. APR Mode - ENGAGED.
b. At glideslope centering - NOTE GS annunciator ON.
NOTE
Autopilot can capture Glideslope from above or

below the beam while operating in either pitch
attitude HOLD or ALT HOLD modes.
(I 0) Missed Approach
a. A/P DISC/TRlM INTER Switch -

PRESS to disengage AP.

Page 30 of 31 DATE: MAY7, 2002
A.F.M. PIN NOR/0. 707-18
P68C SUPPLEMENT D/l
b. M ISSED APPROACH - EXECUTE.
c. CWS Button - PRESS as desired to activate FD mode

during go-around maneuver.
d. AP ENG Button - PRESS ( If AP operation is desired).

Note AP annunciator ON.
NOTE
Ifit is desired to track the ILS course outbound as part of
the missed approach procedure, use the NA V mode to
prevent inadvertent GS coupling.
( 1 1) Before Landing
a. AP DISCONNECTffRIM INTERRUPT Switch -

PRESS to disengage AP.
(c) FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
NOTE
The Flight Director modes of operation are the same as
those used for autopi lot operations except when the
autopilot is not engaged and the pilot must manoeuvre the
aircraft to satisfy the Flight Director command.
No change.

The installation of the Honeywell (Bendix/King) 150 Series Flight
. Control System is listed as item K 16 in the "P68C Equipment List"
PIN NORl0.7 19-1.
Rev. 6
with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 March 2004 Page 31of31
vulcanair ... Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT E/2
SUPPLEMENT E/2
CABIN FORCED AIR HEATING SYSTEM

(As per change No. MOD.P68/04 and MOD.P68/38)
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
Flight Manual when the aircraft is equipped with a Cabin Forced Air
Heating System as per changes No. MOD.P68/04 and MOD.P68/38.
Aircraft Flight Man ual. For limitations, procedures and performance
Aircraft Flight Manual. Wherever conflict arises between information in this
supplement and the approved Flight Manual, the information herein must
take precedence.
The Cabin Forced Air Heating System improves the crew compartment
and cabin heating during e ither ground or flight operations.

SUPPLEMENT E/2 P68C
SECTION 2- LIMITATIONS
Operation of the Cabin Forced Heating System is not approved for the
following conditions:

SINGLE GENERATOR OPERATION.
PLACARDS
CABIN FORCED HOT AIR

- OFF for TIO and Landing
- OFF if single alternator failure
occurs.
Near Magnetic Compass
Magnetic Compass may deviate

by more than I 0° when Fan
Heat System is operative
On Breaker Panel:
CABIN FORCED AIR

AFT HEAT FWD
QoFFQ
FAN

A.F.M. PIN NOR 10.707-IB
P68C SUPPLEMENT E/2

ENGINE OR GENERATOR FAILURE EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
NOTE
In the event of an engine or generator failure, the
Cabin Forced Air Heating System will automatically
be powered OFF.
Add the following steps before performing the procedure

a) HEAT-FAN/OFF/ A.C. switch OFF
b) FWD fan heater switch OFF
c) AFT fan heater switch OFF

PREFLIGHT CHECK LIST,
Add the following check:
NOTE
EXTERNAL POWER UN IT CONNECTED
Cabin Forced Air Switches

I. Ventilating mode
a) HEAT-FAN/OFF/A.C. Switch HEAT-FAN
b) FWD fan heater switch FAN
c) AFT fan heater switch FAN
2. Heating Mode
a) HEAT-FAN/OFF/ A.C. Switch HEAT-FAN
b) FWD fan heater switch HEAT
c) AFT fan heater switch HEAT

Section 8 VU1'-'c11 lcill •
SUPPLEMENT E/2 P68C
NOTE
Verify proper operation of the Cabin Forced Air

Heating System by putting your hand near the cabin
air outlets. In case of system failure, switch OFF and
investigate.
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE

Add the following steps before performing the procedure
a) HEAT-FAN/OFF/A.C. OFF
b) Cabin Forced Air Switches OFF
CLIMB/CRUISE/DESCENT
CABIN FORCED AIR AS REQU IRED
BEFORE T/O OR LANDING

a) HEAT-FAN/OFF/A.C. switch OFF
b) FWD fan heater switch OFF
c) AFT fan heater switch OFF
d) Before TIO or Landing procedure COMPLETE
No changes to the basic performance provided by the Section 5 of the

Approved Aircraft Flight Manual are necessary for this supplement.
The insta llation of the Cabin Forced Air Heating System is listed as
items F 17 and F 18 in the "P68C Equipment List" PIN NOR I0.719- 1.
Rev. 6
Page 4 of8 with No. AS-AFM/04/007 on 25 March 2004
vulcanair";; Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT E/ 2

The Cabin Forced Air Heating System consists of two Vulcanair fan
heaters (PIN 7.6271 -1 ), and the necessary hardware to complete the system.
One fan heater is installed on the floor behind the instrument panel
(MOD.P68/04), and the other is mounted on a bracket suspended from the
right stringer behind the baggage compartment bulkhead (MOD.P68/38).
Two outlets installed on the FWD fan heater provide proper distribution
of hot air in the FWD cabin compartment, while another two outlets channel
hot air for windshield defrosting.
The AFT fan heater blows hot air into the passenger compartment
through a n out let installed in the aft bulkhead. A recycle inlet is also
installed in the aft bulkhead, and ducts air to the rear of the fan heater.
The system is controlled by three switches, installed on the breaker
panel, having the following functions:
a) Switch "HEAT/FAN - OFF - AIR COND"
- The HEAT FAN position enables the Cabin Air Heating
System
- The AIR COND position enables the Cabin Air Conditioning
System
- The OFF position disables both systems
b) Switch "FWD HEAT- O FF - FAN"

- The HEAT position switches the FWD cabin ai r heati ng mode
ON
- The FAN position switches the FWD cabin air ventilating mode
ON
- The OFF position switches both modes OFF
c) Switch "AFT HEAT- OFF - FAN"

- The HEAT position switches the AFT cabin air heating mode
ON
- The FAN position switches the AFT cabin air heating mode ON
- The O FF position switches both modes OFF
An operational limits placard is located on the overhead panel in full

v iew of the pilot, and a compass correction p lacard is located near the
Magnetic Compass.
In the ventilati ng mode, air is directly blown into the cabin through air
outlets.
In the heating mode, the air is warmed by a heater element before being
blown into the cabin through the same air outlets.

DATE: MAY7,2002 Page S of8
Section 8 VUl(.;C:H ldlf - e
SUPPLEMENT E/2 P68C
The system is powered through the main bus. An automatic cut-off

circuit will disconnect power from the Air Heating System whenever an
alternator failure occurs. Each Fan Heater circuit is protected by a 50 Amp
circuit breaker.
A thermal switch located inside the fan heaters, together with external
relays, are provided to turn the fan heaters OFF in case of overheating. If
this occurs, the system can be reset by turning the switch OFF and ON
again.
Should overheating re-occur, the system must be switched OFF and
troubleshooting carried out once on ground.

vulcanairs:; Section 8
P68C SUPPLEMENT E/2
'JO I:·
CABIN .\IR DUCT
NOT SHOWN
RECYCLE:> RECYCLE
VIEW FROM " Z "
AIR HOSE INTAK E
AFT BULKHEAD
TRIM PANEL
CABIN FORCED HOT AIR
· OPERATIONAL LIMIT!: ..
• OFF for T•O and lmdmo
-OFF 1r •myl• •t"Qine PLACARDS
~t•mntor filllute occur'Q
~IP.:
~
_
...
-·_!
_,_ -- A F r st.rLIO-IE.\O
PLACAROS 121
ON AFT TRIM PANEL
Uill91•f•l••ll.,. ..,_ -
... i
j :7 ':'.:' •... ..:. ·
·- ~· .
·-
Figure 1-1
CABIN FORCED AI R HEATING SYSTEM LAYOUT
(A/C incorporating MOD.P68/38)

Section 8 VUl\;cll IClll •
SUPPLEMENT E/2 P68C
TOP VIEW
FWD
-------
FWD
FAN HEATER
DUCT
DETAIL "B"
Figure 1-2
CABIN FORCED A IR HEATING SYSTEM LAYOUT
- FWD FAN HEATER INSTALLATION -
(A/C incorporating MOD.P68/04)


VH-VMV Poh PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VH-VMV Poh PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vulcanair

Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM)

A FM D~cument Identifier : JNOR10.707-1B

• .;'i_; ..,; Numbr':...d.Ppli<·abilirv Rrfeunce Ctxlr.<

~·ig~1atory for t/le CM/ Aviation Safe~r .·1111/tority ': ........

Pri11ted .Vame ofabu••e Signutory:

l:jfectiw Dute bf'(/ii.• CASA Approl'nl Pui:r: ~- P2004__ _ ____]

SERIAL NUMBER ... 4..3.S.~ ........ .

FOR U.S. REGISTERED AIRCRAFT TH IS MANUAL IS F.A.A.

THE A.F.M. IS ENAC APPROVED WITH LETTER NO. 02/171 243/SPA

THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE CA R~IED IN THE AIRCRAFT AT ALL

Ame11dme11t Record Slieet

Issue of CASA Approval Page & Amendment Record Sheet fort

Appiication of this Manual is limited to the specific Vulcanair P68C

This handbook cannot be used for operational purposes unless kept in

The information contained in the Flight Manual will be kept current by

Revision material will consist of information necessary to update the

Whenever necessary, revisions will be distributed as complete page

(g) Page number followed by a small letter shall be inserted in direct

Revised text and illustrations shall be indicated by a black vertical line

Changes in capitalisation, spelling, punctuation or the physical location

:JATE: MAY 7, 2002

REY. REF. J\PPROYJ\ L

iii; 4-7; 4-8; 6-4 1;

6-42; 8-ii; ENAC No.

Cover Page; Sep. 11 ENACNo.

8-i; 8-ii; sci~ .

6-25; 8-ii; Oct. 02,

LOG OF REVISIONS (Cont.)

Suppl. U: Page 14;

I Added Suppl. U/ I with No.

LOG OF REVISIONS (Cont.)

REV. REF. APPROVAL

Oct. II, EASA

Section Title List of effective pages

GENERAL 1-i and

2 OPERATING LIMITA TIO NS 2-i, 2-ii and

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 3-i, 3-ii and

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES 4-i, 4-ii and

5 PERFORMANCE 5-i, 5-ii, 5-iii and

6 EQUIPMENT LIST 6-i and

7 SYST EMS DESCRIPTION 7-i, 7-ii and

SUBJECT: FUEL SYSTEM

All P68 Series aircraft.

First Issue dated 24/06/02 Page 1 of9

MMCabin fuel selector knob is stiff and difficult to operate

.6.V.Thc dctcnt indicating the correct valve positions is no longer perceptible;

1.5 TIME REQUIRED

1.6 SPECIAL TOOLS

1. 7 VARIATION IN WEIGHT & BALANCE

1.8 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LOAD

1.9 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

I.JO PUBLICATIONS AFFECTED

I.I I APPLICATION TO BE CARRIED OUT BY

First Issue dated 24/06/02 Page 2 of 9

2.3. In case ofan un-pcrccptible dctcnt, pcrfonn trouble shooting as follows:

2.3.6 If the co ntrol knob operates freely (Figures I and 2 refer).

2.3.7 If the control knob is hard to operate (Figures 2, 3 and 4 refer)

First Issue dated 24/06/02 Page 3 of9

2. WORK PROCEDURE (cont.)

First Issue dated 24/06/02 Page 4 of 9

2. WORK PROCEDURE (cont.)

2.4 FUEL SYSTEM OPERATIONAL CHECK